6000i CNC User’s Manual

November 2009 www.anilam.com

CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Contents

Section 1 - Introduction
Effectivity Notation ........................................................................................................................... 1-1
Getting Started ................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Programming Concepts.................................................................................................................... 1-3
Programs.......................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Axis Descriptions .............................................................................................................................. 1-3
X-Axis ........................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Y-Axis ........................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Z-Axis ........................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Defining Positions ............................................................................................................................ 1-5
Polar Coordinates ......................................................................................................................... 1-6
Absolute Positioning ..................................................................................................................... 1-6
Incremental Positioning ................................................................................................................ 1-7
Angle Measurement ......................................................................................................................... 1-7
Plane Selection ................................................................................................................................ 1-8
Arc Direction..................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Section 2 - CNC Console and Software Basics
The Console ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Keypad ............................................................................................................................................. 2-2
Alphanumeric Keys....................................................................................................................... 2-3
Editing Keys ................................................................................................................................. 2-6
CNC Keyboard (Option) ................................................................................................................... 2-6
Soft Keys (F1) to (F10) ..................................................................................................................... 2-6
Manual Panel ................................................................................................................................... 2-6
Software Basics ............................................................................................................................... 2-7
Pop-Up Menus.............................................................................................................................. 2-7
Clearing Entries ............................................................................................................................ 2-8
Operator Prompts ......................................................................................................................... 2-8
Cursor ........................................................................................................................................... 2-8
Overwrite and Inserting Text......................................................................................................... 2-8
Deleting Text ................................................................................................................................ 2-8
Section 3 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup
Powering On the CNC ...................................................................................................................... 3-1
Shutting Down the CNC ................................................................................................................... 3-5
Emergency Stop (E-STOP) ................................................................................................................ 3-5
Activating/Resetting the Servos ....................................................................................................... 3-5
Manual Panel ................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Manual Panel Keys....................................................................................................................... 3-7
Manual Panel LEDs ...................................................................................................................... 3-8
Manual Mode Screen ....................................................................................................................... 3-9
Machine Status Display Area Labels .......................................................................................... 3-10
Program Area Labels .................................................................................................................. 3-10
Manual Mode Settings ................................................................................................................... 3-11
PLC, OLM, OSC, and SIK Descriptions...................................................................................... 3-13
Shut Down (SHIFT + F10) ............................................................................................................ 3-13
Messages (Msgs) (SHIFT + F1) ................................................................................................... 3-14
Activating Manual Mode Rapid or Feed ...................................................................................... 3-15
Adjusting Rapid Move Speed ..................................................................................................... 3-15
Adjusting Feedrate ..................................................................................................................... 3-15
Absolute Mode............................................................................................................................ 3-16

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. iii

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Contents

Jog Moves ...................................................................................................................................... 3-17

Changing the Jog Mode ............................................................................................................. 3-17
Selecting an Axis ........................................................................................................................ 3-17
Jogging the Machine (Incremental Moves) ................................................................................. 3-18
Jogging the Machine (Continuous Moves) ................................................................................. 3-18
Manual Data Input Mode ................................................................................................................ 3-19
Using Manual Data Input Mode .................................................................................................. 3-20
Operating the Handwheel (Optional) .............................................................................................. 3-21
Section 4 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes
Rapid Move – End-Point (G0) .......................................................................................................... 4-4
Feed Move – End-Point (G1) ........................................................................................................... 4-5
Angular Motion Programming Example ............................................................................................ 4-6
Circular Interpolation (G2 and G3) ................................................................................................... 4-7
Examples of Circular Interpolation ................................................................................................ 4-8
Dwell (G4) ...................................................................................................................................... 4-11
Programming Non-modal Exact Stop (G9) ..................................................................................... 4-12
Plane Selection (G17, G18, G19) ................................................................................................... 4-12
Setting Stroke Limit (G22) .............................................................................................................. 4-14
Reference Point Return (G28) ........................................................................................................ 4-15
Return from Reference Point (G29) ............................................................................................... 4-16
Move Reference from Machine Home (G30).................................................................................. 4-17
Probe Move (G31) .......................................................................................................................... 4-17
Fixture Offset (Work Coordinate System Select) (G53) ................................................................. 4-18
Fixture Offset Table .................................................................................................................... 4-18
Activating the Fixture Offset Table.............................................................................................. 4-19
Changing Fixture Offsets in the Table ........................................................................................ 4-19
Adjusting Fixture Offsets in the Table ......................................................................................... 4-19
G53 Programming Examples...................................................................................................... 4-20
Modal Corner Radius/Chamfering (G59, G60) ............................................................................... 4-21
In-Position Mode (Exact Stop Check) (G61) .................................................................................. 4-23
Contouring Mode (Cutting Mode) (G64) ......................................................................................... 4-24
User Macros (G65, G66, G67) ....................................................................................................... 4-25
Axis Rotation (G68) ........................................................................................................................ 4-28
G68 Programming Examples...................................................................................................... 4-29
Activating Inch (G70) or MM (G71) Mode....................................................................................... 4-32
Scaling (G72) ................................................................................................................................. 4-32
Activating Absolute (G90) or Incremental (G91) Mode ................................................................... 4-33
Absolute Zero Point Programming (G92) ....................................................................................... 4-33
Mirroring (G100) ............................................................................................................................. 4-34
BlockForm (G120) .......................................................................................................................... 4-35
Programmable Temporary Path Tolerance (G1000) ...................................................................... 4-36
Feedrate (FEED) ............................................................................................................................ 4-37
Section 5 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms
Canned Cycles ................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Drilling, Tapping, and Boring Canned Cycles (G81 to G89) ............................................................. 5-2
Drilling Off (G80)........................................................................................................................... 5-3
Basic Drill Cycle (G81) ................................................................................................................. 5-3
CounterBore Drill Cycle (G82) ...................................................................................................... 5-3
Peck Drill Cycle (G83) .................................................................................................................. 5-4
Tapping Cycle (G84) .................................................................................................................... 5-5
Boring Bidirectional Cycle (G85)................................................................................................... 5-6

iv All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Contents

Boring Unidirectional Cycle (G86) ................................................................................................ 5-6

Chip Break Cycle (G87) ................................................................................................................ 5-7
Flat Bottom Boring Cycle (G89) .................................................................................................... 5-8
Drilling Example............................................................................................................................ 5-8
Pattern Drill Cycles ..................................................................................................................... 5-10
Drill Bolt Hole Cycle (G79) .......................................................................................................... 5-10
Drill Pattern Cycle (G179) ........................................................................................................... 5-11
Pocket Cycles ................................................................................................................................ 5-13
Draft Angle Pocket Cycle (G73).................................................................................................. 5-14
Frame Pocket Cycle (G75) ......................................................................................................... 5-16
Hole Mill Cycle (G76) .................................................................................................................. 5-18
Circular Pocket Cycle (G77) ....................................................................................................... 5-20
Rectangular Pocket Cycle (G78) ................................................................................................ 5-22
Irregular Pocket Cycle (G169) .................................................................................................... 5-24
Islands (G162) ............................................................................................................................ 5-26
Irregular Pocket Examples ......................................................................................................... 5-30
Face Mill Cycle (G170) ............................................................................................................... 5-32
Circular Profile Cycle (G171) ...................................................................................................... 5-34
Rectangular Profile Cycle (G172) ............................................................................................... 5-36
Mill Cycle (G175) ........................................................................................................................ 5-38
EndMill Cycle (G176) .................................................................................................................. 5-39
Thread Mill Cycle (G181) ............................................................................................................ 5-40
Plunge Circular Pocket Cycle (G177) ......................................................................................... 5-43
Plunge Rectangular Pocket (G178) ............................................................................................ 5-44
Slot Cycle (G210) ....................................................................................................................... 5-46
Circular Slot Cycle (G211) .......................................................................................................... 5-48
Engrave Cycle (G190) .................................................................................................................... 5-50
Subprograms .................................................................................................................................. 5-52
Subprogram Addresses .............................................................................................................. 5-53
Repetition of Subprogram (Loop) ............................................................................................... 5-53
Calling a Subprogram from a Subprogram ................................................................................. 5-54
End of Subprogram (M99) with a P-Code ................................................................................... 5-57
Subprogram for Multiple Parts Programming.............................................................................. 5-57
Loop Function ............................................................................................................................. 5-58
Probing Cycles ............................................................................................................................... 5-61
Tool Probe Cycles ...................................................................................................................... 5-62
Spindle Probe Cycles ................................................................................................................. 5-77
Section 6 - Program Editor
Activating the Program Editor........................................................................................................... 6-1
Activating Edit Mode from the Manual Screen .............................................................................. 6-2
Activating Edit Mode from the Program Manager ......................................................................... 6-2
Activating Edit Mode from Draw Graphics .................................................................................... 6-2
Editing Soft Keys .............................................................................................................................. 6-3
Move (F7) Description from Edit Screen ....................................................................................... 6-5
Edit Funct (F8) Description from Edit Screen ............................................................................... 6-6
Marking Programming Blocks .......................................................................................................... 6-7
Unmarking Program Blocks.............................................................................................................. 6-7
Saving Edits ..................................................................................................................................... 6-7
Canceling Unsaved Edits ................................................................................................................. 6-7
Deleting a Character ........................................................................................................................ 6-7
Deleting a Program Block................................................................................................................. 6-8
Inserting a Program Block ................................................................................................................ 6-8

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. v

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Contents

Undeleting a Block ........................................................................................................................... 6-9

Canceling Edits to a Program Block ................................................................................................. 6-9
Restore Canceled Edits to a Program Block .................................................................................... 6-9
Inserting Text without Overwriting Previous Text ............................................................................. 6-9
Inserting Text and Overwriting Previous Text ................................................................................. 6-10
Advancing to the Beginning or End of a Block ............................................................................... 6-10
Advancing to the First or Last Block of a Program ......................................................................... 6-10
Searching the Program Listing for Specific Text ............................................................................ 6-11
Find/Replace Description from Edit Funct (F8) Pop-up Menu .................................................... 6-12
Replacing Typed Text with New Text ............................................................................................. 6-13
Going to a Block of the Program Listing ......................................................................................... 6-13
Scrolling Through the Program ...................................................................................................... 6-14
Paging Through the Program ......................................................................................................... 6-14
Inserting a Blank Line ..................................................................................................................... 6-14
Copying Program Blocks ................................................................................................................ 6-15
Pasting Blocks within a Program .................................................................................................... 6-15
Including Comments in a Program Listing ...................................................................................... 6-16
Section 7 - Edit Help
Edit Help Soft Keys .......................................................................................................................... 7-2
Using Help Graphic Screens to Enter Program Blocks .................................................................... 7-3
G-Functions...................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Basic Modal Functions ................................................................................................................. 7-5
Tool Radius Compensation .......................................................................................................... 7-5
Arcs .............................................................................................................................................. 7-6
Milling and Profiles ....................................................................................................................... 7-9
Drilling Cycles ............................................................................................................................... 7-9
Pocket Cycles ............................................................................................................................. 7-10
Rotation, Scaling, and Mirroring ................................................................................................. 7-10
Other G-Functions ...................................................................................................................... 7-11
M-Functions ................................................................................................................................... 7-12
Basic M-Functions ...................................................................................................................... 7-12
Cooling, Cleaning, and Lubrication ............................................................................................. 7-12
Spindle Functions ....................................................................................................................... 7-12
Tool Change ............................................................................................................................... 7-12
Tools .............................................................................................................................................. 7-13
G-Code Listing ............................................................................................................................... 7-13
Entry Fields .................................................................................................................................... 7-17
M-Code Listing ............................................................................................................................... 7-18
Typing in Address Words ............................................................................................................... 7-19
Typing in M-Codes ......................................................................................................................... 7-19
Examples of G-Code Help Screens ............................................................................................... 7-20
Section 8 - Viewing Programs with Draw
Starting Draw ................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Draw Screen Description.................................................................................................................. 8-3
Display Program (F8) ................................................................................................................... 8-4
View Type (F5) ............................................................................................................................. 8-5
Adjust View (F6) ........................................................................................................................... 8-7
Opts (F9) ...................................................................................................................................... 8-8
Line Number (F8) ......................................................................................................................... 8-9
Prog Contr. (F9).......................................................................................................................... 8-10
Adjust Block Form (F1) ............................................................................................................... 8-11

vi All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Contents

Zoom (F2) ................................................................................................................................... 8-12

Rotate (F3) ................................................................................................................................. 8-13
Pan (F4) ..................................................................................................................................... 8-14
Move Cursor (F5) ....................................................................................................................... 8-15
Exiting Draw ................................................................................................................................... 8-16
Section 9 - Tool Page and Tool Management
Activating the Tool Page .................................................................................................................. 9-2
Using the Tool Page ......................................................................................................................... 9-3
Finding Tools by Number ................................................................................................................. 9-4
Changing Tool Page Values............................................................................................................. 9-5
Clearing a Tool (Whole Row)........................................................................................................ 9-5
Clearing a Single Value ................................................................................................................ 9-5
Adjusting a Single Value ............................................................................................................... 9-5
Tool Page Soft Keys and Secondary Soft Keys ............................................................................... 9-6
Extra Tool Information .................................................................................................................. 9-8
Bin Tool Information ..................................................................................................................... 9-8
Offset Tool Information ................................................................................................................. 9-9
Find Tool Number ......................................................................................................................... 9-9
Find in Table ............................................................................................................................... 9-10
PLC and OLM Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 9-10
T-Codes and Tool Activation .......................................................................................................... 9-11
Tool Definition Blocks ................................................................................................................. 9-11
Tool-Length Offsets ........................................................................................................................ 9-12
Entering Offsets in the Tool Page ............................................................................................... 9-13
Setting Tool-Length Offsets ........................................................................................................ 9-14
Entering the Z Position Manually ................................................................................................ 9-15
Diameter Offset in Tool Page ......................................................................................................... 9-15
Tool Path Compensation (G41, G42) ......................................................................................... 9-16
Using Tool Diameter Compensation and Length Offsets with Ball-End Mills .............................. 9-21
Compensation (G40, G41, G42) .................................................................................................... 9-21
Cancel Mode in Tool Compensation (G40)................................................................................. 9-22
Startup and Movement in Z Axis................................................................................................. 9-22
Temporary Change of Tool Diameter ......................................................................................... 9-23
Motion of Tool During Tool Compensation ................................................................................. 9-24
Compensation Around Acute Angles .......................................................................................... 9-27
General Precautions ................................................................................................................... 9-28
G41 Programming Example ....................................................................................................... 9-29
G42 Programming Example ....................................................................................................... 9-30
Activating Offsets via the Program ................................................................................................. 9-32
Section 10 - Program Management
Program Screen Soft Keys and Secondary Soft Keys ................................................................... 10-3
Activating the Program Screen....................................................................................................... 10-4
Changing the Program Manager Display ....................................................................................... 10-5
Creating a New Part Program ........................................................................................................ 10-7
Choosing Program Names ............................................................................................................. 10-7
Selecting a Program for Running ................................................................................................... 10-7
Selecting a Program for Editing...................................................................................................... 10-7
Deleting a Program ........................................................................................................................ 10-8
Utils Function Pop-Up Menus......................................................................................................... 10-8
Copying Programs from/to Other Directories ............................................................................... 10-10
Moving Programs from/to Other Directories ................................................................................. 10-10

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. vii

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Contents

Renaming Programs .................................................................................................................... 10-11

Marking and Unmarking Programs ............................................................................................... 10-11
Marking Programs .................................................................................................................... 10-11
Unmarking Marked Programs ................................................................................................... 10-11
Marking All Programs ............................................................................................................... 10-12
Unmarking All Marked Programs .............................................................................................. 10-12
Deleting Groups of Programs ....................................................................................................... 10-12
Creating Subdirectories ................................................................................................................ 10-12
Section 11 - Running Programs
Running a Program One Step at a Time ........................................................................................ 11-2
Using Single-Step Mode ............................................................................................................. 11-4
Holding or Canceling a Single-Step Run .................................................................................... 11-4
Single-Step Execution of Selected Program Blocks ................................................................... 11-4
Position Display Modes .................................................................................................................. 11-6
Automatic Program Execution ........................................................................................................ 11-6
Holding or Canceling an Auto Run ............................................................................................. 11-7
Starting at a Specific Block ......................................................................................................... 11-7
Clearing a Halted Program ............................................................................................................. 11-8
Using Draw While Running Programs ............................................................................................ 11-8
Parts Counter and Program Timer ............................................................................................... 11-10
Jog/Return.................................................................................................................................... 11-11
Initiating Jog/Return.................................................................................................................. 11-11
Operations Allowed While “In” Jog/Return ................................................................................ 11-11
Jog/Return Soft Keys................................................................................................................ 11-12
EXAMPLES: ............................................................................................................................. 11-13
Notes on Jog/Return................................................................................................................. 11-15
Section 12 - S and M Functions
Speed Spindle Control (S-Function) ............................................................................................... 12-1
Miscellaneous Functions (M-Code) ................................................................................................ 12-2
Control M-Codes ............................................................................................................................ 12-3
Order of Execution ......................................................................................................................... 12-4
Section 13 - Machine Software and Peripherals Installation
Keyboard Installation (Option) ........................................................................................................ 13-1
Keypad Equivalent Keyboard Keys ................................................................................................ 13-1
Peripherals Supported.................................................................................................................... 13-2
Section 14 - Off-line Software
Running and Shutting Down ........................................................................................................... 14-1
Section 15 - Four-Axis Programming
Axis Types...................................................................................................................................... 15-1
Rotary Axis Programming Conventions.......................................................................................... 15-2
Programming Examples ................................................................................................................. 15-2
Example 1: Drill ......................................................................................................................... 15-3
Example 2: Mill .......................................................................................................................... 15-4
Example 3: Mill .......................................................................................................................... 15-5

viii All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Contents

Section 16 - DXF Converter Feature

Requirements ................................................................................................................................. 16-1
Off-line Software ......................................................................................................................... 16-1
Machine Software ....................................................................................................................... 16-1
Entry to the DXF Converter ............................................................................................................ 16-2
Creating Shapes ......................................................................................................................... 16-3
Contours ..................................................................................................................................... 16-3
Drilling ........................................................................................................................................ 16-3
CNC Code ...................................................................................................................................... 16-4
Mouse Operations .......................................................................................................................... 16-4
DXF Soft Keys................................................................................................................................ 16-5
Fitting the Display to the Viewing Window .................................................................................. 16-6
Using the Window Zoom ............................................................................................................ 16-6
Halving Display Size ................................................................................................................... 16-6
Doubling Display Size ................................................................................................................. 16-6
DXF Entities Supported .................................................................................................................. 16-7
Drawing Entities Not Supported.................................................................................................. 16-7
Files Created .................................................................................................................................. 16-8
DXF Examples ............................................................................................................................... 16-8
Unedited Conversational Program Listing ................................................................................ 16-10
Unedited G-Code Program Listing ............................................................................................ 16-11
Unedited Program Run in Draw ................................................................................................ 16-12
Edited Conversational Program Listing .................................................................................... 16-13
Edited G-Code Program Listing ................................................................................................ 16-15
Section 17 - Advanced Programming Features
Modifiers......................................................................................................................................... 17-1
Block Separators ............................................................................................................................ 17-2
Tool Offset Modification ................................................................................................................. 17-2
Expressions and Functions ............................................................................................................ 17-5
Examples .................................................................................................................................... 17-6
System Variables ........................................................................................................................... 17-8
User Variables ................................................................................................................................ 17-9
Variable Programming (Parametric Programming) ................................................................... 17-10
User Macros (G65, G66, G67) ..................................................................................................... 17-17
Macro Body Structure ............................................................................................................... 17-18
Setting and Passing Parameters .............................................................................................. 17-18
Probe Move (G31) ........................................................................................................................ 17-26
Conditional Statements ................................................................................................................ 17-27
Unconditional LOOP Repeat ........................................................................................................ 17-29
Short Form Addressing ................................................................................................................ 17-29
Logical and Comparative Terms .................................................................................................. 17-30
Logical Terms ........................................................................................................................... 17-30
Comparative Terms .................................................................................................................. 17-30
File Inclusion ................................................................................................................................ 17-31
Index ....................................................................................................................................... Index-1

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. ix

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Introduction

Section 1 - Introduction
This manual describes the concepts, programming commands, and CNC
programming formats used to program ANILAM CNC products. Use the
Contents and Index to locate topics of interest. In general, topics are
presented in order of complexity. For example, “Section 1” describes
basic CNC topics while later sections describe Drawing Exchange Format
(DXF) converter programming and special programming features that
require a firm grasp of CNC programming.
The following topics are described in this section:
‰ Effectivity Notation
‰ Getting Started
‰ Programming Concepts
‰ Programs
‰ Axis Descriptions
‰ Defining Positions
‰ Angle Measurement
‰ Plane Selection
‰ Arc Direction

Effectivity Notation
Some sections of this manual apply only to specific ANILAM CNC
product(s). In these sections, icons in the left margin identify the
product(s) to which the information applies. Table 1-1 lists the icons for
each CNC product and the number of axes supported by each product.

Table 1-1, CNC Effectivity Icon Description

Icon Product Axes Supported

6000i-3X
6300M
6000i-3X Systems 3

6000i-4X
6400M
6000i-4X Systems 4

NOTE: All systems also support one spindle axis.

The main difference between the products is the number of axes

supported. Generally, this manual describes the 6000i-3X systems. The
6000i-4X operates exactly as the 6000i-3X system except for features
that include the additional axes.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 1-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Introduction

Getting Started
Before you start to write a program, determine the work holding device
and the location of Part Zero (the point to which all movement is
referenced). Since absolute positions are defined from Part Zero, try to
select a location that directly corresponds to dimensions provided on the
part print, such as the lower left corner of the work. Then, you can
develop a program using a procedure similar to the one that follows:
1. To enter the Program Manager from the Manual screen, press
Program (F2). Create a program name for the part.
2. Enter the Program Editor (Edit F8) to open the new program and start
writing blocks.
3. The first block of any program is usually a safe start position and tool-
change position (a position away from the work where the axes can
return for safe tool changing). The first block is normally also used to
specify the units of measurement (Inch/MM), mode of operation
(Absolute), move type (Rapid), and to cancel all auxiliary functions
(Tool Offsets, Spindle, and Coolant).
Typical first blocks: G70 G90 G0 G28 Z0
M5
4. Subsequent blocks in the program set Spindle information, call Tool
number, turn on Coolant, and make the initial move toward the work.
5. The remaining blocks in the program describe the required moves,
Canned Cycles, and Tool changes to complete the machining.
6. The next to the last block in the program returns the axes to the Tool
change position, turning off any auxiliary functions (Tool Offsets,
Spindle, and Coolant). The last block (M2) ends the program.
Typical final blocks: M9
M5
G0 G28 Z0
X0 Y0
M2
7. After you write a program, verify it. Run it in Draw Graphics Mode to
troubleshoot for errors. Verify that all programmed moves are safe
and accurate to the part print dimensions.
8. Now, load the stock material into the selected work-holding device.
9. Set the Tool Offsets for each tool in the Tool Page.
10. Before running the part in the Auto Mode, run it in Single-Step Mode
to verify that both the program and the setting of Tool Offsets have
been correctly completed. Single-Step Mode allows you to execute
the program block-by-block.
11. After you test the program, make any necessary corrections.
12. When the finished program is ready for production, back it up on a
USB Memory Stick.

1-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Introduction

Programming Concepts
This section contains programming concepts for the beginning
programmer. You must master these concepts and be familiar with the
terminology in order to write programs.

Programs
A program is the set of instructions that the CNC uses to direct the
machine movements. Each line of instructions is called a block. Each
block runs independently, thus allowing the program to be stepped along,
one block at a time.
Axis Descriptions
The machine moves along its axes of motion. All movements along an
axis are either in a positive or negative direction. Not all machines use
the same system to identify axes. The descriptions used in this manual
are commonly used to identify 3-axis mills.

NOTE: To visualize machine movements correctly, imagine tool motion

rather than table motion.

The following topics are described:

‰ X-Axis
‰ Y-Axis
‰ Z-Axis

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 1-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Introduction

X-Axis
Table movement along the X-axis is to the left and right. Positive motion
is table movement to the left; negative motion is table movement to the
right. Refer to Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1, Mill Axes of Motion

Y-Axis
Table movement along the Y-axis is inward and outward. Positive motion
is table movement outward; negative motion is table movement inward.

Z-Axis
Spindle movement along the Z-axis is upward and downward. Positive
motion is tool movement upward (away from the workpiece); negative
motion is tool movement downward (into the workpiece).

1-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Introduction

Defining Positions
The intersection of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes is the reference point from
which to define most positions. Refer to Figure 1-2. This point is the X0,
Y0, Z0 position.
Most positions are identified by there X, Y, and Z coordinates. A position
two inches left, three inches back, and four inches up has an X coordinate
of X -2.0, a Y coordinate of Y3.0, and a Z coordinate of Z4.0.
The following topics are described:
‰ Polar Coordinates
‰ Absolute Positioning
‰ Incremental Positioning

Figure 1-2, Locating Positions

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 1-5

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Introduction

Polar Coordinates
Polar Coordinates define points that lie only on a single plane. Polar
coordinates use the distance from the origin and an angle to locate
points. Refer to Figure 1-3.

Figure 1-3, Polar Coordinate System

Absolute Positioning
In Absolute Mode, all positions are measured from Absolute Zero.
Absolute Zero is not a fixed position on the machine. It is a selected
point. Refer to Figure 1-4.

Figure 1-4, Absolute Positioning

You can set Absolute Zero (X0, Y0) anywhere. Usually, it is set at a
position that enables you to use the dimensions specified on the
blueprint. This is also called setting the Part Zero.
The Absolute Zero (Part Zero) can be moved as often as necessary,
either manually or in a program.

1-6 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Introduction

Incremental Positioning
Incremental positions are measured from one point to another, or from
the machines present position. This is convenient for performing an
operation at regular intervals. Incremental positions are measured from
the tool’s present position. Refer to Figure 1-5.

NOTE: An incremental 0 inch (0 mm) move does not make a position

change because you are located at the 0 reference point
(current position).

Figure 1-5, Incremental Positioning

Angle Measurement
Angles are measured with the 3 o’clock position as the Zero Degree
Reference. Positive angles rotate counter-clockwise; negative angles
rotate clockwise. Refer to Figure 1-6.

Figure 1-6, Absolute Angle Measurement

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 1-7

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Introduction

Plane Selection
Circular moves and tool diameter compensation are confined to the plane
you select. Three planes are available: the XY plane (G17), the XZ plane
(G18), and the YZ plane (G19). It is important to view a plane correctly
when you plan a circular move. If a plane is viewed from the wrong side,
arc directions, angle references, and axis signs are displayed reversed.
The standard rule is to view a plane looking in the negative direction
along the unused axis. Refer to Figure 1-7.

Figure 1-7, Plane Identification

1-8 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Introduction

Arc Direction
The standard rule is to view arc direction for a plane from the positive
towards the negative direction along the unused axis. From this
viewpoint clockwise (Cw) and counterclockwise (Ccw) arc directions can
be determined. For example, in the XY plane, you view along the Z-axis,
from Z+ toward Z-, to determine Cw/Ccw directions. The Cw/Ccw arc
directions for each plane are shown in Figure 1-8.

Figure 1-8, Clockwise and Counterclockwise Arc Directions

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 1-9

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - CNC Console and Software Basics

Section 2 - CNC Console and Software Basics

The following topics are described in this section:
‰ The Console
‰ Keypad
‰ CNC Keyboard (Option)
‰ Soft Keys (F1) to (F10)
‰ Manual Panel
‰ Software Basics

The Console
The CNC console consists of a 12.1-inch color, flat-panel liquid crystal
display (LCD), keypad, soft keys, and manual panel (MP 6000M or MP
6001M Manual Panel). Refer to Figure 2-1.

LCD
Keypad

Soft Keys

Manual
Panel

Console6000i

Figure 2-1, CNC Console

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 2-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - CNC Console and Software Basics

Keypad
The following topics are described:
‰ Alphanumeric Keys
‰ Editing Keys
Refer to Figure 2-2. The keypad to the right of the LCD has the following
areas:
Alphanumeric Keys: This area consists of the letters of the alphabet
listed sequentially from A to W, and also includes
the CLEAR key (lower right), the numerical keypad
(0 through 9), and the SPACE key (lower-left).

Edit Keys: This area contains the SHIFT (left), ENTER (right),
and the cursor control keys (ARROWS).

CLEAR Key

SHIFT Key Character

Alphanumeric Keys
Primary Character

SPACE Key

ENTER Key
ARROW Keys Edit Keys
SHIFT Key
KEYPAD

Figure 2-2, Keypad

2-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - CNC Console and Software Basics

Alphanumeric Keys
Alphanumeric keys allow you to enter position coordinates (XYZ moves)
and program G, M, S, and T codes. Some keyfaces have two characters,
a large one in the middle of the key, and a smaller one in the upper-left
corner. The large characters are Primary characters. The smaller
characters are SHIFT key characters.
To type a primary character, press the key that contains that character.
To type a SHIFT key character:
1. Press SHIFT and release. You do not need to hold down the key, the
SHIFT condition remains On until you press the next key.

2. Press the key that displays the required character in the upper-left
corner. Refer to Table 2-1.

Table 2-1, Alphanumeric Keys

Key Face Primary Function SHIFT Function

Letter A None

Letter B Less Than Symbol

Letter C Greater Than Symbol

Letter D Caret

Letter E None

Letter F/Feedrate Left Bracket

Letter G/G Codes Right Bracket

Letter H Exclamation Point

Letter I None

Letter J Apostrophe

Letter K Tilde Symbol

Letter L “At” Symbol

Letter M None
Miscellaneous Functions

(Continued…)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 2-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - CNC Console and Software Basics

Table 2-1, Alphanumeric Keys (Continued)

Key Face Primary Function SHIFT Function

Letter N Left Curly Bracket

Letter O Right Curly Bracket

Program Number
Designator
Letter P Dollar Sign

Letter Q None

Letter R Underscore

Letter S/Spindle Speed Backslash

Designator
Letter T/Tool words Single Quote

Letter U None

Letter V Question Mark

Letter W Colon

Letter X None
X Axis Coordinate
Letter Y None
Y Axis Coordinate
Letter Z None
Z Axis Coordinate
Number One Left Parenthesis
RAPID
Number Two Right Parenthesis
LINE
Number Three Pound or Number Sign
ARC
Number Four Vertical Bar: used to separate
FEED parts of a blueprint-programming
block for angles/chamfers/radii.
Number Five Semi-Colon
TOOL (shortcut key not
enabled)
(Continued…)

2-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - CNC Console and Software Basics

Table 2-1, Alphanumeric Keys (Continued)

Key Face Primary Function SHIFT Function

Number Six Slash (Right)
MCODE (shortcut key
not enabled)
Number Seven Ampersand
MM/IN (shortcut key not
enabled)
Number Eight Percent Symbol
DWELL (shortcut key not
enabled)
Number Nine Inch Symbol
PLANE (shortcut key not
enabled)
Number 0 Equal Sign

Minus Sign/Dash Plus Sign

Period/Decimal Sign Asterisk: used to “comment out”

RPM (shortcut key not all or part of a block (characters
enabled) to the right of the asterisk are
ignored). The CNC ignores
these blocks.
Space Key Blank Space

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 2-5

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - CNC Console and Software Basics

Editing Keys
Use the Editing Keys to edit programs and move around the screen.
Refer to Table 2-2.
Table 2-2, Editing Keys

Label or Name Key Face Purpose

SHIFT Displays additional options on the soft key
menu. Allows access to additional soft
keys.
CLEAR Clears selected messages, values,
commands, and program blocks.

ARROW Allows you to move highlight bars and

cursor around the screen.

ENTER Activates menu selections, activates

alphanumeric entry, or creates new line.

Use Editing Keys to control machine movements manually. Refer to

“Section 3 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup” for a detailed
description of the Manual Panel.
CNC Keyboard (Option)
The CNC supports most standard USB PC keyboards. Refer to “Section
13 - Machine Software and Peripherals Installation.” All keypad inputs
except E-STOP and SERVO RESET have assigned keyboard equivalents.
Soft Keys (F1) to (F10)
Labeled soft keys F1 to F10, also called function keys, are located just
below the monitor. Soft key functions are not hardwired; their functions
change with changes in mode. Labels indicate the function of each soft
key. Unlabeled soft keys are inactive.
Manual Panel
Refer to “Section 3 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup” for
information on the manual panel and the optional handwheel.

2-6 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - CNC Console and Software Basics

Software Basics
The CNC’s screens change as different modes are activated. Basic
procedures and features of the software remain the same, regardless of
the CNC’s mode.
The following topics are described:
‰ Pop-Up Menus
‰ Clearing Entries
‰ Operator Prompts
‰ Cursor
‰ Overwrite and Inserting Text
‰ Deleting Text

Pop-Up Menus
Pop-up menus are temporary menus that allow you to make additional
selections. Each pop-up menu contains a highlight bar. The ARROWS
move the highlight bar up and down the menu. Press ENTER to activate a
highlighted selection. Press the soft key that activated the pop-up menu
again to deactivate the function. Refer to Figure 2-3.

UTILITIES POP-UP

Figure 2-3, Pop-Up Menu

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 2-7

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - CNC Console and Software Basics

Clearing Entries
Press CLEAR to clear an entry in an entry field or a character from a
program.

Operator Prompts
The CNC sometimes prompts for required information. Enter numbers
from the keypad.

Cursor
The CNC uses either a cursor or highlight to mark an item for selection or
editing. The highlight displays in the Edit Mode, Program Manager, and
Manual Mode. Use the ARROWS to move the highlight. The software
highlights a selected item in a menu or window. Selected items can be
activated or changed.
For instance, highlight a program block in Edit Mode to edit it. Highlight
an entry field label in a graphic menu to enter a value or toggle between
the available selections.
The cursor displays when the Tool Page activates. The cursor is a white
underline that indicates where letters and numbers are inserted.

Overwrite and Inserting Text

The Editor has two text-entry modes, Insert Off (overwrite) and Insert On
[Default: Insert On]. In the Insert Off (overwrite) mode, new characters
replace characters marked by the cursor.
In the Insert On mode, new characters are displayed at the cursor and
existing characters move to the right. When the Insert On mode is active,
Insert On (F8) highlights. To put the CNC in the Insert On mode:
1. When the CNC prompts for a name, toggle to Insert On (F8). The
CNC highlights Insert On (F8).

Deleting Text
To delete text:
1. Move the cursor to underline the text to be deleted.
2. Press Delete (F7) to delete the selected text.

2-8 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Section 3 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

The following topics are described in this section:
‰ Powering On the CNC
‰ Shutting Down the CNC
‰ Emergency Stop (E-STOP)
‰ Activating/Resetting the Servos
‰ Manual Panel
‰ Manual Mode Screen
‰ Manual Mode Settings
‰ Jog Moves
‰ Manual Date Input Mode
‰ Operating the Handwheel (Optional)

Powering On the CNC

NOTE: When you power-on the CNC, ensure that the E-STOP switch is
in the in position.

1. Turn on the CNC according to the builder’s instructions. When the

power switch is turned on, the CNC completely resets.
2. Turn the power switch ON. The startup screen activates (see
Figure 3-1).

START

Figure 3-1, Start Screen

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 3-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

3. Reset the servo drive by pressing the sERVO RESET button with the
EMERGENCY STOP button Out.

4. Press Home (F4) and then press (START) to start. The CNC displays
the Manual screen (see Figure 3-2).

MANUAL

Figure 3-2, Manual Screen

5. Select Manual (F4) to display the Manual screen (refer to Figure 3-7,
Manual Screen for illustration with callouts). Refer to Table 3-3,
Manual Screen Soft Keys.
6. Press the SHIFT key on the keyboard to display the Manual Shift
screen (refer to Figure 3-3, Shift Screen from Manual Screen).
Refer to Table 3-4, Manual Screen Secondary Soft Keys.

3-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

SHIFT MANUAL

Figure 3-3, Shift Screen from Manual Screen

7. Press the Display Gauge (F4) soft key to display the Display Gauge
screen (refer to Figure 3-4). Select the Gauge information that you
want to display on the Manual screen:
• SpindleMotorLoad Spindle Motor Load
• X-MotorLoad X Axis Motor Load
• Y-MotorLoad Y Axis Motor Load
• Z-MotorLoad Z Axis Motor Load

DISPLAY GAUGE

Figure 3-4, Display Gauge from SHIFT Manual Screen

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 3-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

8. Press the Display Gauge (F1) soft key to display the Gauge
information on the Manual screen (refer to Figure 3-5). Refer to
Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 describes the Display Gauge soft keys.
Table 3-1, Display Gauge Screen Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Function
Display F1 Displays the gauge information selected
Gauge on the Manual screen.
Remove F2 Removes the gauge information field
Gauge and label from the Manual screen.
Cancel F10 Exits the Display Gauges screen and
does not save changes.

Display
Gauge
field

MANUALwithGAUGEInfo

Figure 3-5, Manual Screen with Gauge Display

The Display Gauge field is dynamic. When the spindle motor load
increases, the field in the Display Gauge increases.

3-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Shutting Down the CNC

1. Press E-STOP to disengage the servos and then revert to Manual
Mode.
2. Press Shut Down (SHIFT+F10) to display the Shut Down soft keys.
Press Shut Down (F1) to display the power down the CNC. Press
Cancel (F2) to cancel the shut down.
3. Follow the builder’s instructions for turning off the CNC.

Emergency Stop (E-STOP)

Press E-STOP to take all axes and spindle servos offline. This ends all
machine movement.

To reset E-STOP, pull out and turn the rotary switch clockwise in the
direction of the arrows. The switch makes a clicking sound when it
resets.
Resetting E-STOP does not automatically reactivate the servos. The
servos must be reset to move the machine. Press SERVO RESET to reset
the servos.

Activating/Resetting the Servos

For safety reasons, the CNC powers up with the servomotors
disengaged. While the servos are off, the CNC cannot move the
machine. The servos are also disengaged when you press E-STOP.
Reset the servos as follows:
1. If a limit switch disengaged the servos, manually reposition the
machine inside its normal range of travel.
2. Press E-STOP to display the message External emergency stop.
3. Rotate the E-STOP switch in the direction of the arrows to reset it. The
E-STOP switch makes a clicking sound when it resets.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 3-5

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Manual Panel
Use the keys on the manual panel to move the machine manually. Refer
to Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-6, Manual Panel

The following topics are described:

‰ Manual Panel Keys
‰ Manual Panel LEDs

3-6 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Manual Panel Keys

Manual panel keys allow you to control machine movements manually.
These keys are located on the Manual Panel. Refer to Table 3-2.

Table 3-2, Manual Operation Keys

Label/Name Key Face Purpose

Handwheel Moves the selected controlled axis while in the Manual Mode.
Jog must be set to 1, 10, or 100. Optional.

Y Z
Axis Select X U
In Manual Mode, selects the axis to be jogged.

AXIS

JOG Cycles the CNC through manual movement modes (FEED,

RAPID, 100, 10, 1). The machine builder sets Default rapid
and feed rates at setup.
NOTE: The machine builder determines the actual speed of
the machine during a move.
SPINDLE Overrides the programmed spindle RPM rate. It is a
OVERRIDE 13-position rotary switch that ranges from 40 to 160 percent.
SPINDLE (Each increment adjusts the spindle override by 10%.) This
feature can be used only on machines with programmable
spindles.
FEEDRATE Overrides the feed and/or rapid rate of the axes in Manual,
OVERRIDE Auto, and Single Step modes. It is a 13-position rotary
switch, which ranges from 0 to 120 percent. (Each increment
adjusts the feedback override by 10%.)
NOTE: The override range for rapid rate is 100%. The CNC
does not exceed the maximum rapid rate.
SERVO RESET Activates the servomotors.

SPINDLE Starts the spindle in a forward direction.

FORWARD
NOTE: On some machines, you must provide the gear range
and RPM before you activate this key.
SPINDLE Starts the spindle in a reverse direction.
REVERSE
NOTE: On some machines, you must provide gear range and
RPM before you activate this key.
SPINDLE OFF Stops the spindle.

START Starts all machine moves except jog.

(Continued…)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 3-7

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Table 3-2, Manual Operation Keys (Continued)

Label/Name Key Face Purpose
JOG – Moves the selected axis in a negative direction. Available in
all modes. The machine builder specifies Feedrate.
JOG + Moves the selected axis in the positive direction. Available in
all modes. The machine builder specifies Feedrate.
HOLD Halts any running program or programmed move. Press
START to continue.

E-STOP Press E-STOP to halt all axes and machine-related functions.

When you activate E-STOP, the servomotors and any
programming operations shut down. The CNC defaults to
Manual Mode.
Use E-STOP for emergency shutdown or intentional servo
shutdown.

Manual Panel LEDs

The following keys have LEDs located directly above them on the Manual
Panel. When any of the keys is activated, the corresponding LED lights
up. Refer to Figure 3-6, Manual Panel.
• Servo Reset
• Spindle Off
• Spindle Forward
• Spindle Reverse
The Coolant Ready LED is also located on the Manual Panel. Some
CNCs have a coolant ready M-function. For these CNCs, the Coolant
Ready LED lights when the coolant is ready. The coolant is programmed
to come on when the machine receives a SPINDLE ON command.

3-8 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Manual Mode Screen

In Manual Mode, the CNC displays the Manual screen. The Manual
screen is the basic operating screen and is displayed when the CNC is
turned on. All other operating screens are similar in appearance and
selected from the Manual screen soft keys. When the Manual Mode is
active, the Manual (F4) soft key label highlights. Refer to Figure 3-7.

Program Area

Program Position
Display

Distance to Go
Area

Machine Status
Display Area

Command Line

History Area
Active Soft Key
(Highlighted)

MANUAL Screen

Figure 3-7, Manual Screen

The Manual screen is divided into the following areas.
Program Area Displays the working program name, running
status, mode of operation, and in-position check.
Program Position Display
Displays programs X, Y, and Z position coordinates
in reference to Part Home.
Distance to Go
Displays the Distance to Go in reference to:
• Part Zero
• Target
Machine Status Display Area
Displays operating information.
Command Line Allows you to enter commands manually.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 3-9

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Active Soft Key Identifies the function of the soft key. Soft key
functions change from screen to screen. A
highlighted label indicates an active mode.

The following topics are described:

‰ Machine Status Display Area Labels
‰ Program Area Labels

Machine Status Display Area Labels

Tool: Active tool
Diameter: Active tool diameter
Length: Z-Axis Tool-Length Offset for active tool
Offset: Active fixture offset
G-Codes: Active G-Codes
M-Codes: Active M-Codes
Feed: Current feed rate (in inch/mm per minute)
% Feed: Feedrate override setting (0% to 120% for Feed moves
and 0% to 100% for Rapid moves)
RPM: Current spindle speed in revolutions per minute
% RPM: Spindle override setting (40% to 160%)
Spindle: Current spindle status: OFF, FORWARD, REVERSE, or
LOCKED
Loop: Loop counter. Counts subprogram repetitions.
Parts: Number of parts. Resets to zero when you enter Auto or
Single Step mode.
Timer Indicates the amount of time per part and accumulated
amount of time (in parentheses) for all parts. Resets to
zero when you enter Auto or Single Step mode.
Dwell: Seconds remaining in a dwell

Program Area Labels

Program: Name of loaded program
Block: Block number (displays in S.Step or Auto Mode only)

IN POSN All axis at target position

Green Icon: Program is running.
Red icon: Machine is in a programmed hold, has completed its
program, external hold has been activated by an event,
or HOLD was pressed.

3-10 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Manual Mode Settings

Features (or settings) that remain active for more than one operation are
said to be modal. Modal features remain active until you change or
cancel them. Most CNC functions are modal.
For example, if the CNC is in Rapid Mode, it executes all moves at the
rapid rate until you initiate Feed Mode. The CNC can be in several
modes, as long as the modes do not conflict.
Before making a manual move, make any necessary mode settings.
Modes set from the Manual screen remain active if the CNC is put in a
program mode (Auto, S.Step) until the program or operator changes the
mode.
Set the following modes from the Manual screen:
Position Mode Absolute or Incremental Mode
Move Mode Rapid or Feed Mode
Active tool Active tool, tool-length offsets, and tool radius
compensation
Measurement Mode Inch or MM Mode

The Manual screen determines the following:

• The location of Part Zero

Manual Mode provides the following types of moves:

• Jog (Conventional)
• Jog (Continuous)
• Manual Data Input (MDI)
• Handwheel (optional)

The following topics are described:

‰ PLC, OLM, OSC, and SIK Descriptions
‰ Shut Down (SHIFT + F1))
‰ Messages (Msgs) (SHIFT + F1)
‰ Activating Manual Mode Rapid or Feed
‰ Adjusting Rapid Move Speed
‰ Adjusting Feedrate
‰ Absolute Mode

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 3-11

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Table 3-3 describes the active soft keys in Manual Mode.

Table 3-3, Manual Screen Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Function
Program F2 Lists the user programs.
Edit F3 Activates the Edit Mode. A program
must first be selected.
Manual F4 Activates Manual Mode from Auto and
S.Step.
Single Step F5 Changes to Single Step Mode.
Auto F6 Changes to Auto Mode. Use to run part
programs for production.
Delete F7 Deletes a character from the command
Insert On/ F8 Toggle between Insert On and Insert Off
Insert Off (overwrite). For Insert On, the typed text
replaces the existing text.
For Insert Off (overwrite), the typed text
overwrites the existing text.
Tool F9 Displays the Tool Page. The Tool Page
stores tool diameter, length offsets, and
wear factors.
Hand F10 Activates or deactivates Handwheel
Wheel Mode. Use to jog any controlled axis in
Manual Mode.
Press SHIFT while in the Manual screen to activate the secondary soft key
functions (refer to Figure 3-3, Shift Screen from Manual Screen). Refer
to Table 3-4.
Table 3-4, Manual Screen Secondary Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Function
Msgs (SHIFT + F1) Displays the last 10 messages, both old
(already read) and new (not yet read)
Clear MDI (SHIFT + F2) Clear Manual Data Input (MDI)
Config (SHIFT + F3) Displays the Configuration screen
Display (SHIFT + F4) Display the gauge information on the
Gauge Manual screen. See Figure 3-4,
Display Gauge for Shift Manual
Screen.
PLC (SHIFT + F5) Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
OSC (SHIFT + F7) Oscilloscope (OSC)
OLM (SHIFT + F8) Online Monitor (OLM)
SIK (SHIFT + F9) Software Identification Key (SIK)
Shut Down (SHIFT +F10) Shut down the CNC

3-12 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

PLC, OLM, OSC, and SIK Descriptions

For more detailed information on PLC, OLM, OSC, and SIK, refer to
6000i CNC Technical Manual, P/N 627787-21.
PLC (SHIFT + F5) Refer to “Section 7, Selecting the PLC Mode” in
P/N 627787-21.
OSC (SHIFT + F7) Refer to “Section 5, Integrated Oscilloscope” in P/N
627787-21.
OLM (SHIFT + F8) Refer to “Section 6, Diagnosis with the Online
Monitor (OLM)” in P/N 627787-21.
SIK (SHIFT + F9) Refer to “Section 1, 6000i Overview” in P/N
627787-21.

Shut Down (SHIFT + F10)

On the Manual screen (refer to Figure 3-2, Manual Screen), press the
SHIFTkey on the keyboard to display the Manual Shift screen (refer to
Figure 3-3, Shift Screen from Manual Screen).
Table 3-5 describes the Shutdown screen active soft keys.
Table 3-5, Shut Down (SHIFT + F10) Screen Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Function
Shut Down F1 Shutdown the CNC
Cancel F2 Cancel the shutdown and return to
Manual screen

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 3-13

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Messages (Msgs) (SHIFT + F1)

On the Manual screen (refer to Figure 3-2, Manual Screen), press the
SHIFT key on the keyboard to display the Manual Shift screen (refer to
Figure 3-3, Shift Screen from Manual Screen). Refer to Figure 3-8.

MESSAGE1D

Figure 3-8, Messages Screen

Table 3-6 describes the Messages screen active soft keys.
Table 3-6, Msgs (SHIFT + F1) Screen Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Function
Info F1 The Messages information is displayed
Details F2 The Messages internal information is displayed
Log Files F3 The Messages Log File is displayed. For more detailed
information on Log Files, see 6000i CNC Technical
Manual, P/N 627787-21, “Section 6, Error Messages and
Log Files.”
More Funcs F4 Opens the More Funcs screen with soft keys:
Shut Down (F1) – Shuts down the control
Exit (F10) – Returns to the Messages screen
Change F5 When there are messages in Info (F1), press Change
Window Window (F5) to change to top/bottom in window display.
Delete All F6 Delete all messages
Delete F7 Delete the message highlighted
Exit F10 Displays the Manual screen.

3-14 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Activating Manual Mode Rapid or Feed

Turn the JOG rotary switch to cycle through all available Jog Modes.
Choose Rapid or Feed mode. The CNC displays the active Feed or
Rapid Mode in the Machine Status Display Area.

Adjusting Rapid Move Speed

The FEEDRATE OVERRIDE rotary switch also adjusts the speed of Rapid
moves. The switch provides a range of 0% to 100%. Set the switch to
100 to set the rapid rate. The maximum override rate for rapid speeds is
100%.

NOTE: The machine builder determines the default rapid rate at setup.

Adjusting Feedrate
You can run the CNC at a percentage of the programmed feedrate by
adjusting the FEEDRATE OVERRIDE switch. Each click of the FEEDRATE
OVERRIDE switch adjusts the feedrate by an increment of ten percent; the
range is 0 to 120%. Set FEEDRATE OVERRIDE to 100 to set the feedrate to
100% of the programmed feedrate.

CAUTION: If the CNC is shut down, the setup file reloads a default
feedrate at the next power-on.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 3-15

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Absolute Mode
In Absolute Mode, all positions are measured from Absolute Zero.
Absolute Zero is X0, Y0, Z0 when the Absolute Mode is active. You can
move Absolute Zero to any convenient location. All absolute XYZ
positions are measured from this point. Refer to G53 and G92 in
“Section 4 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes” for more information on
setting absolute zero. Setting Absolute Zero to a location on the part is
referred to as setting Part Zero. Refer to Figure 3-9.

Figure 3-9, Absolute Positioning

NOTE: To determine the Z-axis location of Part Zero, set tool length
offsets for each tool.

NOTE: The location of Absolute Zero can be restored after a shutdown

if the machine has the Home function installed.

CAUTION: If Part Zero is not correctly located, the CNC does not
position correctly in Absolute Mode.

3-16 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Jog Moves
You can make or change jog moves when:
• The CNC is in Manual Mode, the Teach Mode, or the Tool Page; and
• The servos are on.
The actual rate for each mode is determined at machine setup. Use the
JOG rotary switch to cycle the CNC through the Jog Mode choices. Refer
to Table 3-7 for the available Jog Modes.
Table 3-7, Jog Modes
Mode Description
Rapid Default rapid speed for continuous jogs. Actual speed
determined at machine setup.
Feed Continuous jog at feedrate determined at machine setup.
Jog: 100 Conventional Jog Mode, increment set to 100 times
machine resolution.
Jog: 10 Conventional Jog Mode, increment set to 10 times machine
resolution.
Jog: 1 Conventional Jog Mode, increment set to actual machine
resolution.
You can change the Jog Mode any time the CNC is in Manual Mode.

The following topics are described:

‰ Changing the Jog Mode
‰ Selecting an Axis
‰ Jogging the Machine (Incremental Mode)
‰ Jogging the Machine (Continuous Mode)

Changing the Jog Mode

NOTE: Jog move modes, with the exception of Jog Rapid Mode, are
performed in Feed Mode.
To change the Jog Mode:
1. In Manual Mode, turn the JOG switch to select a jog feed rate.

Selecting an Axis
To select an axis in the Manual Mode:
1. Use the AXIS SELECT rotary switch to cycle through the available axes.
Turn the switch until the indicator points to the required axis.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 3-17

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Jogging the Machine (Incremental Moves)

In Manual Mode, position the machine with jog increments. To make a jog
increment move:
1. Use AXIS SELECT to select an axis.
2. Use JOG to cycle through the move mode choices and choose a Jog
Mode.
3. Press JOG+ or JOG- to choose a direction. Do not hold down the key.
Each time the key is pressed, the machine jogs along the selected
axis by the selected increment.

Jogging the Machine (Continuous Moves)

From the Manual screen, move the machine at feedrate or at the Jog
Rapid Rate. The machine builder determines the effective jog and feed
rates at setup.
1. In Manual Mode with the Manual screen active, use the AXIS SELECT
to select an axis.
2. Use JOG to select a Continuous Jog Mode (Feed or Rapid).
3. Press and hold down + or - to jog the machine in the desired direction.
The machine jogs along the selected axis. To stop the machine,
release the key.

3-18 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Manual Data Input Mode

Manual Data Input (MDI) Mode allows you to command moves without
creating a part program. MDI also is a quick way to program one move,
or a series of moves that are used only one time. Refer to
Figure 3-10.

MDI

Figure 3-10, MDI Screen

To execute a command, type an instruction on the command line of the

Program Area, and press START. (In Manual Mode, the cursor rests on
the command line.)
More than one command can be programmed at a time. Use a semicolon
(;) to separate the commands.
Press HOLD to pause one-shot moves.

Press START to continue. Press Manual (F4) to cancel. MDI moves are
executed only once. To recall a previously commanded block, press UP
ARROW or DOWN ARROW to go to the line that you want. You can execute
from any line on the MDI history page. After you execute, the CNC takes
you to the top line of the history page. You can store up to 150 lines on
the MDI history page (two lines stores above). Use (SHIFT + F2) Clear
MDI to clear the history page.

CAUTION: You must know the location of the Absolute Zero

before making Absolute Mode moves.

The following topic is described:

‰ Using Manual Data Input Mode

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 3-19

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Using Manual Data Input Mode

To use Manual Data Input Mode:
1. In Manual Mode, type the command block(s) at the COMMAND: line.
2. Press START to execute the typed commands.
Most functions that can be commanded in a part program can also be
commanded in MDI Mode. These include:

• G00, G01, G02, G03 moves

• M-Codes, T-Codes (tool activation), S-Codes (spindle speed)
• Modal commands (G90, G91, G70, G71, etc.)
• G-Codes (G92, G28, G53, etc.)

The following example demonstrates how MDI Mode might be used to

activate the spindle.
COMMAND: M43; S600; M3
M43 Activates Gear Range defined by M43 in setup
S600 Activates Specified Spindle Speed
M3 Activates Spindle Forward

3-20 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup

Operating the Handwheel (Optional)

NOTE: The handwheel operation described here assumes that the
handwheel has been properly installed and configured in the
Setup Utility. The handwheel soft key does not display unless
the Setup Utility has been configured for handwheel use.
The CNC supports an option that allows you to move a selected axis via a
remote handwheel.
The resolution of the handwheel depends on the Jog Mode. Refer to
Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11, Handwheel Operation

To select a Jog Mode:
1. Turn the rotary switch to select an axis.
2. Select a conventional Jog Mode (100, 10, or 1).
3. Press - or + to move in a negative or positive direction, respectively.
To operate the handwheel:
1. From the Manual screen, press HandWheel (F10). The soft key
highlights and the other soft keys are blank.
2. On the Manual Panel, select the axis to move using the remote
handwheel. Press ENTER. The selected axis can now be moved
using the remote handwheel.
3. On the Manual Panel, select a Jog Mode (100, 10, 1) at a speed
proportional to the 100, 10, and 1 setting.
4. Move the handwheel clockwise to move the selected axis in a positive
direction or counterclockwise to move the axis in a negative direction.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 3-21

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Section 4 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

G-Codes initiate motion commands, canned cycles, and various machine
and CNC functions. More than one G-Code may be specified per block.
If a block contains conflicting G-Codes, an Error message is displayed.
Table 4-1 lists non-modal and modal G-Codes. Modal G-Codes remain
in effect until canceled by the appropriate code. Non-modal G-Codes
affect only the block in which they are programmed.
Edit Help provides graphic menus and labeled entry fields to aid those
unfamiliar with G-Code programming. Refer to “Section 7 - Edit Help” for
information.
Table 4-1, G-Codes
Modal Non-Modal
G-Code Function G-Code Function
G0 Rapid Move – End-Point G4 Dwell
G1 Feed Move – End-Point G9 Exact Stop
G2 Arc CW Radius and End-Point G28 Reference Point Return
G3 Arc CCW Radius and End-Point G29 Return from Reference Point
G17 XY plane G30 Move Reference from Machine Home
G18 XZ plane G31 Probe Move
G19 YZ plane G65 Macro Call, Single
G22 Stroke Limit G73 Draft Angle Pocket Cycle
G40 Compensation OFF G75 Frame Pocket Cycle
G41 Compensation LEFT G76 Hole Mill Cycle
G42 Compensation RIGHT G77 Circular Pocket Cycle
G53 Fixture Offset G78 Rectangular Pocket Cycle
G59 Modal Radius/Chamfer G79 Drill Bolt Hole Cycle
G60 Cancel Modal Radius or Chamfer G140 Spindle Probe Calibration Cycle
G61 Exact Stop Mode G141 Single Surface Measure/Edge Find
G64 Contouring Mode G142 Outside Part Corner Find
G66 Macro Call, Modal G143 Inside Part Corner Find
G67 Cancel Modal Macro G144 Inside or Outside Hole or Boss Center
Find
G68 Rotation (Axis) G145 Inside or Outside Web or Slot Center
Find
G70 Inch G146 Protected Positioning Move
G71 MM G147 Skew Error or Angle Find
G72 Scaling G150 Tool Probe Calibration Cycle
G80 Drilling Off G151 Tool Length and Diameter Offset
Preset
G81 Basic Drill Cycle G152 Manual Tool-Length Offset Preset
(Continued…)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Table 4-1, G-Codes (Continued)

Modal Non-Modal
G-Code Function G-Code Function
G82 CounterBore Drill Cycle G153 Manual Tool Diameter Preset
G83 Peck Drill Cycle G154 Tool Breakage, Length and Diameter
Wear Protection
G84 Tapping Cycle G162 Islands
G85 Boring Bidirectional Cycle G169 Irregular Pocket Cycle
G86 Boring Unidirectional Cycle G170 Face Mill Cycle
G87 Chip Break Cycle G171 Circular Profile Cycle
G89 Flat Bottom Boring Cycle G172 Rectangular Profile Cycle
G90 Absolute G175 Mill Cycle
G91 Incremental G176 EndMill Cycle
G92 Zero Set G177 Plunge Circ Pocket Cycle
G100 Mirroring G178 Plunge Rect Pocket Cycle
G120 BlockForm G179 Drill Pattern Cycle
FEED Feedrate G181 Thread Mill Cycle
G210 Slot Cycle
G211 Circular Slot Cycle
G1000 Programmable Temporary Path
Tolerance

For G-Codes not described in this Section, refer to “Section 5 – Canned

Cycles and Subprograms.”

4-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

The following topics are described in this section:

‰ Rapid Move – End-Point (G0)

‰ Feed Move – End-Point (F1)
‰ Angular Motion Programming Example
‰ Circular Interpolation (G2 or G3)
‰ Dwell (G4)
‰ Programming Non-modal Exact Stop (F9)
‰ Plane Selection (G17, G18, G19)
‰ Setting Stroke Limit (G22)
‰ Reference Point Return (G28)
‰ Return from Reference Point (G29)
‰ Move Reference from Machine Home (G30)
‰ Probe Move (G31)
‰ Fixture Offset (Work Coordinate System Select) (G53)
‰ Modal Corner Radius/Chamfering (G59, G60)
‰ In-Position Mode (Exact Stop Check) (G61)
‰ Contouring Mode (Cutting Mode) (G64)
‰ User Macros (G65, G66, G67)
‰ Axis Rotation (G68)
‰ Activating Inch (G70) or MM (G71) Mode
‰ Scaling (G72)
‰ Activating Absolute (G90) or Incremental (G91) Mode
‰ Absolute Zero Point Programming (G92)
‰ Mirroring (G100)
‰ BlockForm (G120)
‰ Programmable Temporary Path Tolerance (G1000)
‰ Feedrate (FEED)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Rapid Move – End-Point (G0)

Format: G0

G0 initiates rapid traverse. The machine builder sets the actual rapid rate
in the Setup Utility. Use rapid to position the tool prior to or after a cut.
Do not use rapid to cut a part. Refer to Figure 4-1.
One to four axes can be included on a block with G0. X, Y, and Z reach
the target simultaneously.
G0 is modal and remains in effect until canceled or changed.

Figure 4-1, Rapid Traverse

Table 4-2 lists the program blocks required to complete the moves
illustrated in Figure 4-1.

Table 4-2, Rapid Traverse

N1 G90 G0 X3 Y-1 Rapid move to X3, Y-1 (P1) in
Absolute Mode.
N2 G1 X5.0 X-axis feeds to X5 (P2).
N3 G0 X6 Y-2 XY rapid to X6, Y-2 (P3).

NOTE: To override rapid, use the FEEDRATE OVERRIDE. For more

information on using FEEDRATE OVERRIDE, refer to “Section 3 -
Manual Operation and Machine Setup.”

4-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Feed Move – End-Point (G1)

Format: G1

Feed move (G1) initiates straight-line feed motion and is used to cut a
part. Straight-line motion occurs in one or more axes. The block may
contain any combination of available axes. G1 moves can be straight-line
or angular moves.

G1 is modal and remains in effect until changed. Specify the feedrate on

or prior to the G1 block.
In Figure 4-2 and Table 4-3, MM equivalents are in parentheses
following the Inch measurements.

Figure 4-2, Feed Move

Table 4-3, Straight-Line Programming Example

N1 G90 G70 (G71) G1 X0 Y0 Z0 Feed to starting position.
N2 G1 F10 (254) X3.5 (88.9) Feed to P2.
N3 Y-1.5 (-38.1) Feed to P3.
N4 Z-1.5 (-38.1) Move Z down.
N5 X0 (X0) Feed to P4.
N6 Y0 (Y0) Feed to P1.
N7 M2 End program, return to N1.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-5

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Angular Motion Programming Example

Angular moves involve motion in two or more axes. In Absolute Mode, all
dimensions are referenced to Part Zero (X0, Y0). In Incremental Mode,
all dimensions are referenced to the current tool position. Refer to
Table 4-4.

Table 4-4, Angular Programming Example, Absolute/Inch Mode

N1 G70 G90 G0 X0 Y0 Feed to starting position (X0, Y0).
N2 G1 F10 X3 Absolute, Inch Mode feed to P2.
N3 Y-2 Feed to P3.
N4 X0 Y-3 Feed to P4 (angular move).
N5 Y0 Feed to P1.
N6 M2 End program, return to N1.

In Figure 4-3, MM equivalents are in parentheses following the Inch

measurements.

Figure 4-3, Angular Motion

4-6 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Circular Interpolation (G2 and G3)

Circular interpolation initiates circular moves, including arcs. G2
commands a clockwise motion. G3 commands a counterclockwise
motion.
Arc input Format: G2 Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk

Arc input Format: G3 Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk

Radius Format: G02 Xx Yy Rr

Radius Format: G03 Xx Yy Rr

Refer to Table 4-5 for parameter descriptions.

NOTE: For circular interpolation in another plane, make the plane

changes prior to the G2 or G3 block. Refer to “Plane Selection
(G17, G18, G19)” for information on planes. Arc examples use
the most common plane, G17 (XY).

NOTE: If the value of X, Y, Z, I, J, or K is zero, omit it.

Table 4-5, Parameters for Circular Interpolation

Parameter Description
G2 Arc CW Radius and End-Point (clockwise) motion.
G3 Arc CCW Radius and End-Point (counterclockwise)
motion.
XYZ Endpoint of arc motion in Absolute or Incremental Mode.
I (X) Distance from the tool location to the arc center. I = X
J (Y) center, J = Y center, and K = Z center.
K (Z) NOTE: Arc centers are incremental by default. This is set
up in the Setup Utility.
R Arc Radius.
NOTE: If Arc is greater than 180°, enter the R-value as a
negative value (For example, R-.5).

The following topic is described:

‰ Examples of Circular Interpolation

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-7

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Examples of Circular Interpolation

Partial Arcs (XYIJ)

Figure 4-4 illustrates an arc move between P2 and P3.
4.5” (114.3 mm)

.5”
(12.7 mm)
2.5”
(63.5 mm)

Figure 4-4, Circular Interpolation

Absolute Mode: Refer to Table 4-6.

Table 4-6, Circular Interpolation in Absolute Mode, Inches

Address Word Format Description
N1 G70 G90 G17 G1 Y2.5 F3 Activate Inch and Absolute
Mode and set feedrate to IPR.
Activate plane. Feed to P2.
N2 G2 X.5 Y3.0 I.5 J0 Arc move to P3.
N3 G1 X5 Feed to P4.
N4 Y0 Feed to P5.
N5 X0 Feed to P1.
N6 M2 End Program.

Incremental Mode: Refer to Table 4-7.

Table 4-7, Circular Interpolation in Incremental Mode, Inches

Address Word Format Description
N1 G70 G91 G17 G1 Y2.5 F3 Activate Inch and Absolute
Mode and set feedrate to IPR.
Activate plane. Feed to P2.
N2 G2 X.5 Y.5 I.5 J0 Arc move to P3.
N3 G1 X4.5 Feed to P4.
N4 Y-3 Feed to P5.
N5 X-5 Feed to P1.
N6 M2 End Program.

4-8 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Any arc of less than 360 degrees is a partial arc. Use Address Words X,
Y, I, J together.
To program a move from P1 to P2, calculate arc centers (I and J) and
endpoints (X and Y). Refer to Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5, Partial Arc Sample

From P1 to P2, the block format is: G91 G3 X.5559 Y.7244 I-.1941
J.7244
Construct a triangle at a right angle to the given angle (15 deg.). Using
the given angle (15) and the hypotenuse (.75, radius), calculate the
lengths of the unknown sides I (opposite side) and J (adjacent side).
A. Sine (15 deg.) times hypotenuse = I
.2588 x .75 = .1941

Since I is in an X minus direction, I (X arc center) = -.1941

B. Cosine (15 deg.) times hypotenuse = J
.9659 x .75 = .7244

Since J is in a Y positive direction, J (Y arc center) = .7244

C. Radius - I = X
.750 - .1941 = .5559

X moves in a positive direction. X (endpoint) = .5559

D. Y (endpoint) = J (Y arc center)

Y = J = .7244

NOTE: If the endpoint (P2) does not lie along the arc path, the CNC
displays an error message.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-9

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Circles
Since the endpoint and starting point of a circle are the same, you do not
need to program an endpoint for a circle. Position the tool at the required
starting point before you execute the arc move. Refer to
Figure 4-6.
Format: G91 G3 J.5
Since X, Y, and I equal 0, omit these parameters.

Figure 4-6, Circle Sample

Helical Interpolation (XYZIJK)

Format: G17 G2 Xn Yn Zn In Jn Ln
Helical interpolation adds a third dimension to G2 or G3 moves.
For the XY plane (G17), the tool moves in a circular motion in the XY
axes and linearly in Z, simultaneously.

The added Z parameter provides the Z endpoint. L is the number of

complete plus partial revolutions, referenced from the start point.
You can use helical interpolation for threading and rough boring
applications. Additional linear or rotary axes (U, W) can also be specified.
Refer to Table 4-8.

Table 4-8, Helical Interpolation Program

Block Description
N5 G17 G90 G70 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 Sets XY plane, Absolute, Inch, Rapid
Modes. Moves axes to zero.
N6 G02 X2.0 Y0 Z-.5 I1.0 J0 L1 F20 Programs CW helical move to X2 Y0 Z-.5,
with center point at I1J0 and 0 complete
turns. The tool executes a half turn at
feedrate F20. If L2 were programmed, the
tool would make 1-1/2 turns.
N7 G01 Next block.

4-10 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Dwell (G4)
Dwell (G4) can be used to program a delay between blocks. A Timed
Dwell is a timed stop. An Infinite Dwell is a stop that can be canceled
only by pressing START. With a dwell activated, the CNC halts motions on
all axes, but other functions (coolant on/off, spindle control) remain active.
Do not program any other commands on a G4 block. T is the time in
seconds that the machine remains at the current location. The range of T
is .1 to 9999.9 seconds.

Timed Dwell Format: G4 Tx.x (timed)

Infinite Dwell Format: G4 T0 (infinite)

Example: N20 G4 T2.1

Block 20 commands a timed dwell with duration of 2.1 seconds.

Example: N21 G4 T0
Block 21 commands an infinite dwell.
The time countdown is displayed in the Machine Status Area of the
Manual screen.

NOTE: ANILAM recommends that you use the Programmed Stop

M-function (M00) instead of an infinite dwell.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-11

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Programming Non-modal Exact Stop (G9)

With the In-Position Mode activated, the CNC approaches target and
performs an in-position check before it executes the next move. The
CNC comes to a complete stop at the end of every block. This could
cause witness marks to display on the work, but prevents the CNC from
rounding off sharp corners. Refer to Table 4-9.

Format: G9

NOTE: Rapid moves are always performed in In-Position Mode.

Table 4-9, Exact Stop G-Codes

Code Format Action
G9 G9 Xx.x Yx.x Activates non-modal In-Position Mode.
Complete stop only in this block.
G61 G61 Xx.x Yx.x Activates Modal In-Position Mode. The
CNC stops to verify location for each
targeted position. In-Position Mode
remains active until changed.
G64 G64 Cancels G61 and activates the Contouring
Mode (also called Continuous Path Mode).

NOTE: In-Position and Continuous Path Tolerances are defined in the

Setup Utility. The In-Position Tolerance should be closer to
target than the Continuous Path Tolerance.

The In-Position Mode is active only for the block containing the G9
command. Use G61 to initiate modal Exact Stop (In-Position Mode).

Plane Selection (G17, G18, G19)

Make plane changes prior to circular interpolation (G2, G3) blocks. Refer
to Table 4-10 for the G-Codes that activate different planes. XY (G17) is
the default plane at power-on. Refer to Figure 4-7, Plane Selection.

Table 4-10, Plane Selection G-Codes

G-Code Cutting Plane

G17 XY plane
G18 XZ plane
G19 YZ plane

4-12 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Figure 4-7, Plane Selection

To determine arc direction, look toward the negative direction of the non-
used axis. Refer to Figure 4-8. (Example: for XY plane, look along Z-.)

Figure 4-8, Arc Direction

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-13

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Setting Stroke Limit (G22)

The G22 Xn Yn Zn In Jn Kn format (activate software limits) is modal.
Use G22 (alone) to cancel software limits. Refer to Table 4-11.
Format: G22 Xn Yn Zn In Jn Kn
Activates software limits.
Format: G22
Cancels software limits and enables free movement within
the machine limits.
Table 4-11, G22 Address Words

Address Word Format Description

G22 See above Stored Stroke Limit
(Programmable Travel Limits)
X xxx.xxxx X positive software limit.
Y xxx.xxxx Y positive software limit.
Z xxx.xxxx Z positive software limit.
I xxx.xxxx X negative software limit.
J xxx.xxxx Y negative software limit.
K xxx.xxxx Z negative software limit.

The software limits feature creates an envelope that limits the tool’s range
of travel. It is also called the Stored Stroke Limit feature. The X, Y, and Z
limits represent the extreme distance the tool can travel in the positive X,
Y, and Z directions. The I, J, and K limits represent the extreme distance
the tool can travel in the negative X, Y, and Z directions. Refer to Figure
4-9.
Software limits are referenced to Absolute Zero (Machine Home). The
values of the positive and negative limits depend on where you locate
Machine Home.

Figure 4-9, Software Limits Envelope Parameters

4-14 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

To set software limits:

1. Make sure the tool is within the envelope defined by the software
limits (XYZIJK).
2. In Edit Mode or Manual Mode, type the G22 command in the proper
format (G22 Xn Yn Zn In Jn Kn). All the Address Words must be
accompanied by the appropriate values or the CNC does not activate
software limits.
In Edit Mode, make sure the appropriate Program Listing is displayed.
Type the G22 command into any program block.
In the Manual Mode, type the G22 command next to the command
line. Press START.

Reference Point Return (G28)

With the G28 XYZ format, the Reference Point Return command (G28)
returns the CNC to a permanent reference position. Refer to Table 4-12.

Format: G28 XYZU

Returns the machine directly to its X, Y, Z, and U reference
point (Machine Home). Axes return at the current feedrate
if in G1 mode or rapid if in G0 mode.
Format: G28 Xn Yn Zn Un
n = coordinates X, Y, Z, and U of intermediate point.
Return to reference point (Machine Home) through an
intermediate point.

Table 4-12, Return to Reference Point, Address Words

Label Address Format Description

Word
Mid Point X Xn xxx.xxxx Intermediate point in X, if used
Mid Point Y Yn xxx.xxxx Intermediate point in Y, if used
Mid Point Z Zn xxx.xxxx Intermediate point in Z, if used
Mid Point U Un xxx.xxxx Intermediate point in U, if used

NOTE: At least one axis must be specified, or no motion occurs.

With the G28 Xx Yy Zz Uu format, the machine rapids or feeds

(depending on if G0 or G1 is active) to the intermediate point and then
rapids or feeds to Machine Home. The intermediate point is always in
reference to Machine Home.
All offsets and transformations (rotation, mirror, and scaling) are
automatically canceled by G28 before traversing to Machine Home.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-15

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Return from Reference Point (G29)

Return from Reference Point (Machine Home) (G29) is used in
conjunction with Reference Point Return (G28). G29 returns the CNC to
the intermediary point programmed in G28, then to the coordinates
programmed in the G29 block. Return move is rapid or feed depending
on active G0 or G1 to a program start position. Refer to
Table 4-13.
Format: G29 Xx Yy Zz Uu
xyzu = coordinates X, Y, Z, and U of G29 move. The CNC
commands a move from Machine Home to an intermediate
point (specified in G28 command), then to the G29
coordinates.
Table 4-13, G29 Address Words
Label Address Description
Word
Mid Point X X G29 move in X
Mid Point Y Y G29 move in Y
Mid Point Z Z G29 move in Z
Mid Point U U G29 move in U

Table 4-14, G29 Program List

Block Format Description of Variables
N1 G28 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 N1 = coordinates of intermediary point.
The CNC traverses to the programmed
coordinate (N1), then traverses to
Machine Home.
N2 G29 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 N2 = coordinates of point to which CNC
returns after reaching the intermediary
point. The machine traverses to the G28
intermediate point (N1), then to the
programmed coordinate (N2).

4-16 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Move Reference from Machine Home (G30)

Move Reference from Machine Home (G30) is used to move an axis in
relation to machine home without being influenced by tool or fixture
offsets. Move is rapid or feed depending on active G0 (Rapid Move) or
G1 (Feed Move) to a program start position. Refer to Table 4-15.

Format: G30 Xx Yy Zz Uu
xyzu = coordinates X, Y, Z, and U of G29 move. The CNC
commands a move from Machine Home to the G30
coordinates.
Table 4-15, G30 Address Words
Label Address Description
Word
X X G30 move in X
Y Y G30 move in Y
Z Z G30 move in Z
U U G30 move in U

Probe Move (G31)

Refer to “Section 17 - Advanced Programming Features,” “Probe Move
(G31).”

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-17

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Fixture Offset (Work Coordinate System Select) (G53)

Format: G53 Oxx Xn Yn Zn Un Wn C

Use the work coordinate system (G53), commonly known as fixture

offsets, to shift Absolute Zero to a preset dimension. G53 dimensions are
referenced to Machine Zero.

G53 cancels Mirroring (G100), Axis Rotation (G68), and Scaling (G72).
99 offsets (zero shifts) are available. Offsets are stored in a table. To
activate the Fixture Offset Table in Manual Mode, press F9 (Tool) + F1
(Offsets). You can update this table through the program. If you use a
G53 command to change the offsets in the table, the CNC overwrites the
values in the Fixture Offset Table.
The letter O followed by the Fixture Offset Table number (1 to 99) defines
an offset.
The following topics are described:

‰ Fixture Offset Table

‰ Activating the Fixture Offset Table
‰ Changing Fixture Offsets in the Table
‰ Adjusting Fixture Offsets in the Table
‰ G53 Programming Examples

Fixture Offset Table

The Fixture Offset Table, accessed via the Manual screen, contains the
entered values for Fixture Offsets 1 to 99.

4-18 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Activating the Fixture Offset Table

To activate the Fixture Offset Table:
1. In Manual Mode, press F9 (Tool) + F3 (Offset). The Fixture Offset
Table activates. Refer to Figure 4-10.

OFFSET

Figure 4-10, Fixture Offset Table

Changing Fixture Offsets in the Table

To change a fixture offset to a manually entered coordinate:
1. Highlight a Fixture Offset (row 1 to 99) in the Fixture Offset Table.
2. Press an axis key (X, Y, or Z).
3. Type a value. Press ENTER. The CNC stores the value in the table.
Adjusting Fixture Offsets in the Table
To adjust an existing fixture offset:
1. Highlight a Fixture Offset (row 1 to 99) in the Fixture Offset Table.
2. Press the letter A key to display the message, “Enter axis and
adjustment value.”
3. Type the axis to adjust (X, Y, or Z) and the amount of the adjustment.
The adjustment value may be positive or negative.
4. Press ENTER to adjust the value, and display the adjusted value in the
table.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-19

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

G53 Programming Examples

G53 examples #1 to #3 below clears any active G92.
1. Use offset number three from preset table: G53 O3
Activates a zero point previously entered in the table.
2. Clear any active offset: G53 O0
Use to clear any offset of G53 or G92. It resets the current zero to
Machine Home.
3. Update offset table, shift coordinates: G53 On Xn Yn Zn Un C
The C word tells the CNC to update the table. Use as an immediate
command to shift Absolute Zero and save values in the offset table.
4. Update offset table, but do not activate the shift:
G53 On Xn Yn Zn Un
is used when offsets are defined at the beginning of a program. It is
strictly to set up the offset table.
G92 can be used in reference to (after) any G53 active, or without any
G53 active (G53 O0). G53 is modal, and G53 O0 (use none) is active at
power-up.

NOTE: Use G40 to cancel G41/G42 before programming G53.

4-20 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Modal Corner Radius/Chamfering (G59, G60)

Use G59 to program modal corner rounding or chamfering. The corner-
rounding format blends the intersection of two moves. The chamfer
format chamfers the intersection of two moves. You can use G59 at the
intersection of non-tangent line-line, line-arc, arc-line, and arc-arc moves
(provided a blend radius or chamfer is possible). You cannot blend radii
at the intersection of a line tangent to an arc.

G59 can be used to blend inside or outside radii. Tool diameter

compensation can be active during modal corner rounding. When you
blend inside radii with diameter compensation active, the blend radius
must be greater than the tool radius.

R defines the radius value for corner rounding. E defines a chamfer size.
Refer to Table 4-16. G59 is modal. It stays active until canceled with a
G60 code. The CNC activates linear interpolation (G1) with G59. You do
not have to program G1 prior to the G59 block.
Corner Rounding Format: G59 Rn
Chamfer Format: G59 En

Cancel G59: G60 (Cancels G59 immediately.)

Cancel G59: G60 Xn Yn Zn (Cancels G59 after move.)

Table 4-16, G59 Address Words

Address Word Description
R Corner radius
E Chamfer distance

G60 cancels G59 immediately. G60 Xn Yn Zn cancels G59 at the end of

the move it contains (as in N13). For example, if G60 were programmed
on a block prior to the X0 move, the lower-left corner would not be
rounded.
You can change the blend radii or chamfer value between moves. To
change the radius to .25 for the bottom two corners, insert G59 R.25
between Blocks N10 and N11. The new radius would apply on the next
move (after Block N10).

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-21

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

In the example in Figure 4-11, G59 is used to command modal corner

rounding. Whenever the CNC encounters an intersection between
line-line, arc-arc, or line-arc moves, it rounds off the intersection to the
specified radius.
X0Y0

Dimensions:
3 x 2 IN.
(76.2 X 50.8MM)

R = .375 IN.
(9.53 MM)

G59PROG

Figure 4-11, G59 Programming Example

Table 4-17 describes the required program blocks.

Table 4-17, G59 Programming Example, Inch
Blk. # Block Description
N4 G17 G90 * Set plane and absolute
N5 G0 X-.5 Y-.5 * Move to point
N6 Z-.25 * Lower Z-axis
N7 G1 X0 F20 * Move to X0 and set feedrate
N8 G59 R.375 * Set G59 and radius value
N9 Y0 * Move to Y0
N10 X3 * Move to X3
N11 Y-2 * Move
N12 X0 * Move
N13 G60 Y.5 * Move to Y.5, then deactivate modal corner
rounding
N14 G0 Z.1 * Raise Z-axis

4-22 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

In-Position Mode (Exact Stop Check) (G61)

While the In-Position Mode (G61) is active, the CNC approaches target
and performs an in-position check before the next move is executed.
Refer to Table 4-18. The CNC comes to a complete stop at the
completion of each command. This could cause tool dwell marks to
display on the work, but prevents the CNC from rounding off sharp
corners.

Table 4-18, G61 and Associated G-Code Formats

Code Format Action
G9 G9 Xx.x Yx.x Activates Non-modal In-Position Mode.
Complete stop only in this block.
G61 G61 Xx.x Yx.x Activates Modal In-Position Mode. CNC
stops to verify location of each endpoint.
G64 G64 Cancels G61 and activates the Contouring
Mode (Continuous Path Mode).

NOTE: Rapid moves are always performed in In-Position Mode.

G61 is modal and remains in effect until canceled. Use Contouring Mode
(G64) to cancel the G61. Non-modal In-Position Mode (G9) remains
active only for a single block.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-23

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Contouring Mode (Cutting Mode) (G64)

The Contouring Mode (G64), also known as Continuous Path Mode or
Cutting Mode, is active at power on. Refer to Table 4-19. It is used for
feed moves. With the Contouring Mode activated, the CNC approaches
target and comes within the Continuous Path Tolerance of the target
position. No in-position check is made before the next move is executed.
This enables the smooth contouring of a profile or surface.

Format: G64

Table 4-19, G64 and Associated G-Code Formats

Code Format Action
G9 G9 Xx.x Yx.x Activates Non-modal In-Position Mode.
Complete stop only in this block.
G61 G61 Xx.x Yx.x Activates Modal In-Position Mode. CNC
stops to verify location of each endpoint.
G64 G64 Cancels G61 and activates the Contouring
Mode (Continuous Path Mode).

NOTE: Rapid moves are always performed in In-Position Mode.

NOTE: the machine builder defines the In-Position and Continuous Path
Tolerances in the Setup Utility.

G64 is modal and remains in effect until canceled. Use Exact Stop Check
(G61) to cancel the Contouring Mode. G64 initiates linear interpolation
(G1).

4-24 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

User Macros (G65, G66, G67)

NOTE: Before using macros, you must understand how variables and
parameters are used in a program or subprogram. Refer to
“Section 17 - Advanced Programming Features” for an
explanation of these features.

NOTE: G65 or G66 codes always contain some letter variable(s) (Pn,
An, Bn, etc.) to be passed to the macro (subprogram).
A macro is a group of instructions stored in memory and called by the
main program when needed. Think of macros as sophisticated, flexible
subprograms, which can be modal (G66) or Non-modal (G65). Refer to
Table 4-20.
Macros might consist of:
• Customized canned cycles to simplify the programming of a particular
part or entire programs for similar part production.
• Parameters (Pn, An, Bn, etc.) passed to the subprogram by letter
address, similar to canned cycles.
• Automatic measuring sequences using sensors, such as probes, for
feedback to the CNC.

Table 4-20, Macro G-Codes

Format M/NM Action
G65 Pn Ln Non- Executes Non-modal Macro (Pn), with
G65 Pn modal optional repeat loop, at current location.
Macro is repeated number of times
G65 Pn, An,
specified in command (Ln). If the L
Bn, etc. address word is omitted, the macro is
executed only once.
Pn = macro number (O).
Ln = optional loop. Specify number of
times the macro should repeat (n).
G66 Pn Modal Executes called macro (Pn) after each
G66 Pn, An, programmed move until canceled with a
G67 command.
Bn, etc
Pn = called macro.
G67 Cancel Cancels Modal Macro (G66).

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-25

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Table 4-21 lists and describes the Address Words and M-Codes used
with macros.
Table 4-21, Macro Address Words
Address Word Format Description
Pn Pxxxx Used in G65 and G66
commands. Lists macro number
(O) to be called.
Ln Lxxxx Used only in G66. Optional
repeat command. Specify
number of times macro should
repeat (1 to 9999).
On N(block Number) Macro number that occurs in the
Oxxxx first line of the macro; for
identification.
M99 M99 End macro (subprogram) and
return to line following G65 or
G66 in main program.
A subprogram consists of fixed dimensions, but a macro contains
variables and parameters that can change every time the macro is used.
The CNC can pass values to variables in the G65 or G66 command. to
variables
Macros can be stored in the same file as the main program or in a
separate file. Use the File Inclusion feature to call Macros stored in a
separate file.
Refer to “Section 17 - Advanced Programming Features” for a more
detailed explanation of Parameter Passing, Parameter Variables, and File
Inclusion.
Macros stored in the same file as the main program are defined in the
same way as a subprogram; with the O address word followed by a label
number. The macro is terminated with the M99 code and entered into
the Program Listing after the main program. Refer to Table 4-22, Macro
Program List.
If the command contains an L address word, the macro is repeated the
specified number of times before the CNC returns to the main program.

4-26 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Table 4-22, Macro Program List

Program Block Description
N200 M2 End main program
N210 O201 Macro number assigned
N220 [Enter macro here] Macro program
N230
N240
N250
N260 M99 End macro, return to next line of main
program. The CNC returns to the line
following the Macro call (G65 or G66) in
the main program.

Use the G65 Macro call to call a macro into the main body of the
program. Refer to Table 4-23.

Table 4-23, Macro Call in Main Program

Program Block Description
N40
N50 G65 P201 CNC executes Macro O201 once, at
present location.
N60 After executing the macro (M99
encountered), the CNC returns to the
main program and performs the next
programmed command.

The CNC executes the macro (201) at block 50, with or without repeated
loops, as programmed. When the CNC detects the M99 (End Macro)
Code, it returns to the next line of the main program (N60).

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-27

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Axis Rotation (G68)

G68 is modal and remains active until canceled. Refer to Table 4-24.
The CNC automatically cancels rotation if you program S and L. Use
only the listed codes.
Activate Format: G68 In Jn Sn Cn Pn Ln

Cancel Format: G68

Table 4-24, G68 Address Words

Label Address Word Description
Angle C Angle of Rotation. (Required)
Rotation Ctr. I Center of rotation (polar origin) in X-axis.
Rotation Ctr. J Center of rotation (polar origin) in Y-axis.
First Angle S Start angle (referenced original programmed
angular position). This variable is used only if L and
P are programmed.
SubProgram P Subprogram number to call.
# of Times L Number of loops. Number of times C is
incremented, and subprogram P is called.

Patterns commanded by the program can be rotated using polar

coordinates. Any angle can be described as positive or negative,
depending on how it is referenced. CCW from 0 degrees is positive. CW
from 0 degrees is negative. Refer to Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12, G68 Angle Rotation Guide

4-28 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Minimum data entry for G68 rotation is: G68 Cn. If I and J are not given,
the current position is used. S angle is referenced to the original
programmed position. For example: If a slot is programmed at the 90-
degree position, S is referenced from 90 degrees. S should be used only
if L and P are programmed. C must be programmed. P and L are
optional. They enable a loop to be executed, so the subprogram is called
at each angle increment. G17, G18, or G19 must be commanded prior to
programming G68.
The following topics are described:

‰ G68 Programming Examples

G68 Programming Examples

Example 1: Refer to Figure 4-13 and Table 4-25.

X38.1, Y.5 30 deg.

(X1.5, Y12.7mm)
0

X0Y0 Polar Origin

Figure 4-13, G68 Programming Example 1

Table 4-25, G68 Programming Example 1

Blk. # Block Description
N21 G17 G90 * Set plane and absolute
N22 G68 I1.5 J.5 C30 * Activate rotation to values
N23 M98 P1001 * Execute subprogram
N24 G68 * Cancel rotation
Required Subprogram:
O1001
G90 G0 X2.5 Y.375
G1 Z-.125 F5
X3.5
G3 Y.625 J.125
G1 X2.5
G3 Y.375 J-.125
G0 Z.1
M99

Example 1 does not use S, C, P, or L. (No loop is required.)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-29

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

N21 sets the XY plane and Absolute Mode. N22 enables rotation angle
of 30 degrees, the origin is X1.5 Y.5. N23 executes sub 1001 at the
rotated position. The sub is programmed at the 3 o'clock position. N24
cancels polar rotation.
Example 2: Refer to Figure 4-14 and Table 4-26.

Figure 4-14, G68 Programming Example 2

Table 4-26, G68 Programming Example 2

Blk. # Block
N1 O688 * G68-2
N2 G90 G70 G17 G0 T0 Z0
N3 X0 Y0
N4 T1 * .25 MILL
N5 Y2.5 Z.1
N6 G1 Z-.125 F5
N7 Y2.0 F14
N8 G68 I0 J0 S0 C-45 P1 L8
N9 G90 G1 Y2.5
N10 G0 G28 Z0
N11 X0 Y0
N12 M2
N13
N14
N15
N16 O1 * 45 DEG. SECTION
N17 G91 G1 G41 Y-.125
N18 G2 X.3542 Y-.4981 I0 J-.375
N19 G3 X.3689 Y-.1528 I.1889 J-.0657
N20 G2 X.6027 Y.1017 I.3375 J-.1634
N21 G1 G40 X.0884 Y.0884
N22 M99

4-30 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Example 2 uses all variable words of the G68 function. Only the path
from the 12 o'clock position (90 deg.) to the 1:30 position (45 deg.) is
programmed in the subprogram. The G68 loop increments the angle and
recalls the subprogram to complete the shape.
N1 through N4 set program number, modals, position, and tool activation.
N5 and N6 move the tool to the starting position.
N7 moves to the 12 o'clock position one-half of the cutter away from the
part.
Note that cutter compensation cannot be active prior to calling G68. G41
or G42 cutter radius compensation must be activated at the beginning of
the subprogram, and then canceled with a G40 prior to the end of the
subprogram.
N8 calls the G68 rotation function: origin (I,J) at X0 Y0, starting angle (S)
of zero degrees (First call of subprogram will not be rotated), angle
increment (C) of -45 deg. (CW is negative), call subprogram (P) 1, and
loop count (L) equals eight.
N9 returns back to the starting position in the Y axis.
N10 to N12 brings the Z axis to machine home, then move the X and Y
axes to position and ends the program.
N16 to N22 define the 45-degree section for the shape, from 12 o'clock
position to 1:30 position, turning on and off cutter radius compensation for
each iteration of the rotation loop.

NOTE: If you are using S and L format, you do not need to cancel G68.

NOTE: Select the plane prior to G68 (default is G17). Program

dimensions for both axes of the active plane.

The CNC interprets IJKABC values in the current Absolute/Incremental

Mode. If C is absolute, the 3 o'clock position is 0 degrees. If C is
incremental (G91), the current angle is 0 degrees. It is better to use
incremental (G91) dimensions.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-31

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Activating Inch (G70) or MM (G71) Mode

Inch Mode Format: G70
MM Mode Format: G71
Change the unit of measurement displayed by the CNC by using Inch
Mode (G70) or MM Mode (G71). Refer to Table 4-27. The Inch/MM
Mode is usually specified at the start of a program.

Table 4-27, Activating the Inch/MM Mode

Block Format Description
N2 G70 G90 G0 Activates Inch Mode.
N2 G71 G90 G0 Activates MM Mode.

NOTE: The display resolution (number of decimal places shown) is set

up in the Setup Utility. The default resolution is four decimal
places for Inch Mode and also four decimal places for MM
Mode.

Scaling (G72)
Use Scaling (G72) to enlarge or reduce patterns commanded by the
program. Refer to Table 4-28. G72 is modal. If a variable word is not
given, it is assumed to be x1 factor. Axes for circular motion must have
the same factor.
Activating Format: G72 Xn Yn Zn

Table 4-28, Cancel Format: G72

Label Address Word Description
Scale Factor X X Scaling factor for X-axis
Scale Factor Y Y Scaling factor for Y-axis
Scale Factor Z Z Scaling factor for Z-axis

Tool length offsets, diameter offsets, tool wear factors, and cutter
compensation are not affected by G72. No other codes are allowed on a
G72 block.

WARNING: Never program a T-Code (T0, T1) while in G72.

Activate the Tn command before G72, and then deactivate G72 before
deactivating the Tn command. This applies to all tools (T0 to T99).
Example: G72 X2 Y2 Z1

The CNC scales all X and Y moves to twice their programmed size. Z
moves will not be scaled (times 1). Z could have been omitted.

4-32 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Activating Absolute (G90) or Incremental (G91) Mode

You can change the program mode to G90 or G91. Specify Absolute or
Incremental Mode at the start of a program. Refer to Table 4-29.
Absolute Mode Format: G90

Incremental Mode Format: G91

Table 4-29, Activating the Absolute/Incremental Mode

Block Format Description
N2 G70 G90 G0 Activates the Absolute Mode
N2 G70 G91 G0 Activates the Incremental Mode

Absolute Zero Point Programming (G92)

The G92 code is used to set axes to zero (reset) or to new coordinates
(preset). It is sometimes used to set Part Zero. You can use G92 to set
Part Zero on a vise or a fixture. Anilam recommends using G53 (Fixture
Offset) instead of G92.

G92 cancels Mirroring (G100), Axis Rotation (G68), and Axis Scaling
(G72).

NOTE: G92 should only be used in Auto or Single Step mode. If

programmed in MDI, the G92 cancelled when the CNC switches
to Auto.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-33

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Mirroring (G100)
Format:
G100 XYZUVW
G100 programmed with axis (G100 X) activates “mirroring” (ON) for that
axis. Mirroring reverses the sign (+/-) of subsequent numbers. More than
one axis can be mirrored at once (G100 XY). To cancel mirroring,
program G100 on a block by itself. Refer to Table 4-30.

Table 4-30, G100 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
X Axis X Activates “mirroring” (ON) for the X-axis.
Y Axis Y Activates “mirroring” (ON) for the Y-axis.
Z Axis Z Activates “mirroring” (ON) for the Z-axis.
U Axis U Activates “mirroring” (ON) for the U-axis.
V Axis V Activates “mirroring” (ON) for the V-axis.
W Axis W Activates “mirroring” (ON) for the W-axis.

4-34 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

BlockForm (G120)
Format:
G120 Xnn.nnnn Ynn.nnnn Znn.nnnn Inn.nnnn Jnn.nnnn Knn.nnnn
G120 is used to define a window in relation to the part zero. This is used
by the Draw function to present a solid model on the raw stock. Refer to
Table 4-31.

Note: Even if there is no cutter compensation being used, you must

have an active tool with a diameter before draw will graphically
show material being machine from the above stock definition.
G120 can be placed only once any where within the program and must be
accompanied by all of the following parameters:

Table 4-31, G120 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
XMax X The positive most edge in the X-axis of the stock
from part zero. (Required)
YMax Y The positive most edge in the Y-axis of the
stock from part zero. (Required)
ZMax Z The top of the stock in relation to part zero.
(Required)
XMin I The negative most edge in the X-axis of the
stock from part zero. (Required)
YMin J The negative most edge in the Y-axis of the
stock from part zero. (Required)
KMin K The depth of the part from top to bottom in
relation to part zero. (Required)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-35

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Programmable Temporary Path Tolerance (G1000)

Format:
G1000 Xx
G1000 is used to temporarily override the parameter for path tolerance.
G1000 should only be used in program and should be programmed by
itself. The value in configuration is restored at the end of the program.
The typical default is 0.010 mm (0.0004"). This can be useful if the CNC
hesitates between small moves, such as a 3-D surface output from CAD-
CAM.

4-36 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Preparatory Functions: G-Codes

Feedrate (FEED)
Format:
Fn.n
A Feed block sets the feedrate for Line moves, arcs, and cycles that do
not contain specifically programmed feedrates. Feed blocks also set the
feedrate for modal moves. Add Feed blocks whenever necessary. Refer
to Table 4-32.

NOTE: A Feed block does not activate the Feed Mode.

Table 4-32, FEED Address Word

Address
Label Word Description
FEED F Feedrates for Inch mode (G70) are programmed
as inch/minute (IPM). F1 = 1.0 IPM
Feedrates for MM (metric mode) (G71) in
mm/min: F1 = 1 mm/min
(Required)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 4-37

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Section 5 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

The following topics are described in this section:
‰ Canned Cycles
‰ Drilling, Tapping, and Boring Canned Cycles (G81 to G89)
‰ Pocket Cycles
‰ Engrave Cycle (G190)
‰ Subprograms
‰ Probing Cycles

Canned Cycles
A canned cycle is a preset sequence of events initiated by a single block
of data. Canned cycles are part of the CNC software and cannot be
altered. They simplify the programming of complicated cycles. One block
of data can instruct the CNC to perform the necessary moves to drill a
hole, or mill a pocket.

A canned cycle consists of a G-Code and variable words. The variable

words describe parameters, such as peck distance, retract height, pocket
depth, and tool stepover. Each canned cycle has its own set of variable
words.
The variable words in a canned cycle allow you to customize the cycle to
include the necessary dimensions, feedrates, etc.
Canned cycles greatly reduce program blocks. Use them whenever
applicable.
Canned cycles are usually entered into the part program from the Main
Edit Help Menu. Edit Help contains graphics and labeled entry fields to
make programming canned cycles quick and easy. Refer to
“Section 7 - Edit Help” for details.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Drilling, Tapping, and Boring Canned Cycles (G81 to G89)

When you activate a drilling cycle, it executes after each programmed
position, until you cancel it.

NOTE: The P entry (return height) is optional, and you do not need to
provide it. If you do not specify P, the CNC sets it to R.
Keep the following in mind for drill cycles:
• P dimension is optional. If it is not given, the retract height is the
same as the Z start height (R dimension).
• F feedrate is optional. If it is not given, the current feedrate is used.
• All start heights (R) and finish heights (P) as well as Z dimensions are
absolute dimensions.
• P must be greater than R, or an alarm is given.
• For all peck drill cycles (G83 and G87), R (start height) must be 0.1"
(or 2 mm) above the work surface.
• G84 (Tapping) uses S word for Spindle Yes/No. Your machine must
be equipped with spindle M-functions to use G84.
• Z-axis depth can be changed by placing a new Z depth on the same
line as the X- and/or Y-axis location of the hole you want the new
depth applied. A Z address on a line of its own causes the control to
drill the new depth at the current location.
The following topics are described:

‰ Drilling Off (G80)

‰ Basic Drill Cycle (G81)
‰ CounterBore Drill Cycle (G82)
‰ Peck Drill Cycle (G83)
‰ Tapping Cycle (G84)
‰ Boring Bidirectional Cycle (G85)
‰ Boring Unidirectional Cycle (G86)
‰ Chip Break Cycle (G87)
‰ Flat Bottom Boring Cycle (G88)
‰ Drilling Example
‰ Pattern Drill Cycles
‰ Drill Bolt Hole Cycle (G79)
‰ Drill Pattern Cycle (G179)

5-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Drilling Off (G80)

Format: G80
Modal cycles remain active until canceled. Use G80 to cancel drill, tap,
and bore canned cycles (G81 to G89). G80 can be included with other
commands on a block.
Basic Drill Cycle (G81)
Format: G81 Zn Rn Fn Pn
G81 is a basic drilling cycle, generally used for center drilling or hole
drilling that does not require a pecking motion. It feeds from the start
height (R) to the specified hole depth (Z) at a given feedrate (F), then
rapids to the return height (P). Refer to Figure 7-12, Basic Drill Cycle
Screen. Refer to Table 5-1.
Table 5-1, G81 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
ZDepth Z Absolute hole depth. (Required)
StartHgt R Initial Z start point, in rapid. (Required)
Feed F Feedrate
ReturnHgt P Z return point after hole depth, in rapid.
P must be higher than R.
CounterBore Drill Cycle (G82)
Format: G82 Zn Rn Dn Fn Pn

G82 is the counter bore cycle, generally used for counterboring. It feeds
from the R-plane to Z depth, dwells for specified time, then rapids to the
return point. Refer to Figure 7-13, CounterBore Drill Cycle Screen.
Refer to Table 5-2.
Table 5-2, G82 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
Finish Depth Z Absolute hole depth. (Required)
Start Height R Initial Z start point, in rapid. (Required)
Dwell Time D Dwell time (in seconds). (Required)
Feed Rate F Feedrate
Return Height P Z return point after hole depth, in rapid.
P must be higher than R.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Peck Drill Cycle (G83)

Format: G83 Zn Rn In Fn Pn
G83 is the peck drilling cycle, generally used for peck drilling relatively
shallow holes. G83 feeds from the R-plane to the first peck depth
(calculated so that all pecks are equal and do not exceed the maximum
peck distance programmed in I word). Then rapid retracts to R-plane (to
clear chip), rapids down to previous depth less .02", and continues this
loop until it reaches the final hole depth. It then rapid retracts to the P
dimension. Refer to Table 5-3.
Table 5-3, G83 Address Words
Address
Label Word Description
ZDepth Z Absolute whole depth. (Required)
StartHgt R Initial Z start point, in rapid. (Required)
Peck I Maximum peck distance (positive
dimension). (Required)
Feed F Feedrate
ReturnHgt P Z return point after hole depth, in rapid. P
must be higher than R.

5-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Tapping Cycle (G84)

Format: G84 Zn Rn Vn Sn Pn Dn

NOTE: The machine must be equipped with spindle M-functions (FWD,

REV, OFF) to use this cycle. Do not use G84 if the machine
does not have spindle commands available.
G84 is the tapping canned cycle, used for tapping holes. During a G84
cycle: the tool feeds from the R-plane to Z depth; the spindle stops and
reverses; the tool feeds to the retract plane; and the spindle stops and
reverses again. Refer to Table 5-4.
F (TPIorLead): Enter Threads per Inch when in Inch mode. Enter Lead
when in MM (G71) mode. Lead is the distance from one thread to the
next. You must program a spindle RPM. The Feedrate is calculated
based on the spindle RPM and the TPI or Lead specified.
S (Spindle sync): To enable Spindle sync, enter a value of 1. The
machine must have direct spindle control to use this feature. The spindle
rotation and Z-axis movement is synched together, as in a threading cycle.
D (Dwell): A dwell time value in seconds can be entered. You may
require this feature because of the time required to stop and reverse the
spindle.
NOTE: If S=0, the programmed Dwell (D) is active when the spindle
reverses at the bottom and top of each hole.
If S=1, the programmed Dwell (D) is at the top of each hole.

Table 5-4, G84 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
ZDepth Z Absolute hole depth (Required)
StartHgt R Initial Z start point, in rapid. (Required)
TPIorLead V Threads per Inch (TPI) in Inch mode or
Lead (Distance between threads) in MM
mode. (Required)
SynSpn S Spindle, No (0) or Yes (1).
ReturnHgt P Z retract height after hole depth, in rapid.
Dwell D Dwell time

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-5

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Boring Bidirectional Cycle (G85)

Format: G85 Zn Rn Fn Pn
G85 is a boring cycle, generally used to make a pass in each direction on
a bore or to tap with a self-reversing tapping head. It feeds from the
R-plane to Z depth, and then feeds back to the retract height. Refer to
Table 5-5.
Table 5-5, G85 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
ZDepth Z Absolute hole depth. (Required)
StartHgt R Initial Z start point, in rapid. (Required)
Feed F Feedrate
ReturnHgt P Z return point after hole depth, in rapid.

Boring Unidirectional Cycle (G86)

Format: G86 Zn Rn Fn In Dn Pn Cn

G86 is a boring cycle that allows the X-axis to back off the bore surface
after the spindle has stopped and oriented itself. The cycle feeds from
the R-plane to Z depth, dwell for the specified time, stop and orient the
spindle to the specified angle C, back off in X, rapid retract in Z, re-
position in X, and restart the spindle. Refer to Table 5-6.

NOTE: Your machine must be equipped with spindle M-functions

(Spindle Forward [M3], Spindle Reverse [M4], Spindle Off [M5])
and spindle orientation (M19) to use this cycle. Do not use the
G86 cycle if the machine does not have the spindle commands
and spindle orientation.
Table 5-6, G86 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
Finish Depth Z Absolute hole depth. (Required)
Start Height R Initial Z start point, in rapid. (Required)
Feed Rate F Feedrate
X Backoff I X-axis incremental backoff distance in X
(positive or negative dimension).
Dwell Time D Dwell time (in seconds)
Return Height P Z return point after hole depth, in rapid.
Index Angle C M19 index angle. If no angle is given,
the angle for spindle orientation defaults
to zero.

5-6 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Chip Break Cycle (G87)

Format: G87 Zn Rn In Jn Kn Fn Wn Un Pn
G87 is the chip-breaker peck-drilling cycle, generally used to peck-drill
medium to deep holes. The cycle feeds from the R-plane to the first peck
depth in Z, rapid retracts the chip-break increment (W), feeds to the next
calculated peck depth (initial peck less J), and continues this sequence
until it reaches a U depth, or until final hole depth is reached. The peck
distance is never more than I or less than K. Refer to Table 5-7.
This cycle enables optimum drilling conditions for holes. For maximum
efficiency in deep hole drilling, set parameters to accommodate the
material and tool types used. Generally, the deeper the hole, the smaller
the peck distance (J). This prevents the binding of chips, tool, and
workpiece. Set U to retract the drill completely at set depth intervals.
Table 5-7, G87 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
ZDepth Z Absolute hole depth. Required.
StartHgt R Initial Z start point, in rapid. Required.
FirstPeck I First peck distance (positive dimension).
Required.
PeckDecr J Amount to subtract from previous peck
(positive dimension). Required.
MinPeck K Minimum peck distance (positive
dimension). Required.
Feed F Feedrate.
ChipBrkInc W Chip break increment (positive dimension).
RetractDep U Incremental depth between full retracts
(positive dimension).
ReturnHgt P Z return point after hole depth, in rapid. P
must be higher than R.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-7

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Flat Bottom Boring Cycle (G89)

Format: G89 Zn Rn Dn Fn Pn
G89 is a boring cycle, generally used to program a pass in each direction
with a dwell at the bottom. The tool feeds from the R-plane to Z depth,
dwells for specified time, then feeds to the retract (P) dimension. Refer to
Table 5-8.
Table 5-8, G89 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
Finish Depth Z Absolute hole depth. (Required)
Start Height R Initial Z start point (0.1 inch or 2 mm), in
rapid. (Required)
Dwell Time D Dwell time (in seconds). (Required)
Feed Rate F Feedrate
Return Height P Z return point after hole depth, in rapid.
Drilling Example
The following example assumes that the machine has no automatic tool
changer (ATC). If your machine has an ATC, check your machine
manual for proper tool changer programming procedures. Refer to
Figure 5-1 and Table 5-9, Drilling Example, Inch (Metric).

Drilling

Figure 5-1, Drilling Example

5-8 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-9, Drilling Example, Inch (Metric)

Blk # Block Description
N1 O1 * DRIL-X1 Program number (1) and name (DRILL-
EX1).
N2 G90 G70 (G71) G0 T0 Z0 Sets absolute dimensions (G90), inch
input (G70), rapid (G0), cancel any active
tool (T0), and bring Z to zero (Z0).
N3 X-3.0 (X-75) Y1.0 (Y25) Move to X-3 Y1.
N4 T01 * 1/4" DRILL (6.35 DRILL) Activate Tool #1 length offset.
N5 G83 Z-.55 (Z-14) R.1 (R2) F12 Initiates peck drill cycle G83: Z = hole
(F300) I.08 (I2) P.1 (P2) depth, R = start height, F = feedrate, I =
maximum peck, P = return height.
N6 X1.0 (X25.4) Y-1.0 (Y-25.4) Hole location #1 (Rapid and Absolute).
N7 X3.0 (X76.2) Hole #2.
N8 G91 X1.5 (X38.1) Hole #3 (moves from #2 to #3 in
incremental: G91).
N9 X1.0 (X25.4) Y -1.25 (Y-31.75) Hole #4 (Incremental).
N10 X-2.5 (X-63.5) Hole #5 (Incremental).
N11 G90 X1.5 (X38.1) Y -2.5 (Y-63.5) Hole #6 (Absolute).
N12 G80 T0 Z0 Cancel drill cycle (G80), cancel tool
(T0), and rapid Z to zero (Z0).
N13 X-3.0 (X-75) Y1.0 (Y25) Move to X-3 Y1 for part change.
N14 M02 End Program.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-9

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Pattern Drill Cycles

Use the drill bolt hole cycle (G79) to drill a partial or full bolt circle. A drill
cycle (G81 to G89) must be programmed prior to G79. You can move
around the pattern clockwise or counterclockwise, either point to point or
along a radius. G79 calculates the hole locations. The cycle uses the
Polar Coordinate System for dimensions. When the G79 cycle is
completed, you must cancel the cycle (G80).
Drill Bolt Hole Cycle (G79)
Format: G79 An Hn Dn Xn Cn Yn Bn Rn
Table 5-10, G79 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
StartAngle A Angle of the first hole. (Required)
#Holes H Number of holes in full bolt circle. (Required)
Diameter D Diameter of bolt circle. Tool normally moves
from hole to hole in a CCW (positive)
direction. For CW direction, D = negative.
(Required)
XCenter X Absolute X center of the bolt-circle. Defaults
to current position.
IndexAngle C Rotates the Polar Coordinate System by
entered angle. Default: 0 degrees (3
o'clock). CCW = positive, CW = negative.
YCenter Y Absolute Y center of the bolt-circle. Defaults
to current position.
EndAngle B Angle of the last hole. If there is no B value,
the CNC executes a full bolt hole circle.
Radial Path R Move from hole to hole on a radius. Set to
1.0 to activate circular path between holes.
Defaults to straight-line path between holes.

POLAR

Figure 5-2, Polar Coordinates

5-10 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Drill Pattern Cycle (G179)

Format: G179 Xn Yn Bn En Un Vn Cn An Dn Wn

NOTE: Do not program G68 with G179.

Use the automatic hole pattern canned cycle (G179) to program partial or
full pattern hole grids. You can use G179 for a corner pattern when holes
are required only on four corners. It calculates the hole locations from the
entered variables. You can also rotate the pattern around the starting
hole location. A drill cycle (G81–G89) must be programmed prior to
G179. You must cancel the cycle (G80) after the pattern is completed.
Refer to Figure 7-14, Drill Pattern Cycle Screen. Refer to Table 5-11.
You can use [A and D] or [U and V], but not both combinations. Positive
and negative values are allowed in all variable words except: B, E, and
W.
Table 5-11, G179 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
X X Absolute X position of start hole. (Required)
Y Y Absolute Y position of start hole. (Required)
#XHoles B Number of holes in X-axis. (Required)
#YHoles E Number of holes in Y-axis. (Required)
XIncr U Increment between holes in X-axis. Can be
used instead of A.
YIncr V Increment between holes in Y-axis. Can be
used instead of D.
Angle C Angle to rotate the hole pattern. Default is 0
degrees (3 o'clock position).
Length A Length of pattern in X-axis. If used, U cannot
be given.
Width D Width of pattern in Y-axis. If used, V cannot
be given.
Perimeter W Pattern or Square. If W is 0, then a matrix
pattern is drilled. If W is 1, then a perimeter
pattern (edges only) is drilled. Refer to
Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3, Matrix vs. Perimeter Pattern

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-11

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Example:
G81 Z-.1 R.1 F15
G179 X2 Y1 C30 B6 E4 U.5 V.375 W0
G80
These blocks rotate a bolt hole pattern 30 degrees counterclockwise.
Refer to Figure 5-4.

G179

Figure 5-4, G179 Programming Example

5-12 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Pocket Cycles
Pocketing cycles eliminate extensive programming. One block of
programming mills out the described pocket. Activate a tool before
programming a pocket cycle. All pockets use the current tool diameter
from the Tool Page.
XY positioning may be necessary prior to programming a pocket cycle.
Programmer is responsible for all Z moves in Hole Mill (G76) cycle.
Cutting direction is reversible in the pocketing cycles.
Always check that tool-to-corner radii do not conflict.
Z and P dimensions are absolute.
On all cycles with variable A (tool stepover), A must be less than the tool
diameter. In G78 and G178, A must be 70% or less of tool diameter.
Alarm messages occur if the CNC detects program errors.
G41 and G42 are not permitted during pocket cycles. Pocket cycles use
"built-in" cutter compensation.
Stock variable #1030 is not permitted and is ignored.

WARNING: When you cut one pocket inside another, make sure to
set P above the highest pocket. At the end of each pocket, the tool
rapids to P, and then rapids to the start position.
For plunge pockets (G177, G178), drill a start hole prior to activating the
pocket; position the axes over the start hole prior to G177 or G178.
The following topics are described:

‰ Draft Angle Pocket Cycle (G73)

‰ Frame Pocket (G75)
‰ Hole Mill Cycle (G76)
‰ Circular Pocket Cycle (G77)
‰ Rectangular Pocket Cycle (G78)
‰ Irregular Pocket Cycle (G169)
‰ Islands (G162)
‰ Irregular Pocket Examples
‰ Face Mill Cycle (G170)
‰ Circular Profile Cycle (G171)
‰ Rectangular Profile Cycle (G172)
‰ Mill Cycle (G175)
‰ EndMill Cycle (G176)
‰ Thread Mill Cycle (G181)
‰ Plunge Circular Pocket Cycle (G177)
‰ Plunge Rectangular Cycle (G178)
‰ Slot Cycle (G210)
‰ Circular Slot Cycle (G211)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-13

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Draft Angle Pocket Cycle (G73)

Format: G73 Xn Yn Hn Zn In En An Bn Cn Dn Qn Vn Sn Kn Wn Jn
Use the draft pocket milling cycle (G73) to machine a draft angle on a
pocket. The tool must be at the center point of the lower-left corner
radius. This is where the machining begins. You can use G78 to mill out
an initial pocket prior to the G73 block. Refer to Table 5-12.
Table 5-12, G73 Address Words
Address
Label Word Description
Bottom Length X X length at the bottom of the pocket.
(Required)
Bottom Width Y Y width at the bottom of the pocket.
(Required)
Start Height H Z absolute rapid start height (must be
0.1 inch or 2 mm above surface).
(Required)
Z Depth (abs) Z Z absolute pocket depth. (Required)
Z Step Rough I Z-axis roughing step-down. (Required)
Draft Angle E Draft angle to be machined on vertical
walls of pocket. (Required)
Lower Left Rad A Lower-left corner radius. Cannot be
less than tool radius. (Required)
If only A is used, then the A value is
used for all four corners.
Lower Right B Lower-right corner radius. Cannot be
Rad less than tool radius.
Upper Left Rad C Upper-right corner radius. Cannot be
less than tool radius.
Upper Right D Upper-left corner radius. Cannot be
Rad less than tool radius.
Z Step Finish Q Z-axis finishing step-down.
Max XY Step V Maximum XY tool stepover. Used if
angle is so great that the amount of XY
step per Z step exceeds 70 % of the
tool diameter.
Finish STK XY S XY finish stock amount, sides only.
Finish Feed K Finish-pass feedrate.
Flat 0, Ball 1 W Flat end mill = 0. Ball end mill = 1.
Default is flat end mil (0)
RoughFeed J Roughing feedrate

5-14 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Example:

This program cuts the draft angle pocket shown in the figure. The
drawing does not show the finish pass. Assume an existing rectangular
pocket (4 in. long x 2 in. wide x 1 in. deep) with a theoretical sharp lower-
left corner at X2 Y2. The following program machines a draft angle onto
the existing pocket. Refer to Figure 5-5 and Table 5-13.

Figure 5-5, G73 Programming Example

Table 5-13, G73 Programming Example

T1 M3 S2000 ***** 1/2" FLAT END MILL
G90 G0 X2.5 Y2.5 F30 ***** 4" x 2" x 1" DP RCT. PKT ALREADY
EXISTS
G73 X4 Y2 H.1 Z-1 A.5 E10 I.1 S.01 Q.02 R35
G0 T0 Z0 M5
X0 Y0 M2
Position the tool above the center of the lower-left corner radius. The tool
path starts and ends at the center of the lower-left corner radius (after
each perimeter pass) for all roughing passes. During finish passes, the
tool steps down the draft angle and makes passes around the perimeter.

If a ball-end mill is programmed (W=1), the following points must be

considered: If W=1, the length (X) and width (Y) at the bottom of the
pocket is measured at the tangency point of the ball radius and the draft
angle. If W=1, the start height (H) must be set to (0.1 + ball radius) above
surface to be cut. If W=1, set the tool-length offset so that the ball is
buried up to its centerline when at the part surface (touch off the tip and
add the ball radius, or touch off tip and use a negative length wear equal
to the ball radius).

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-15

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Frame Pocket Cycle (G75)

Format: G75 Mn Wn Zn Un Hn Cn Xn Yn Bn In Jn Vn Kn Sn An Pn
Frame milling (G75) mills a frame or trough around an island of material.
You must position the XY axes at the lower-left (theoretical sharp) corner
of the island before you program G75. Refer to Table 5-14.
Prior to G75, activate a tool so that the CNC considers the tool diameter.
The relation of the outside corner radius to the frame width must be
geometrically possible or an Error Message is displayed.

Table 5-14, G75 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
Length M Length of island in X-axis (Required)
Width W Width of island in Y-axis (Required)
ZDepth Z Absolute depth of frame (Required)
InsideRad U Inside corner radius of frame (corner radius of island) (Required)
StartHgt H Z absolute starting (rapid) height (must be 0.1 inch or 2 mm
above surface to be cut into) (Required)
FrameWidth C Frame width (Required)
XCenter X Center of island in X-axis. Default: Current position.
YCenter Y Center of island in Y-axis. Default: Current position.
DepthCut B Maximum Z depth per pass (For example, if Z is programmed to
be -1, and B to be .5, the frame is roughed out in two levels.) B is
programmed as a positive dimension.
Defaults to tool diameter (depth) less finish stock.
RampFeed I Ramp in feed: The tool ramps into the first depth of cut with an YZ
move from the I.D. of the frame to the O.D. of the frame. Defaults
to last programmed feedrate.
RoughFeed J After the ramp-in move described above, the tool rough-mills the
frame, at feedrate J. Defaults to last programmed feedrate.
OutsideRad V Outside corner radius of frame. Defaults to value of U
(InsideRad). Must be equal to or greater than tool radius.
FinFeed K Finish-pass feedrate. Defaults to last programmed feedrate.
FinStock S Finish stock amount per side (including bottom). If you enter a
negative value, stock is left, but no finish pass occurs. If you do
not enter a value, finish stock is not left.
Stepover A Maximum tool stepover (must be less than tool diameter):
+A dimension = climb (CCW)
-A dimension = conventional (CW)
Defaults to half tool diameter.
RetractHgt P Z-axis absolute (rapid) retract height (must be equal to or above
H). Defaults to H (StartHgt) value.

5-16 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Example:
G75 M3 W1.125 H.1 Z-.375 A.25 B.36 I5 J18 U.25 V.5 C1 S.015 K30 P.1
Figure 5-6 illustrates the moves output by the CNC to mill the frame.
cycle:

Figure 5-6, G75 Programming Example

The tool performs the following operations:

NOTE: If X and Y are not provided, position the tool at the center of the
island prior to G75.
1. Tool rapids from position 1 to position 2: X is the center of the inside
corner radius (U), and Y is the corner radius plus tool radius plus
finish stock.
2. Tool feeds -.1 (or 2 mm) in Z to the part surface.
3. Tool performs a ramp-in move to O.D. of frame minus tool radius
minus finish stock (position 3).
4. Tool then moves 360 degrees CCW around frame back to position 3.
5. Tool then steps over calculated amount, and mills CW until position 2
is reached again at depth.
6. Tool then mills 360 degrees CW (climb-milling) around the island.

NOTE: The number of times the tool repeats Steps 3 through 6

depends on the Z and B dimensions.

7. When the frame is completed, the tool rapids first to the P dimension,
then to the center of the island.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-17

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Hole Mill Cycle (G76)

Format: G76 Dn Xn Yn Bn Zn Hn Jn Kn Sn
Use the hole milling cycle (G76) to machine through holes or counter-
bores. You can position the tool at the hole center prior to the G76 block.
Activate a tool prior to G76 so that the CNC knows the tool diameter.
Refer to Table 5-15.

If you do not provide Z and H, program a separate Z move to raise the

tool out of the hole after the cycle.
Table 5-15, G76 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
Diameter D Diameter of hole. Negative D = CW direction. The
direction CCW (climb milling) is reversible:
+D dimension = climb (CCW)
-D dimension = conventional (CW)
(Required)
XCenter X X coordinate of the center. Default: Pocket centers at
present position.
YCenter Y Y coordinate of the center. If no coordinate is provided,
default is set to present position.
DepthCut B Z-axis increment used for each pass.
ZDepth Z The absolute depth of the finished pocket.
StartHgt H Absolute Z position to which the CNC rapids before
feeding into the workpiece.
RoughFeed J Rough-pass feedrate. Defaults to last programmed
feedrate.
FinFeed K Finish-pass feedrate. Defaults to last programmed
feedrate.
FinStock S Finish-stock amount per side. If you enter a negative
value, stock is left, but no finish pass occurs. If you do
not enter a value, no finish stock is left.

Example:
G76 D2.5 J12 S.01 K20

In Figure 5-7, G76 Programming Example, the tool performs the

following operations:
1. Tool moves from position 1 to a position 45 degrees from center, at
half the radius (position 2).
2. Tool then arcs onto the O.D. tangential (CCW) (position 3).
3. Tool mills O.D. CCW (position 4).

5-18 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

4. Tool leaves O.D. tangentially to a point 135 degrees from the center
at half the radius. CCW (position 5).
5. Tool returns to center (position 6).
6. If you have programmed a finish pass, the process repeats at the
finish dimensions.
3,4

5 2

6 1

2.5" Dia.
G76

Figure 5-7, G76 Programming Example

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-19

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Circular Pocket Cycle (G77)

Format: G77 Zn Hn Dn Xn Yn Bn In Kn Sn An Pn
Use the circular pocket canned cycle (G77) to mill round pockets. You do
not have to place the tool at the center of the pocket, since the cycle has
variable words for X and Y center. If X and Y variable words are not
programmed, the CNC uses the current position as the pocket center.
Refer to Table 5-16.
Activate a tool prior to programming G77 so that the CNC knows the
cutter diameter. You can position the tool at the pocket center and omit
the XY words. By default, the CNC uses the current position as the
pocket center.
Table 5-16, G77 Address Words
Address
Label Word Description
ZDepth Z Absolute depth of pocket. (Required)
StartHgt H Z absolute starting height (0.1 inch or 2 mm above surface).
Executed in rapid. (Required)
Diameter D Diameter of pocket. The direction CCW (climb milling) is reversible
(Required):
+D dimension = climb (CCW)
-D dimension = conventional (CW)
XCenter X Center of the pocket in X-axis. Defaults to current position.
YCenter Y Center of the pocket in Y-axis. Defaults to current position.
DepthCut B Maximum Z depth per pass (Example: If Z is programmed to be
-1, and B to be .5, the pocket is roughed out in two levels.) B is
programmed as a positive dimension. Defaults to tool diameter
(depth), less finish stock.
RoughFeed I Ramp in/rough feed: The tool ramps into the first depth of cut with
a spiral move from the I.D. of the pocket to the O.D. of the pocket.
The feedrate for this move is programmed as I. After the ramp-in
move, the tool rough-mills the pocket, at feedrate I. Defaults to
last programmed feedrate.
FinFeed K Finish-pass feedrate. Defaults to last programmed feedrate.
FinStock S Finish-stock amount per side (including bottom). If you enter a
negative value, stock is left, but no finish pass occurs. If not
programmed, no finish stock is left.
Stepover A Maximum tool stepover (must be less than tool diameter). If +A
dimension = outward spiral. If -A dimension = inward spiral. On
inward spirals, the tool moves to O.D. at 0 degrees, and begins
the roughing process there (3 o'clock). Defaults to tool radius.
RetractHgt P Z-axis absolute-retract height (must be equal to or above H).
Executed in rapid. Defaults to H (StartHgt) dimension.

5-20 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Example:
G77 X2 Y2 H.1 Z-.25 D3 A.35 B.25 I12 S.01 K20 P.1
In Figure 5-8, the tool performs the following operations:

NOTE: Figure 5-8 shows only the tool path.

1. Tool moves to X2 Y2 (position 1) in current modes: G0/1, G90/91,
G70/71 (position 1).
2. Tool feeds .1 in. (2 mm) down in Z-axis.
3. Tool moves to O.D. (less finish stock) in a 3-axis spiral motion
(position 2).
4. Tool makes a full circle (position 2).
5. Tool then spirals inward to complete the roughing cycle, at the first
level.
6. If you have specified a finish pass, repeat steps 3 through 5 at the
finish feedrate.
7. Tool rapids to P dimension, then to the original XY location.

Figure 5-8, G77 Programming Example

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-21

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Rectangular Pocket Cycle (G78)

Format: G78 Mn Wn Zn Hn Xn Yn Bn In Jn Kn Sn An Un Pn
Use the rectangular pocket cycle (G78) to mill square or rectangular
pockets. You must position the tool directly over the center of the pocket
prior to the G78 block, or use the X Y words. Refer to Table 5-17.
Activate a tool prior to programming G78, so cutter diameter is known.

Table 5-17, G78 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
Length M Length of pocket in X-axis (Required)
Width W Width of pocket in Y-axis (Required)
ZDepth Z Absolute depth of pocket (Required)
StartHgt H Z absolute starting height (must be 0.1 inch or 2 mm above
surface to be cut). Executed in rapid. (Required)
XCenter X X coordinate of the center. Default: pocket centers at
present position.
YCenter Y Y coordinate of the center. If no coordinate is provided,
default is set to present position.
DepthCut B Maximum Z depth per pass (Example: if you program Z to
be -1, and B to be .5, the CNC roughs out the pocket in two
levels.) B is programmed as a positive dimension. Defaults
to tool diameter (depth), less finish stock.
RampFeed I Ramp in feed: The tool ramps into the first depth of cut with
an XYZ move from the centerline of the lower-left radius
toward the center of the pocket. The feedrate for this move
is programmed as I. Defaults to last programmed feedrate.
RoughFeed J After the ramp-in move, the tool rough-mills the pocket, at
feedrate J. Defaults to last programmed feedrate.
FinFeed K Finish-pass feedrate. Defaults to last programmed feedrate.
FinStock S Finish stock amount per side (including bottom). If entered
as negative, stock is left, but no finish pass occurs. If not
programmed, no finish stock is left.
Stepover A Maximum tool stepover (must be 70% or less of tool
diameter). +A dimension = climb (CCW). -A dimension =
conventional (CW). Defaults to half tool diameter.
CornerRad U Actual corner radius of pocket (all four corners are the
same). Must be equal to or greater than tool radius.
Defaults to tool radius.
(Continued…)

5-22 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-17, G78 Address Words (Continued)

Address
Label Word Description
RetractHgt P Z-axis absolute finish height (must be equal to or above H).
Executed in rapid. Defaults to H (StartHgt) value.
WARNING: When you cut a pocket inside another pocket,
you must set P above the highest pocket. At the end of
each pocket, the tool rapids to P, then rapid to the start
position.
Example:
G78 M4 W2 H.1 Z-.5 U.75 A.35 B.25 I7 J12 S.01 K20 P.1

NOTE: If you do not use X and Y words, you must position the tool at
the center of the pocket before the G78 block.

In Figure 5-9, the tool performs the following operations:

NOTE: Figure 5-9 shows only the tool path.

1. Tool moves to the center of the radius in the lower-left corner
(position 1).
2. Tool feeds -.1” (2 mm) to meet the part surface.
3. Tool moves in XYZ toward center of pocket (position 2) to the first
roughing depth, at feedrate I.
4. Tool mills out the pocket with straight lines and arcs (if necessary),
using feedrate J, until first level is completed.
5. Tool repeats this process if necessary to achieve full depth (less finish
stock).
6. Optional finish pass is made in the same manner at feedrate K.
7. When the pocket is complete, tool rapids to P, then to the center of
the pocket.

X
2 X 4 OVERALL G78

Figure 5-9, G78 Programming Example

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-23

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Irregular Pocket Cycle (G169)

Format: G169 Wn Xn Yn Hn Zn Mn An Bn In Jn Sn Kn Pn
Use G169 to mill irregular pockets. You must enter the perimeter of the
shape into a subprogram. The main irregular pocket needs to be a
closed contiguous line and arc movements starting and ending at the
same point. The first line in the input subroutine for outside shape or
islands needs a G41 (left) or G42 (right) to indicate which side of the
contour the cutter needs to be, as viewed from the direction of travel. No
ramp on or off movement is allowed. The cycle calculates these moves
on and off the defined shape. Do not include parametric programming or
feedrates in the subprogram, only the exact perimeter of the pocket. In a
closed shape, the start point of the first (rapid) move and the endpoint of
the last move (line or arc) are the same. The CNC automatically
calculates the moves necessary to clear out the shape. Refer to
Table 5-18.
Roughing is always climb mill and finish is always conventional mill
unless a negative K (FinFeed) value is used. If a negative K (FinFeed)
is used, the finish pass is also climb mill.
If there are islands to be avoided, they must be defined in the line
preceding G169 line using G162, Islands.

Table 5-18, G169 Address Words

Address
Label Words Description
Sub# W The number of the subprogram that contains the
perimeter of the pocket. Must be a closed shape.
(Required)
StartHgt H The Absolute Z position before beginning to mill the
pocket. This must be 0.1 inch (or 2 mm) above the
surface. (Required)
ZDepth Z The Absolute depth of the pocket (Required)
Stepover A The distance the tool steps over (width of cut) as it mills
out the pocket. The step over selected may need to be
adjusted to ensure that excessive stock is not left on any
of the pocket sides. (Required)
NOTE: The CNC defaults to 0.5 of the cutter diameter if
StepOver = 0.000)
XStart X A rapid to a position to start pocket. Cycle rapids the Z-
axis to position P (RetractHgt); then, X and Y to the
starting position before beginning pocket. If not given,
the cycle uses the current position.
YStart Y A rapid to a position to start pocket.
(Same as XStart above)
(Continued…)

5-24 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-18, G169 Address Words (Continued)

Address
Label Words Description
RampFeed I The feedrate at which the tool will "ramp" into the pocket
in all three axes.
RoughFeed J Rough-cycle feedrate
FinFeed K Finish-cycle feedrate
FinStock S Finish stock. If K (FinFeed) is set, the CNC automatically
executes a finish pass after it roughs out the pocket at K
(FinFeed) feedrate. The finish stock amount applies to
the sides and bottom unless M (SideStock) is defined;
then, S (FinStock) only applies to the bottom. If you do
not specify a value, finish stock is not left.
SideStock M Finish stock side. If not set, the cycle uses the S
(FinStock) value.
DepthCut B The depth per pass. If a deep pocket is necessary, it
might not be feasible to take all the stock in one cut, so
the Depth of Cut can be programmed to allow two or
more passes.
RetractHgt P Retract height. The Absolute Z position at the start and
end of the cycle.
Caution: The Z-axis rapids to this position before
traversing to the X and Y staging position.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-25

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Islands (G162)
Format: G162 An Bn Cn Dn En
This cycle allows islands in irregular pockets. Pockets with Islands must
be programmed using subroutines.
More than one G162 Island cycle can be programmed at a time. They
may be strung together, or on separate lines. Islands can be
programmed inside of islands. Five islands can be put on a line. The
subroutine number is used as inputs. Refer to Table 5-19.
Islands that are defined to be avoided on the inside of an irregular pocket
are done so by using the G162 followed by a list of up to 5 subprogram
label names. If more than 5 islands need to be defined, the G162 can be
used to define as many subsequent islands as desired in multiples of 5 up
to as many as needed. As in the following example:
G162 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E 6
G162 A 7 B 8 C 9 D 10 E 11
G162 A 12 B 13 C 14 D 15 E 16
G162 A 17 B 18

and so forth … prior to calling the G169 area clearance or irregular pocket
command.

The islands need to be a closed contiguous line and/or arc movements

starting and ending at the same point and starting with a G41 (left) or G42
(right) as the first line to indicate which side of the contour the cutter
needs to be, as viewed from the direction of travel. (No ramp on or off
movement is allowed. The cycle calculates these moves on and off the
islands).

Activate a tool prior to programming G162 and G169, so cutter diameter

is known. G162 is for use with G169 only. Program G162 before G169.
Table 5-19, G162 Address Words
Address
Label Word Description
FirstIsl A First island (Required)
SecondIsl B Second island
ThirdIsl C Third island
FourthIsl D Fourth island
FifthIsl E Fifth island

5-26 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Using Subroutines for Pockets with Islands

The program below is the same one used in the DXF portion with
subroutines added for the letters. See Figure 5-10 and Table 5-20,
Pockets with Islands Subroutines Programming Example.

SUBROUTINES PISLANDS

Figure 5-10, Subroutines Pockets with Islands Example Workpiece

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-27

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-20, Pockets with Islands Subroutines Programming Example

1 G90 G17 G71 G40
2 G120 X32 Y22 Z-6 I-2 J-2 K-15
3 G53 O0
4 T1 D1 L-25 M6
5 G0 X0 Y0
6 S1000 M3
7 *G162 Defines the Islands
8 G162 A10 B20
9 *G169 Calls the Irregular Pocket Cycle
10 G169 W1 X5 Y5 A.69 Z-10.0 H2.0 I500 J2000 K1500 M.1 S.2
P25
11 G0 G90 Z25
12 M5
13 G0 X0 Y-5
14 M2
15 O1 *Subroutine for outside of pocket
16 *G41 to Indicate which side the cutter is on
17 G41
18 G0X5 Y5
19 G1 X13
20 X10 Y0
21 X20
22 X16 Y5
23 X24
24 X21 Y0
25 X31
26 X27 Y5
27 X30
28 Y20
29 X5
30 Y15
31 X0 Y20
32 Y7
33 X5 Y12
34 Y5
35 M99
36
37 O10 *Subroutine for first island
38 *G42 to indicate cutter path is outside of the island
39 G42
40 G0 G90 X10 Y10

5-28 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

41 X15
42 Y15
43 X10 Y10
44 M99
45
46 O20 *Subroutine for second island
47 *G41 to indicate cutter path is also outside of the island
48 G41
49 G0 G90 X20 Y12
50 Y15
51 X25
52 Y12
53 X20 Y12
54 M99

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-29

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Irregular Pocket Examples

Example 1:
This example uses an irregular pocket cycle to cut the pocket shape.
Refer to Figure 5-11. Program the perimeter of the pocket in a
subprogram. The CNC calculates the moves to mill out the pocket. Enter
a 3/8" diameter tool in the Tool Page. This part program consists of a
main program and a subprogram. Refer to Table 5-21.

6.0
ABS
ZERO 2.5

1.5 .5 R 1.5

.75 1.0 R 2.5

1.0

G169

Figure 5-11, G169 Programming Example 1

Table 5-21, G169 Programming Example 1

1 G90 G70 G17
2 T1
3 G169 W1 X0 Y0 H.1 Z-.125 A.15 M.01 S.01 I7.5 J12.5
K9.5 P2.0
4 G90 G00 T0 Z0
5 M2
6 O1
7 G42
8 G90 G00 X0.0 Y0.0
9 G01 X2
10 G2 X2.5 Y-.5 R.5
11 G1 Y-1.5
12 X6
13 Y-3
14 G2 X5 Y-4 R1
15 G1 X1.25
16 G2 X.75 Y-3.5 R.5

5-30 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

17 G91 G1 Y1
18 G90 X0 Y-1.5
19 Y0
20 M99

Example 2:

Use an irregular pocket cycle to cut the pocket shape. Input the
"perimeter" of the pocket into a subprogram. The CNC calculates the
moves to mill out the pocket. Input a 3/8" diameter tool in the Tool Page.
This part program consists of a main program and a subprogram. Refer
to Figure 5-12 and Table 5-22.

Rad. 1.25"
Rad. 0.75"

X0,Y0 X5,Y0

G169_2

Figure 5-12, G169 Programming Example 2

Table 5-22, G169 Programming Example 2

1 G90 G70 G0 T0 Z0
2 T1 M6
3 G169 W99 X0 Y0 H.1 Z-.25 A.16 B.125 M.01 S.01
I7.5 J12.5 K9.5 P2
4 G90 G00 T0 Z0
5 M2
6 O99
7 G42
8 G90 G00 X-1.25 Y0
9 G2 X .125 Y 1.2437 R1.25
10 G1 X 5.075 Y .7462
11 G2 X5.075 Y-.7462 R.75
12 G1 X .125 Y -1.2437
13 G2 X -1.25 Y0.0 R1.25
14 M99

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-31

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Face Mill Cycle (G170)

Format: G170 Xn Yn An Bn Fn Hn Zn Dn En
Facing cycles simplify the programming required to face the surface of a
part.

Execution begins one tool radius from the D and E (start point). The
selected stepover determines the approach axes. Refer to Figure 5-13.

Figure 5-13, Face Cycle Tool Approach

Facing cycles can start in any corner of the surface and cut in any
direction, depending on the sign (+/-) of the X (Length) and A (Width)
values. Program a slightly oversized X and A to ensure complete facing
of the surface.
At the end of the cycle, the tool rapids to H, then rapids back to D and E
(start position).

5-32 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Refer to Figure 7-5, Face Mill Cycle Screen. Table 5-23 describes the
FACE MILL entry fields.
Table 5-23, G170 Address Words
Address
Label Word Description
Length X X-axis length to be faced. (Required)
Width Y Y-axis length to be faced. (Required)
StartHgt H The Absolute Z position before beginning the facing
cycle. This must be 0.1 inch (or 2 mm) above the
surface. Executed in rapid. (Required)
ZDepth Z Absolute depth of the finished surface. (Required)
NOTE: ZDepth must be lower than StartHgt. StartHgt
is 0.1 inch (2.0 mm) above the work surface.
XStepOver A Width of cut in the X-axis direction. When you do not
enter a value, the CNC defaults to 70% of the active tool
radius. Maximum step-over permitted is 70% of the
active tool radius.
YStepOver B Width of cut in the Y-axis direction. When you do not
enter a value, the CNC defaults to 70% of the active tool
radius. Maximum stepover permitted is 70% of the active
tool radius.
Feed F Feedrate used in cycle.
XStart D X coordinate of the starting point. Defaults to current
position.
NOTE: Type the required absolute XStart and YStart
coordinates when possible.
YStart E Y coordinate of the starting point. Defaults to current
position.
NOTE: Type the required absolute XStart and YStart
coordinates when possible.

NOTE: Enter either an XStepover or YStepover. Do not enter both.

NOTE: The Program Editor allows you to inadvertently write a block

containing a stepover value greater than 70% of the active tool
radius. Test a program in the Draw Graphics Mode to reveal
this type of error.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-33

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Circular Profile Cycle (G171)

Format: G171 Xn Yn Hn Dn Zn An Rn Bn Sn In Jn Kn Pn
The Circular Profile Cycle cleans up the inside or outside profile of an
existing circle.
When executed, the CNC rapids to Ramp#1 starting position, rapids to
H (StartHgt), then feeds to the depth of the first cut.
The machine feeds into the profile along Ramp #1, cuts the circle to the
specified D (Diameter) then ramps away from the work along Ramp #2.
When cutting an outside profile, the tool ramps into the work along Ramp
#1 and away from the work along Ramp #2 as illustrated in
Figure 5-14.
Di amet er Di amet er

2
1
X, Y X, Y

1 2

Ramp Ramp
Inside Outside

Figure 5-14, Ramp Position for Inside and Outside Profile

The Circular Profile Cycle automatically compensates for tool diameter.

Activate the correct tool diameter before the G171 block.

Refer to Figure 7-6, Circular Profile Cycle Screen. Table 5-24

describes the CIRCULAR PROFILE entry fields.
Table 5-24, G171 Address Words
Address
Label Word Description
StartHgt H Z absolute starting (rapid) height (must be 0.1 inch or 2
mm above surface to be cut into). Executed in rapid.
Required.
ZDepth Z Absolute depth of the finished profile. Required.
Diameter D Finished diameter of circle. If you enter a negative value,
both the direction of cut and the starting and endpoints
reverse. Required.
Ramp R Ramp distance used for each pass. Required.
(Continued…)

5-34 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-24, G171 Address Words (Continued)

Address
Label Word Description
XCenter X X coordinate of the center. Default: Present position.
YCenter Y Y coordinate of the center. Default: Present position.
DepthCut B Z-axis increment used for each pass
ZFeed I Z-axis feedrate
RoughFeed J Rough-pass feedrate
FinFeed K Finish-pass feedrate
FinStock S Amount of stock left by the machine before the finish
pass. Default: 0. Enter a negative value to leave the
stock without making a finish pass.
Side A Setting for cutting on the inside of the profile (In) or the
outside (Out). Selection required. 0=In, 1=Out.
RetractHgt P Retract height

If you enter a Depth Cut = B (DepthCut), the CNC executes the

number of passes required to get from the H (StartHgt) to Z (ZDepth),
cutting to the Depth Cut = B (Z Max.cut) on each pass.
When you enter an S (FinStock) value, the CNC leaves the specified
stock on the profile and depth for a finish pass. The CNC finishes to
the entered diameter on the finish pass. Enter a negative S
(FinStock) to leave the finish stock without making a finish pass.

If you do not enter a J (RoughFeed) or K (FinFeed) value, the CNC

executes feed moves at the current feedrate. J controls feedrate of the
roughing cycle. K controls the feedrate of the finishing cycle.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-35

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Rectangular Profile Cycle (G172)

Format: G172 Mn Wn Hn Zn Rn An Xn Yn Un In Jn Kn Bn Sn Pn
The Rectangular Profile Cycle cleans up the inside or outside profile of a
rectangle. When run, the CNC rapids to the Ramp #1 starting position,
rapids to H (Z StartHgt), and then feeds to the depth of the first cut.
The machine feeds into the profile along Ramp #1, cuts the rectangle to
the M (Length) and W (Width) specified then ramps away from the work
along Ramp #2.
When cutting an inside profile, the Graphic Menu displays ramp moves.
When cutting an outside profile, the tool ramps into the profile along
Ramp #1 and away from the profile along Ramp #2, as illustrated in
Figure 5-15.
L en gt h Len g t h

2
1

X, Y X, Y
Wi d t h Wi d t h

Rad i u s 1 Radi u s
2

Ramp Ramp
Inside Outside

Figure 5-15, Inside and Outside Profile Ramp Moves

The Rectangular Profile Cycle automatically compensates for tool

diameter. Activate the correct tool diameter before the G172 block.
Refer to Figure 7-7, Rectangular Profile Cycle Screen. Refer to
Table 5-25.
Table 5-25, G172 Address Words
Address
Label Word Description
Length M Finished length of rectangle (Required)
Width W Finished width of rectangle (Required)
StartHgt H The Absolute Z position before beginning to mill the
pocket. This must be 0.1 inch (or 2 mm) above the surface.
(Required)
ZDepth Z Absolute depth of the finished profile (Required)
Ramp R Radius of the ramping moves (Required)
Side A Setting for cutting on the inside of the profile (In) or the
outside (Out). (Required) 0=Inside, 1=Outside
(Continued…)

5-36 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-25, G172 Address Words (Continued)

Address
Label Word Description
XCenter X X coordinate of the center. If no coordinate is entered,
the CNC centers the profile at its present position.
YCenter Y Y coordinate of the center. If no coordinate is entered,
the CNC centers the profile at its present position.
CornerRad U Corner radius setting. If the programmer enters a
negative value, both direction of cut and the starting and
endpoints reverse.
ZFeed I Z-axis feedrate
RoughFeed J Rough-pass feedrate
FinFeed K Finish-pass feedrate
DepthCut B Maximum Z-axis increment used for each pass.
FinStock S Amount of stock left by the machine before the finish
pass. Default: 0. If the programmer enters a negative
value, the CNC leaves the stock without making a finish
pass.
RetractHgt P Retract Height

When you enter a value, the CNC executes the number of passes
required to get from the H (StartHgt) to the Z (ZDepth), cutting the B
(DepthCut) on each pass.
When you enter an S (FinStock) value, the CNC leaves the specified
stock on the profile and depth for a finish pass. The CNC cuts the
rectangle to the M (Length), W (Width), and Z (ZDepth) dimensions on
the finish pass. Enter a negative S (FinStock) to leave the finish stock
without making a finish pass.
When you do not enter a J (RoughFeed) or K (FinFeed), the CNC
executes feed moves at the current feedrate. J (RoughFeed) controls
the feedrate of the roughing cycle. K (FinFeed) controls the feedrate of
the finishing cycle.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-37

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Mill Cycle (G175)

Format: G175 Xn Yn Hn Zn Bn Dn In Jn Kn Sn
The Mill Cycle (G175) is intended for contour milling operations. Cutter
compensation, Z pecking, Z finish stock, RoughFeed, and FinishFeed are
supported. The cycle rapids to the XY start point (compensated, if
ToolComp “D” parameter is used) rapid to the start height and then feed
to the ZDepth (Z) or DepthCut (B) using the ZFeed (I). Subsequent
milling blocks are then executed using the ToolComp (D) parameter and
Feed specified. The feedrate can be changed in the blocks that are being
milled. Cutter Compensation cannot be changed from within the cycle.
The cycle is terminated with the EndMill (G176) block; at which point, it
rapids up to the StartHgt (H) and returns to the un-comped XStart (X)
YStart (Y) location. Activate a tool prior to G175 so the CNC knows the
tool diameter.

NOTE: If the “D” parameter is used for cutter compensation, the lines of
code in the mill cycle must start with an uncompensated ramp-
on move and end with an uncompensated ramp-off move as the
first and last lines in the mill cycle are not automatically
compensated by the cycle.
Refer to Figure 7-8, Mill Cycle Screen. Refer to Table 5-26.
Table 5-26, G175 Address Words
Address
Label Word Description
XStart X X coordinate of the center. If no coordinate is provided,
default is set to the present position. (Uncompensated)
(Required)

YStart Y Y coordinate of the center. If no coordinate is provided,

default is set to present position. (Uncompensated)
(Required)

StartHgt H Absolute Z position to which the CNC rapids before feeding

into the workpiece. (Required)

ZDepth Z The absolute depth of the finished pocket. (Required)

DepthCut B Z-axis increment used for each pass.

ToolComp D Tool Compensation. Use 41 or 42 only. All other numbers

are no compensation.
41 Compensation LEFT
42 Compensation RIGHT

ZFeed I Z-axis feedrate (plunging feedrate)

RoughFeed J XY axes roughing feedrate. Defaults to last programmed

feedrate.

5-38 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-26, G175 Address Words (Continued)

Address
Label Word Description
FinFeed K XY axes finish feedrate. Defaults to last programmed
feedrate.
FinStock S Finish-stock amount per side (including bottom). If you
enter a negative value, stock is left, but no finish pass
occurs. If not programmed, no finish stock is left.

In G-Code, the mill cycle starts with G175 and ends with G176 as in the
example below.
G70 G90 G0 G17
M5
G28 Z0
G120 X.1 Y1.1 Z.0 I-1.1 J-.1 K-.25
T1 M6
G90 G0 X-.5 Y.5
G175 X-.5 Y.5 H.1 Z-.25 B.125 D41 I25 J35 K45 S.01
G91 G1 X-.5
Y-.5
X1
Y1
X-1
Y-.5
G176 X-.5 Y.5
G90 G0 Z1
X0 Y0
M2
EndMill Cycle (G176)
Format: G176 Xn Yn

The mill cycle is terminated with the EndMill (G176) block; at which point,
it rapids up to the StartHgt and returns to the uncompensated X and Y
location. Refer to Figure 7-9, EndMill Cycle Screen. Refer to
Table 5-27.

Table 5-27, G176 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
X X X ending point. Default: Path ends at the starting point.
(Uncompensated)

Y Y Y ending point. Default: Path ends at the starting point.

(Uncompensated)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-39

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Thread Mill Cycle (G181)

Format: G181 Zn Hn Pn Dn Cn Bn Xn Yn Rn Sn Jn Kn En

WARNING: The first move in this cycle is a rapid move to the center
of the thread before moving the Z axis. Make sure the tool is
properly located before calling up this cycle.
Use the thread milling for cutting inside or outside threads. It cuts either
Inch or MM, left or right hand, and Z movement up or down. A single
tooth or multi-toothed tool may be used. Start can be at the top or bottom
of the hole or boss. The tools are set, as you would normally set TLO.
Programming the Thread Mill Cycle
To program the Thread Mill Cycle:

1. In Edit mode, press Help (F1), then select THREAD MILL CYCLE
display the G181 Thread Mill Cycle menu (refer to Figure 7-10,
Thread Mill Cycle Screen).
2. Complete the entry fields (refer to Table 5-28), and press USE (F10).

Table 5-28 describes the Thread Mill Cycle entry fields.

Table 5-28, G181 Address Words
Address
Label Word Description
ZFinish Z Absolute Z position where the thread cut will finish. This can be
above or below the start position depending on the direction of the
thread cut: up or down. (Required)
ZStart H Absolute Z position where the thread cut starts. This can be
above or below the finish position depending on the direction of
the thread cut, up or down. If not set, cycle uses the current Z
tool position. (Required)
ZSafePosn P An Absolute safe Z position above the part for rapid moves in X
and/or Y. (Required)
WARNING: P must be above the part to avoid a crash while
positioning.
MajorDia D Major thread Diameter. If this is a tapered thread, it is the major
diameter at the Z start position. Hence, if you have a tapered
hole and you start at the top and cut down, you would have a
different major diameter than if you started at the bottom and cut
up. A plus (+) value cuts in the CW direction and a minus (-)
value cuts in the CCW direction. (Required)
ThdDepth C Depth of thread. The incremental depth of thread on one side. A
plus (+) value is inside thread, a minus (-) value is outside thread.
(Required)
(Continued…)

5-40 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-28, G181 Address Words (Continued)

Address
Label Word Description
TPIor Lead B Threads per inch (TPI) or lead of thread in MM. (Required)
NOTE: The minimum number of threads per inch is “1”.
XCenter X Absolute X coordinate of the center of the thread. If no coordinate
is entered, the CNC puts the center of thread at the current tool
position.
YCenter Y Absolute Y coordinate of the center of the thread. If no coordinate
is entered, the CNC puts the center of thread at the current tool
position.
ArcInRad R Size of radius arcing into start of thread.
NOTE: If R is a positive value or not set and the thread is
“inside”, the cycle always returns to the center between passes.
If R is a negative value, the cutter moves to the start or end point
that is closest to the center if inside thread, and farthest away
from center if outside thread.
If R is not specified at all and the thread is outside, the cutter
backs away from the largest diameter by an amount equal to the
thread depth.
StockAmt S Amount to leave for a finish pass after the roughing passes.
RoughFeed J Feedrate for roughing. (If not set (blank), the cycle uses the
current active feedrate.)
FinFeed K Feedrate for the finish pass. (If not set (blank), the cycle uses the
current active feedrate.)
Passes E Number of roughing cuts to be taken.
NOTE: If Stock is not set or set to zero and E is 1 or 0, the cycle
makes just one pass at the full depth.
If Stock is set to greater than zero and E is 1 or 0, the cycle
makes one pass at the stock depth and one pass at full thread
depth.
NOTE: If you would like all non-cutting positioning moves to be
rapid, set E to a negative number.

Tool Length Offset is set the same as with any other tool or operation. A
tool diameter also has to be set in the tool table, as cutter compensation
is built into this cycle (cutter compensation is not allowed during the use
of this cycle).

If X (XCenter) and Y (YCenter) are not programmed, position tool center

of the thread before the G181 line:

• X and Y rapids to the starting position of the thread.

• Z rapids to the safe height specified in P (ZSafePosn).

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-41

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

• The Z-axis feeds down to the start cut position H (ZStart). This could
be above or below the Z position specified in the Z (ZFinish) finish
position.
• Depending on what is in the R (ArcInRad) parameter the tool arcs
into the first cut position.
• Spiral up or down, depending on the difference between “Z” and “H”
and go counterclockwise or clockwise depending if D (MajorDia) is
plus or minus.
• Then arc-out and feed to the thread center for inside threads or a safe
distance away from the thread for outside threads depending on the
value in R (ArcInRad).
• Then feed back to the “H” height.
• Then feed X and Y to the next depth of cut. The depth of each
roughing pass is the thread depth specified in the C (ThdDepth)
parameter minus the stock amount specified in the S (StockAmt)
parameter, divided by the number of roughing passes specified in the
E (Passes) parameter.
• The cycle repeats this process until the final finish pass.
• It then cuts the thread at the full thread major diameter.

Sample Thread Mill Cycle Program

1 G0 G90 G70 G17
2 T1 M6
3 S2000 M3
4 X0 Y0
5 G181 Z-1. H0.1 P.5 D1. C.0625 B8. R.1 S.002 E2 J20.0 K5.0
6 Z5
7 M5
8 M2
With a cutter diameter of 0.625, this program cuts a 1-8 inside thread at
X0 Y0. The tool spirals down the thread pitch of 8 threads per inch,
finishing at a depth of –1. The starting height is 0.1, the safe rapid Z
(ZFinish) height is 0.5, the major thread diameter is 1 inch, and depth of
thread is 0.0625. The arc-in radius is 0.1 and the stock amount for the
finish pass is 0.002. The rough feedrate is 20.0 and the finish feedrate is
5.0.

NOTE: If you would like all non-cutting positioning moves to be rapid,

set E (Passes) to a negative number. The idea is to initially set
“E” as a positive number and after proving out the program,
change “E” to a negative number for faster production. If you
only need one pass to size and you want the positioning moves
to be rapid, set “E” to -1.

5-42 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Plunge Circular Pocket Cycle (G177)

Format: G177 Zn Hn Dn Xn Yn Bn In Jn Kn Sn Pn An
Use the plunge circular pocket cycle (G177) for carbide tooling, when a
multiple-axis ramp-in move is not possible. The Z-axis plunges (single-
axis) to programmed depths. You must drill a start hole prior to using this
cycle. Activate the tool prior to G177 so that tool diameter is known. The
tool is not required to be at the center of the pocket, as the cycle has
variable words for X and Y center. If you do not program X and Y
variable words with G177, then the CNC uses the current position as the
pocket center. Refer to Figure 7-15, Plunge Circ Pocket Cycle Screen.
Refer to Table 5-29.

Table 5-29, G177 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
Z Depth (abs) Z Absolute depth of pocket (Required)
Z Start Height H The Absolute Z position before beginning to mill the pocket.
This must be 0.1 inch (or 2 mm) above the surface.
Executed in rapid. (Required)
Diameter D Diameter of pocket:
+D dimension = climb (CCW)
-D dimension = conventional (CW)
(Required)
Center X X Center of the pocket in X-axis. Defaults to current position.
Center Y Y Center of the pocket in Y-axis. Defaults to current position.
Z Max Cut B Maximum Z depth per pass (For example, if Z = -1, and
B = 0.5, the pocket is roughed out in two levels.) B is
positive. Defaults to tool diameter (depth), less finish stock.
Z Feed Rate I Z feedrate for plunge move. The tool feeds to the first depth
of cut with a plunge move. Defaults to last programmed
feedrate.
RoughFeed J Feedrate of rough cycle used to mill out the pocket.
Defaults to last programmed feedrate.
Finish Feed K Finish-pass feedrate. Defaults to last programmed feedrate.
Finish Stock S Finish stock amount per side (including bottom). Positive =
leave stock and execute finish pass. Negative = leave stock
without executing a finish pass. If no value is given, no
finish stock is left.
Retract Height P Z-axis absolute-retract height (must be equal to or above H).
Executed in rapid. Defaults to H (Z Start Height) value.
Stepover A Maximum tool stepover (must be less than tool diameter).
Defaults to tool radius. (If not set, uses 0.5 diameter of the
active tool.)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-43

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

You must position the start hole at the center of the pocket prior to G177
and drill to a sufficient depth.
The required position of the start hole is as follows:
1. For inward to outward cutting (+A) (Stepover): at the hole center.
2. For outward to inward cutting (-A): start hole must be at the 3 o'clock
position on the pocket perimeter, less finish stock, less tool radius.
3. Drilled to a sufficient depth.
4. The axes must be positioned over the start hole prior to programming
this cycle.
5. If you position the tool at the pocket center and omit XY words from
G177 block, the CNC uses current position as pocket center.
Plunge Rectangular Pocket (G178)
Format: G178 Mn Wn Hn Zn Xn Yn Bn In Jn Kn Sn Pn An Un

Use the plunge rectangular pocket cycle (G178) for carbide tooling, where
a multiple-axis ramp-in move is not possible. The Z-axis plunges (single-
axis) to the programmed depth. You must drill a start hole previous to the
G178 cycle. Activate a tool prior to programming G178, so cutter
diameter is known. Position the tool at the center of the pocket prior to
G178, or use the X and Y words. Refer to Figure 7-16, Plunge Rect
Pocket Screen. Refer to Table 5-30.

Table 5-30, G178 Address Word

Address
Label Word Description
Length M Length of pocket in X-axis (Required)
Width W Width of pocket in Y-axis (Required)
Z Start Height H Z absolute starting (rapid) height (0.1 inch or 2 mm above
surface). Required. Executed in rapid. (Required)
Z Depth (abs) Z Absolute depth of pocket (Required)
Center X X X center of pocket.
Center Y Y Y center of pocket.
Z Max Cut B Maximum Z depth per pass. (For example, if you program
Z to be -1, and B to be .5, the CNC roughs out the pocket in
two levels.) B is positive. Defaults to tool diameter (depth),
less finish stock.
Ramp Feed I Z Plunge feed. The tool plunges to the first depth of cut
with a single-axis Z move from the centerline of the lower-
left radius. Defaults to last programmed feedrate.
Rough Feed J After the plunge move, the tool rough mills the pocket, at
feedrate J. Defaults to last programmed feedrate.
(Continued…)

5-44 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-30, G178 Address Word (Continued)

Address
Label Word Description
Finish Feed K Finish-pass feedrate. Defaults to last programmed
feedrate.
Finish Stock S Finish stock amount per side (including bottom).
Negative = stock is left, but no finish pass occurs.
Positive = leave stock and execute finish pass. If not
programmed, no finish stock is left.
Retract P Z-axis absolute finish height (must be equal to or above H).
Height Defaults to H (Z Start Height value). Executed in rapid.
WARNING: When you cut a pocket inside another
pocket, you must set P above the highest pocket. At
the end of each pocket, the tool rapids to P, then
rapids to the start position.
Stepover A Maximum tool stepover (must be 70% or less of tool
diameter). Positive = CCW. Negative = CW. Defaults to
half tool diameter.
Corner U Actual corner radius of pocket (all four corners). Must be
Radius equal or greater than tool radius. Defaults to tool radius.

You must position the start hole at the center of the pocket prior to G178
and drill to a sufficient depth.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-45

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Slot Cycle (G210)

Format: G210 Mn Wn Hn Zn An Bn Cn Xn Yn Sn In Jn Kn Pn

Use the Slot Cycle (G210) to mill a slot.

A slot is defined by a center (X,Y), length, width, and depth. Refer to
Figure 5-16.
Length

(Xcenter,Ycenter)
Width

Figure 5-16, Slot CycleDefinition

If X and Y variable words are not programmed, the CNC will use the
current position as the slot center. The tool needs to be positioned at the
center of the slot.
The XY plane must be selected prior to the G210 block; otherwise, an
error is displayed.
Activate a tool prior to programming G210 so that the CNC will know the
cutter diameter. Refer to Figure 7-17, Slot Cycle Screen. Refer to
Table 5- 31.

Table 5-31, G210 Address Word

Address
Label Word Description
Length M Length of the slot in X-axis (Required)
Width W Width of the slot in Y-axis (Required)
StartHgt H The Absolute Z position before beginning to mill the slot.
This must be 0.1 inch (or 2 mm) above the surface.
(Required)
ZDepth Z Absolute depth of the slot. Must be below StartHgt (H).
(Required)
(Continued…)

5-46 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-31, G210 Address Word (Continued)

Address
Label Word Description
StepOver A Maximum tool step over (must be 50% or less of tool
diameter). The distance the tool will step over (width of cut)
as it mills out the slot. The step over selected may need to
be adjusted to ensure that excessive stock is not left in the
middle of the slot. (Optional)
NOTE: The CNC will default to 0.5 of the cutter diameter if
StepOver = 0.000 or is not specified.
DepthCut B Z-axis increment used for each pass.
B is programmed as a positive dimension.
Defaults to ZDepth less finish stock. (Optional)
Angle C The angle in degrees by which the slot is rotated. The
center of rotation lies in the center of the slot.
Default is 0 degrees. (Optional)
XCenter X Center of slot in X-axis.
Default: Current X position. (Optional)
YCenter Y Center of slot in Y-axis.
Default: Current Y position. (Optional)
FinStock S Finish-stock amount per side and bottom of slot. If not
programmed, no finish stock is left.
Default: No finish pass. (Optional)
ZFeed I Z-axis feed rate (plunging federate).
Default: Current Z-axis feed rate. (Optional)
RoughFeed J Rough-pass feed rate.
Default: Current feed rate. (Optional)
FinFeed K Finish-pass feed rate. If negative, the finish pass will climb
mill (CW). If 0, material will be left, but no finish pass will
occur. Defaults to last programmed feed rate. (Optional)
RetractHgt P Z-axis absolute retract height (must be equal to or above
H.) Executed in rapid.
Defaults to StartHgt (H) value. (Optional)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-47

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Circular Slot Cycle (G211)

Format: G211Dn En Fn Wn Hn Zn An Bn Xn Yn Sn In Jn Kn Pn

Use the circular slot cycle (G211) to mill a slot along a circular path. You
must position the tool directly over the circle center prior to the G211
block, or use the X and Y words. Refer to Figure 7-18, Circular Slot
Cycle Screen. Refer to Table 5-32.

Activate a tool prior to programming G211, so cutter diameter is known.

Table 5-32, G211 Address Word

Address
Label Word Description
Diameter D Diameter of the slot circle. The diameter must be larger
than the slot width. (Required)
StartAngle E The angle in degrees to the slot’s first end. (Required)
SweepAngle F Sweep angle of the slot measured in degrees between the
two ends. SweepAngle (F) is applied CCW from
StartAngle (E) regardless of the sign of its value. Must be
non-zero. (Required)
Width W Width of the slot (Required)
StartHgt H The Absolute Z position before beginning to mill the slot.
This must be 0.1 inch (or 2 mm) above the surface.
(Required)
ZDepth Z Absolute depth of the slot. Must be below StartHgt (H).
(Required)
StepOver A Maximum tool step over in the XY plane. Must be 50% or
less of the tool diameter. The distance the tool will step
over (width of cut) as it mills out the slot.
Default: 50% of tool diameter. (Optional).
DepthCut B Maximum Z depth per pass the CNC will cut while roughing.
Defaults to ZDepth less finish stock. (Optional)
XCenter X Center of the slot circle.
Default: Current X position. (Optional)
YCenter Y Center of the slot circle.
Default: Current Y position. (Optional)
FinStock S Finish–stock amount per side and bottom.
Default: No finish stock. (Optional)
ZFeed I Z-axis feed rate while plunging.
Default: Current Z-axis feed rate. (Optional)
RoughFeed J Rough-pass feed rate.
Default: Current feed rate. (Optional)
FinFeed K Finish-pass feed rate. If negative, the finish pass will also
climb mill (CW). If zero, the finish stock will not be
removed. (Optional)

5-48 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-32, G211 Address Word (Continued)

Address
Label Word Description
RetractHgt P Z-axis absolute retract height. Default: StartHgt (H).
(Optional)

Example:
G211 D8 E45 F90 W2.5 H.1 Z-0.75 X0 Y0

NOTE: If you do not use X and Y words, you must position the tool at the
center of the slot circle before the G211 block.

The tool will perform the following operations:

1. Tool moves to an XY location above the slot.
2. Tool feeds -.1” (2 mm) to meet the part surface.
3. Tool moves in Z to the first roughing depth at feedrate I.

4. Tool mills out the circular slot with arcs using feedrate J, until first
level is completed (less finish stock).
5. Tool repeats this process, if necessary, to achieve full depth (less
finish stock).
6. Optional finish pass is made in the same manner at feedrate K.
7. When the slot is complete, tool rapids to P.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-49

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Engrave Cycle (G190)

Format: G190 A(“Text”) Hn Zn En Xn Yn Cn Un Vn Fn
The Engraving cycle provides a quick and easy way to engrave part
numbers, legends, or any alpha/numeric inscription. The usual type of
cutter is a sharp point or center-drill type tool. Options are given for
engraving on an angle and mirror is supported for engraving molds.
When executed, the CNC rapids to the start point, then to the StartHgt
(the “H” parameter). It then feeds to the ZDepth (the “Z” parameter)
specified and begins cutting the Text selected.
Programming the Engrave Cycle
To program the Engrave Cycle:

1. In Edit mode, press Help (F1), then select G190 Engrave Cycle and
press ENTER to display the G190 Engrave Cycle menu (refer to
Figure 7-11, Engrave Cycle Screen).
2. Complete the entry fields (refer to Table 5-33), and press USE (F10).

Table 5-33, G190 Address Word

Address
Label Word Description
Text A When the cursor is on Text (the “A” parameter), it displays
an entry field for the letters to be engraved. Letters A – Z,
numbers 0 – 9, and: space, ampersand, plus, minus,
comma, period, and slash right are supported. No lower
case letters are allowed. Press ENTER to accept the text.
(Required) (maximum 80 characters)
StartHgt H Z absolute start height. Must be higher than ZDepth (the
“Z” parameter). (Required)
ZDepth Z Z absolute depth of engraving. Must be below StartHgt
(the “H” parameter). (Required)
Height E Letter height. Width is proportional to height. Height is
measured at the centerline of the cutter. (Required)
XStart X X coordinate for lower-left corner of the text. Defaults to
current position if not given. (Optional)
YStart Y Y coordinate for lower-left corner of the text. Defaults to
current position if not given. (Optional)
Angle C Angle in degrees. Default is 0 degrees. (Optional)
MirrorX U Mirrors all X moves. Set by using minus key (-) while in this
field. (Optional)
MirrorY V Mirrors all Y moves. Set by using minus key (-) while in this
field. (Optional)
Feed F Feedrate used while engraving. Default is current feedrate.
(Optional)

5-50 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Sample Engrave Cycle Program

1 G90 G70
2 G0 X0 Y0
3 T1
4 X1.0 Y1.0
5 Z0.1
6 G190 A("ABCD") H 0.1 Z-.01 E0.5
7 G0 Z1.0
8 X0 Y0
9 M2

This program rapids to X1.0 Y1.0. Z rapids to 0.1 and the letters ABCD
are engraved 0.0100” deep and 0.500” high.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-51

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Subprograms
Program repetitive sequences or patterns in a subprogram. Enter
subprograms in the program after the end of the main program. Call
subprograms from the main program. Refer to Table 5-34.
Table 5-34, Subprogram Addresses
M98 Pn Jump to subprogram.
M99 Return to main program.
Oxxxx Subprogram label. Up to 4 digits.
Pn Subprogram number to jump to.
A subprogram can use any code or move type. For example, to cut a
contour twice (one rough pass and one finish pass), program it as a
subprogram. You can call the subprogram from the main program as
many times as required, but you enter the parameters only once.
Subprogram(s) must be stored in the same file as the main program that
calls them.
The following topics are described:

‰ Subprogram Addresses
‰ Repetition of Subprogram (Loop)
‰ Calling a Subprogram from a Subprogram
‰ End of Subprogram (M99) with a P-Code
‰ Subprogram for Multiple Parts Programming
‰ Loop Function

5-52 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Subprogram Addresses
Examples:
M98 P2000 commands a jump to subprogram O2000.
Following the program number, blocks in a subprogram are numbered as
in normal programming, as in the following example:
N2000 O2000 * SUBPROGRAM #2000
N2001 * blocks in program
N2002
N2003 etc.
You can store subprograms anywhere in the program after the main
program. They do not have to be entered in numerical order or begin on
any specific block number. Refer to Table 5-35.
Table 5-35, Subprogram Called from a Main Program
Main Program
N1 O3 *SUB-EX1
N2
N3 M98 P100 Jump to N67 to execute subprogram 100.
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8 M02
Subprogram
N67 O100 CNC jumps to here at N3, completes subprogram
until it reaches M99 (N71), and then returns to the
main program at N4.
N68
N69
N70
N71 M99

Repetition of Subprogram (Loop)

Format: M98 Pxxx Lxx

L is the number of repetitions of the subprogram.

Example:
M98 P2000 L12

The block commands twelve repetitions of subprogram number 2000.

The maximum number of repetitions is 9999.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-53

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Calling a Subprogram from a Subprogram

Calling a subprogram from another subprogram is referred to as nesting.
The maximum number of programs that can be nested is ten.
The method of calling an additional subprogram is similar to calling the
first. Refer to Table 5-36.

Table 5-36, Nesting Subprograms

Flow of Program
Main Program During Call of Additional Subprogram
N1 O9 *SUB-EX2
N2
N3
N4 M98 P101 Jump to 1st subprogram N501 from main program at
N4.
N5 Return from 1st subprogram.
N6
N7
N8 M02 Return to N1 after all subprograms are complete.
1st Subprogram
N501 O101
N502
N503
N504
N505 M98 P200 Jump from 1st subprogram to 2nd subprogram occurs
at N505. Executes N600 to M606 (M99).
N506 Return to N506 after 2nd subprogram is completed
(M99). Finish 1st subprogram.
N507
N508
N509 M99 Return to main program at N5.
2nd Subprogram
N600 O200
N601
N602
N603
N604
N605
N606 M99 Jump to N506.

5-54 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Example:
Mill out a series of identical slots in a plate. Each slot is 1/2" wide and
0.3750" deep. Slot 1 is programmed in a subprogram. All XY dimensions
are incremental to enable you to position the slot anywhere on the
coordinate system. Refer to Figure 5-17.
1.0 (25.4)

3.5 (88.9)

1.0
(25.4)

Figure 5-17, Subprogram Programming Example

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-55

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

The main program positions the cutter for each slot and calls the
subprogram that mills out the slots. Subprogram O100 uses incremental
values to enable you to position the slot at various positions on the work.
For all three slots, you must position the cutter before you call the
subprogram. Refer to Table 5-37.

Table 5-37, Subprogram Programming Example

Blk # Block Description
N1 O12 *SLOTS-MAIN PROGRAM Define program #12, program name.
N2 G90 G70 (G71) G0 G17 T0 Z0 Set absolute inch, rapid, XY plane,
cancel tool, Z0.
N3 X-2 (X-50) Y2 (Y50) Move to X-2 Y2.
N4 T1 * 1/2" MILL Activate Tool #1.
N5 X1 (X25.4) Y-1 (Y-25.4) Z.1 Move to slot location #1 and call sub.
(Z2.54) M98 P100
N6 Y-2 (Y-50.8) M98 P100 Move to slot 2 and calls sub.
N7 Y-3 (Y-76.2) M98 P100 Move to slot 3 and calls sub.
N8 T0 Z0 Cancel tool offset and raises Z.
N9 X-2 (X50.8) Y2 (Y50.8) Move to X-2 Y2.
N10 M02 End program, reset to N1.
N11
N12 O100 *SLOTS-SUBPROGRAM Define this as program #100, and
gives name.
N13 G90 G1 Z-.375 (Z-9.53) F3.5 (F89) Feed Z to -.3750" in absolute.
N14 G91 X3.5 (X88.9) F10 (F254) Feed X 3.5" incrementally.
N15 G90 G0 Z.1 (Z2) Rapid Z to 0.1" absolute.
N16 G91 X-3.5 (X-88.9) Rapid X-3.5000", return to start point.
N17 G90 M99 Set Absolute Mode, end sub, return
to main.

5-56 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

End of Subprogram (M99) with a P-Code

M99 Pxxx
When the End of Subprogram (M99) command contains a P-Code, the P-
Code refers to the block number in the main program to which the
subprogram returns.
Example:
M99 P70
At N30, the CNC executes the subprogram and then returns to N70
(skipping N40 to N70) in the main program. From N70 it resumes main
program execution.
The subprogram returns the program to N70 of the main program,
skipping N40 through N60. Refer to Table 5-38.

Table 5-38, M99 P-Code Usage

Main Program
N10
N20
N30 M98 P100 Call subprogram.
N40
N50
N60
N70
N80
N90 M2
Subprogram
N110 O100
N120
N130
N140 M99 P70 After complete subprogram, return to N70 in main.

Subprogram for Multiple Parts Programming

To set up a subprogram to machine multiple parts, follow this method.
In this example, a table has two vises installed. Each table holds a part of
identical configuration. The same tool does all the work.
1. Program the machining sequence as a subprogram in Absolute or
Incremental Mode.
2. When the sequence is finished on Part #1, program a coordinate shift
(G92 or G53) and recall the subprogram.
3. If you program the subprogram incrementally, you do not have to shift
the zero point. If programmed in absolute, then use a coordinate
(zero) shift.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-57

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Loop Function
In some cases, it is simpler to command a program block or series of
blocks to loop (repeat), rather than to program the block(s) several times.
Format: N680 LOOP nnnn
N685 .
.
.
N695 END
LOOP instructs the CNC to execute the blocks following block N680 until
END. The block is repeated nnnn times. Subprogram calls, axes moves,
M-Codes, etc. are all available within a "loop".

Each LOOP must have an END. Nesting loops (one loop inside of
another) is possible, to 10 levels deep.

The full body of the LOOP command (LOOP to END) must be contained
in the main program or the subprogram in which it was initiated.
Example:
In the following program example, M and S codes are omitted. The
program assumes that a manual tool change machine is used (no ATC).
Check your machine tool manual for details on programming M, S, and T
codes. Refer to Figure 5-18 and Table 5-39, Loop Programming
Example.
Tooling to be used:
Tool 1 = #4 centerdrill
Tool 2 = 1/4" diameter twist drill
Tool 3 = 3/8" diameter end mill

2.0" 8.0"
.75" (19.05mm) Typ.
(50.8mm) (203.2mm)
X0Y0 .50" (12.7mm)

.25" (6.35mm)
2.5" Dia. 7.5"
6 pos. (190.5mm)
(63.5mm)

3.0"
5.0" (76.2mm)
(127mm)

SUBPR_EX2
R=5.0"
(127mm)
90 deg.

Figure 5-18, Loop Programming Example

5-58 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-39, Loop Programming Example

Blk. # Block Description
N1 O100 * EXAMPLE Program name and number.
N2 G90 G70 (G71) G0 T0 Z0 Set modes. Cancel tool. Rapid to
Z0.
N3 X-2 (X-50) Y2 (Y50) Rapid to tool change position.
N4 T1 * #4 CTR-DRL (6.35 Activate tool 1, centerdrill.
CTR-DRL)
N5 G81 Z-.23 (Z-.5.84) R.1 (R2) Activate spot drill cycle 1.
F8 (F203)
N6 M98 P1 Call subprogram 1.
N7 T2 * 1/4" DRL (* 6.35 DRILL) Activate tool 2, twist drill.
N8 G83 Z-.45 (Z-11.43) R.1 (R2) Activate peck drill cycle.
F10 (F254) I.15 (I3.81)
N9 M98 P1 Call subprogram 1.
N10 T3 * 3/8" MILL (* 9.525 Activate tool 3, end mill.
MILL)
N11 G41 X-.3 (X-76.2) Y0 Activate cutter compensation.
Feed to XY position.
N12 Z.1 (Z2) Retract move in Z.
N13 G1 Z-.38 (Z-9.65) F13 (F330) Feed to cutting depth.
N14 X8 (X203.2) Cut top of part.
N15 X7.5 (X190.5) Y-2.5 (Y-63.5) Cut right side of part (vectored
path).
N16 G3 X7 (X177.8) Y-3 (Y-76.2) Activate circular interpolation.
I0 J-.5 (J-12.7) Make arc move.
N17 G1 X5 (X127) Feed to X position (bottom of
part).
N18 X0 Y-2.5 (Y-63.5) Return to start position (cut left
side of part).
N19 Y.3 (Y8) Move off part in Y.
N20 G0 Z.1 (Z2) Retract move in Z.
N21 G40 X-.3 (X-8) Cancel cutter compensation.
N22 T0 Z0 Cancel tool offsets and tools.
Retract to Z home.
N23 X-2 (X-50) Y2 (Y50) Move off in X.
N24 M2 End Main.
N25
N26
N27 O1 * HOLE LOCATIONS Subprogram.
SUB.
(Continued…)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-59

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-39, Loop Programming Example (Continued)

Blk. # Block Description
N28 G90 G0 X2 (X50.80) Y-.5 9Y- Activate Absolute and Rapid
12.7) Modes. Move to first hole
location.
N29 LOOP 5 Repeat following moves 5 times.
N30 G91 X.75 (X19.05) Distance between holes.
N31 END End of loop.
N32 G80 G90 T0 Z0 Cancel drill cycle. Activate
Absolute, Raise Z.
N33 X-2 (X-50) Y2 (Y50) Rapid to tool change position.
N34 M99 Return to main program.

5-60 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Probing Cycles
This section describes operation and an overview of the tool and spindle
probe canned cycles available on the 6000i CNC products. The cycles
provided perform the most common tool and spindle probing functions.
Custom cycles to perform specific functions can be written using the G31
primitive and parametric programming. Refer to “Section 4, Probe Move
(G31)” for more details. If Probing has been added post-sale, beside
Machine Parameter changes, there may be Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC) program modifications required.
The tool probe cycles are only supported on machines with automatic
spindle forward/reverse and spindle speed, and homing with a permanent
X, Y, and Z machine position. The method described assumes the use of
negative tool-length offsets. In this method, the Tool-Length Offset (TLO)
in the length column for each tool represents the distance from the tool tip
at machine home to top of work piece and is a negative number. This
method does not require the use of any Z work coordinate offset to be
active. This procedure finds the effective tool diameter by turning the
spindle on in reverse and touching two sides of the probe stylus, then
storing the tool’s diameter in the tool’s diameter offset table.
The spindle probing cycles are designed to assist in part setup. Using
these cycles, one or more features (edges) of a part can be measured.
Using the data obtained with these measurements, calculations are made
that can be used to set a given fixture offset. It is also possible to find the
orientation angle of a part so as to not always have to align the part
exactly.
Tool and spindle probing does not allow rotation, scaling, and mirroring.
Plane is set to XY G17 when these cycles are complete.
The following topics are described:

‰ Tool Probe Cycles

‰ Spindle Probe Cycle

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-61

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Tool Probe Cycles

Before using your tool probe and tool probe cycles, you must setup the
probe following the probe manufacturer’s specifications.
This section covers the following topics:

‰ Tool Probe G-Code Cycle Designations

‰ Description of Tool Probe Cycles
For probing system parameter setup information, refer to the 6000i CNC
Technical Manual, P/N 627787-21.
The tool probe updates the tool registers only. If you are going to use the
tool being measured after the probing cycle, you must recall that tool for
the new offsets to be active.
For tool probing, Tool-Length Offset (TLO) is the distance from machine
home to top of work piece or wherever you wish to set your part Z zero or
if used in conjunction with a Z axis work offset, a fixed surface on the
machine.
Before starting to set your tools, you must calibrate the probe. Once the
probe has been calibrated, calibration does not have to be done again
unless you remove the probe or replace the stylus.
Recalibration may also be required if the Z location of the top of the part
changes, and is not compensated by a Z work offset shift.

Tool Probe G-Code Cycle Designations

The following summarizes the cycles available:

G150 Tool Probe Calibration Cycle

This is used to set the Z datum for length preset, the effective
probe stylus diameter for setting tool diameter registers, and
establishes the center of the probe stylus.
NOTE: Calibration must be done at least once before using the
tool probe. Once the probe has been calibrated,
calibration does not need to be done again unless the
probe is moved or a new part is being setup. The cycle
must always know the relationship between the top of
the part and the top of the probe to set the TLO.

G151 Tool Length and Diameter Offset Preset

Updates length and diameter tool registers.
NOTE: If the tool has a hole on the bottom so that the probe
would fall between the tool teeth, do not use this cycle.
Damage to the probe could result. In this case, use
G152 for manual length preset or G153 for manual
diameter preset.

5-62 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

G152 Manual Tool-Length Offset Preset

Updates tool-length register. To be used for large face mill style
tools or shell mill tools that have a hole in the center of the
bottom of the tool.

G153 Manual Tool Diameter Preset

Updates tool diameter register for irregular shaped tools or tools
with a hole in the center of the bottom.
G154 Tool Breakage, Length and Diameter Wear Detection
Checks the tool and gives an alarm if not within tolerance.
Length and Diameter Wear – Check the Length and/or Diameter
and updates the Length and/or Diameter wear registers up to a
user-defined limit. Once the user-defined limit has been
reached, the cycle gives an alarm and the program stops.

Description of Tool Probe Cycles

This section contains detailed descriptions of the tool probe cycles:

‰ Tool Probe Calibration Cycle (G150)

‰ Tool Length and Diameter Offset Preset (G151)
‰ Manual Tool Length Measure for Special Tools (G152)
‰ Manual Tool Diameter Measure for Special Tools (G153)
‰ Tool Breakage, Length and Diameter Wear Detection (G154)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-63

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Tool Probe Calibration Cycle (G150)

Format: G150 Dn En
This cycle is used to calibrate the probe. This is used to set the Z datum
for length preset, establishing the center of the probe stylus, and the
effective probe stylus diameter for setting tool diameter registers. Refer
to Table 5-40.
Table 5-40, G150 Address Words

Address
Word Description
D The diameter of the part of the calibration standard that
comes in contact with the probe stylus during calibration.
This should be an exact measurement. (Optional override
for the diameterOfToolProbeGauge machine setup
parameter)
E The distance to go down along the side of the probe stylus
with the probe calibration standard when touching the side
of the stylus for diameter calibration. The maximum E value
is 0.55” (13.97 mm). Without any E value, the cycle brings
the calibration standard down past the top of the probe
stylus (the default 0.1” [2.54 mm]). If you put a number
higher than 0.55” (13.97 mm), the control displays an error.
(Optional) [Default: 0.1”]

To calibrate the tool probe:

1. Jog the calibration standard (the calibration standard should be in the
spindle) to the top of your work piece or a common surface where all
your tools will be calibrated to, and set its tool-length offset to the top
of the work piece or to wherever you would like your Z zero to be. To
calibrate the tool:
a) Jog the tip of the calibration standard to the proper spot
b) Press the Teach (F9) function key.
2. Manually jog the calibration standard over the probe stylus center and
less then 0.1” (2.54 mm) above the probe stylus. It should be no
more then 0.1” (2.54 mm) from the center of the stylus.

3. From the manual mode, type G150 D(n), and press the START button.
Where D is the exact diameter of the calibration standard. (For
example, G150 D.5)
4. The Z-axis initially goes down and touches the top of the probe stylus
at the feedrate specified in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium
machine setup parameter. Then retouch at the slow feedrate,
specified in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow machine setup parameter,
establishing the zero probe stylus top.

5-64 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

5. Then incrementally rapid up whatever value that is in the

ZRetractAmount machine setup parameter.
6. The spindle comes on at the RPM specified in the
calibAndToolMeasurementRPM machine setup parameter and then
the calibration standard moves over an incremental amount that is
equal to (Half the value entered in the D cycle parameter + Half the
value entered in the nominalProbeStylusDiameter machine setup
parameter + The value in the XYRetractAmount machine setup
parameter). The direction the probe moves over depends on what is
placed in the probeOrientation machine setup parameter:

–1 Go first to the left

1 Go first to the right
–2 Go first to the front
2 Go first to the back
7. The Z-axis then does a guarded Z move down 0.1” (2.54 mm) or
whatever amount was placed in the E cycle parameter and then
moves over toward the probe stylus 0.3” (7.62 mm) or until it touches
the probe stylus. If contact is not made with the probe or if contact is
made during a guarded move, then an alarm is generated and the
canned cycle terminates.
8. After the probe stylus is touched on the first side, the machine then
rapids up and over the stylus, then down on the opposite side, then
over to the other two sides until it has touched the probe stylus on all
four quadrants. This establishes the center of the probe stylus.
9. The spindle then turns off and the machine touches off on two sides
of the probe with the spindle off finding the effective probe stylus
diameter. Then, rapids up above the probe stylus and over to the
center.
10. Remove the calibration standard. You are now ready to start running
the G151 to set your tool-length offsets or tool diameter registers.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-65

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Tool Length and Diameter Offset Preset (G151)

Format: G151 Tn Dn Qn En Fn Mn Sn Rn
• Each tool must have the length set once before trying to set the
diameter. Call this cycle up the first time using Q2 because it
automatically sets the length first then the diameter.
• Calibrate the tool probe at least once before trying to automatically
preset a tool. This is done initially, but if the stylus is ever changed or
the probe is moved, then you must again calibrate the tool probe.

• This tool preset (G151) can be run from within a program or from the
manual mode. Refer to Table 5-41.
Table 5-41, G151 Address Words

Address
Word Description
T Tool number. (Required)
With only the T cycle parameter present, the canned cycle
does not step over half the tool’s diameter but comes
straight down measuring the tool length and storing it in the
tool register.
D This is the rough diameter of the tool. This should be within
0.04” (1.0 mm). (Optional)
If the D cycle parameter is present, the tool steps over half
of its diameter, the spindle turns on in reverse and then the
canned cycle measures the tool’s length.
A negative D value is for a left-handed tool and causes the
spindle to come on forward instead of reverse.
For on center length measurement, do not give a D cycle
parameter.
Q This option specifies to measure length, diameter, or both
and the appropriate tool registers are updated. (Optional)
[Default: Q1]
Q0 Measure the diameter only
Q1 Measure the length only
Q2 Measure both length and diameter
If Q is not set, the cycle measures the tool length only.
If Q0 or Q2 are programmed, you must also have a D cycle
parameter or the control displays an error message.
(Continued…)

5-66 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-41, G151 Address Words (Continued)

Address
Word Description
E The distance to go down along the side of the probe stylus
when doing a diameter pick. The maximum E value is
0.55” (13.97 mm) or the tool may crash into the probe or
table. If you enter a value larger than 0.55” (13.97 mm),
the control issues an error message. If E is not set, the
cycle uses a default value of 0.1” (2.54 mm). (Optional)
[Default: 0.1”]
Ball nose cutters and special cutters that require a move
down more than 0.55” (13.97 mm) are not supported.
F This is the override for the fast Z feedrate that was set in
the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast.
Sometimes there may be a tool that has a large diameter
making it necessary to slow it down to prevent the touch
probe from being hit too hard. This can only be set slower.
Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the
original feedrate. (Optional)
M This is the override for the medium feedrate that was set in
the machine setup parameter
ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium. This is used for the same
reason as the F cycle parameter. This can only be set
slower. Trying to set this higher will result in the software
using the original feedrate. (Optional)
S This is the override for the slow feedrate that was set in the
machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow.
This is used for the same reason as the F cycle parameter.
This can only be set slower. Trying to set this higher will
result in the software using the original feedrate. (Optional)
R This is the override for the RPM that was set in the
machine setup parameter
calibAndToolMeasurementRPM. This is used for the
same reason as the F cycle parameter. This can only be
set slower. Trying to set this higher will result in the
software using the original RPM. (Optional)

To use the automatic tool preset:

1. Install all the tools you wish to set, in the tool changer.
2. Type in:
G151 T(tool#) D(tool rough diameter) Q2
If run from the inside of a program, this line needs to be repeated for
every tool that you want to set.
3. Execute that line if you are in Manual, or run the program if you have
set all the tools up in a program.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-67

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

4. If you have done a single tool in Manual, that tool is now measured
and you are ready to measure the next tool. If you have placed
multiple lines in a program, one for each tool, all your tools are
measured and ready for use.
Shell mill style tools that have a hole in the center of the bottom do not
work with this canned cycle; in this case, you must use the manual
canned cycles G152 Manual Tool Length Measure for Special Tools
for length and G153 Manual Tool Diameter Measure for Special Tools
for diameter. See Table 5-41, G151 Address Words. This cycle is only
good for drills, taps, reamers, ball nosed endmills, and standard endmills
with a flat bottom, the cycle updates length and diameter tool registers
clearing anything in the wear registers.

The following examples are described for machining centers with

automatic tool changers.

Format: G151 T(tool#)

With T cycle parameter only set:
1. The machine rapids the Z-axis up, picks up the tool designated in the
T parameter, and rapids directly over the center of the probe stylus.
2. The Z-axis rapids down the distance placed in the
ZRapidToStartPositionFromHome machine setup parameter then
starts feeding down toward the probe for the initial touch at the
feedrate that was placed in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast machine
setup parameter, then backs up and retouches the probe at the
feedrate that is in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow.
3. The tool-length register for that tool is now updated, and that tool’s
length-wear register is set to zero.
4. Then the Z-axis rapids up to home position.
5. If you have done a single tool in Manual, that tool is now measured
and you are ready to measure the next tool. If you have placed
multiple lines in a program, one for each tool, the machine then grabs
the next tool and repeats steps 1 through 4 until all the tools have
been measured.

5-68 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Format: G151 T(tool#) D(tool rough diameter)

With T and D cycle parameters only set:

1. The machine rapids the Z-axis up, picks up the tool designated in the
T cycle parameter, and rapids directly over the center of the probe
stylus.
2. The Z-axis rapids down the distance placed in the
ZRapidToStartPositionFromHome machine setup parameter then
starts feeding down toward the probe for the initial touch at the
feedrate that was placed in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast machine
setup parameter, then backs up.
3. The machine rapids over half the diameter of the cutter from the probe
stylus center in the direction related to the probeOrientation machine
setup parameter.
4. The spindle then comes on in reverse at the RPM specified in the
calibAndToolMeasurementRPM machine setup parameter and
retouches the probe twice, once at the feedrate that is in the
ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium machine setup parameter and again at
the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow machine setup parameter.
5. The tool-length register for that tool is now updated, and that tool’s
length-wear register is set to zero.
6. Then the Z-axis rapids up to the home position.
7. If you have done a single tool in Manual, that tool is now measured
and you are ready to measure the next tool. If you have placed
multiple lines in a program, one for each tool, the machine then grabs
the next tool and repeats steps 1 through 6 until all the tools have
been measured.

Format: G151 T(tool#) D(tool rough diameter) Q2

With T, D, and Q cycle parameters set:
1. The machine rapids the Z-axis up, picks up the tool designated in the
T cycle parameter, and rapids directly over the center of the probe
stylus.
2. The Z-axis rapids down the distance placed in the
ZRapidToStartPositionFromHome machine setup parameter then
starts feeding down toward the probe for the initial touch at the
feedrate that was placed in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast machine
setup parameter then backs up.
3. The machine rapids over half the diameter of the cutter from the probe
stylus center in the direction related to the probeOrientation machine
setup parameter.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-69

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

4. The spindle then comes on counter clockwise at the RPM specified in

the calibAndToolMeasurementRPM machine setup parameter and
retouch the probe twice, once at the feedrate that is in the
ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium machine setup parameter and again at
the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow machine setup parameter.
5. The tool-length register for that tool is now updated, and any value in
the length wear register is reset to zero.
6. Then the Z-axis rapids up above the probe stylus the distance
specified in the ZRetractAmount machine setup parameter. Then it
rapids the X & Y axes over the center of the probe and turns the
spindle on in reverse.
7. The machine move the tool’s edge off to one side of the probe stylus
in the direction indicated in the probeOrientation machine setup
parameter, before making a guarded move down 0.1” (2.54 mm) or
whatever value has been placed in the E cycle parameter.
8. The machine then touches the tool to the probe stylus on two
opposite sides at the feedrate specified in the
ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium machine setup parameter with the
spindle running at the RPM specified in the
calibAndToolMeasurementRPM machine setup parameter, backing
up 0.02” (0.508 mm) after each first touch then retouching at the
feedrate specified in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow machine setup
parameter, calculating the diameter of the tool and placing the
calculated diameter value in the diameter register for the tool being
preset and any value in the diameter wear register is reset to zero.
9. Then the Z-axis rapids up to the home position.
10. If you have done a single tool in Manual, that tool is now measured
and you are ready to measure the next tool. If you have placed
multiple lines in a program, one for each tool, the machine then grabs
the next tool and repeats steps 1 through 9 until all the tools have
been measured.

5-70 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Manual Tool-Length Measure for Special Tools (G152)

Format: G152 Tn Dn Mn Sn Rn
This cycle is used to measure the length of large face mill style tools that
have a hole in the center of the bottom of the tool. Refer to Table 5-42.
for special tools, desc
Table 5-42, G152 Address Word

Address
Word Description
T Tool number. (Required)
With only the T parameter present, the spindle turns on in
reverse and the canned cycle comes straight down
measuring the tool length and storing it in the tool-length
register. The T parameter must the same as the current tool
in the spindle.
D This is the rough diameter of the tool and is only used in this
cycle to determine if the spindle should be turned on in
reverse or forward. If you have a left-handed tool you would
give a negative value to the diameter. If this parameter is
left off, the control always turns on in reverse by default.
(Optional)
M This is the override for the medium feedrate that was set in
the machine setup parameter
ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium. Sometimes there may be a
tool that has a large diameter making it necessary to slow it
down to prevent the touch probe from being hit too hard.
This can only be set slower. Trying to set this higher will
result in the software using the original feedrate. (Optional)
S This is the override for the slow feedrate that was set in the
machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow. This
is used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter. This
can only be set slower. Trying to set this higher will result in
the software using the original feedrate. (Optional)
R This is the override for the RPM that was set in the machine
setup parameter calibAndToolMeasurementRPM. This is
used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter. This
can only be set slower. Trying to set this higher will result in
the software using the original RPM. If you would like the
cycle to run without the spindle turning, enter a negative
value in the “R” parameter. (Optional)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-71

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

WARNING: Large tools can result in probe damage if the touch

feedrate is set too fast. For this reason, the cycle parameters: M, S,
and R have been added to enable the programmer/operator to
override the values in the machine setup parameters for the specific
tool being checked or set.
You must have the tool positioned over the probe stylus so the tooth that
sticks down the furthest is directly over the center of the probe stylus and
above the stylus less then 0.100” (2.0 mm).

NOTE: If the spindle is locked, you may have to unlock it to manually

orient the tool tooth over the probe stylus.
To measure the tool length:
1. Jog the tool to the top of the probe stylus so that the tooth that sticks
down the furthest is directly over the center of the probe stylus.
2. From the manual mode, type G152 Tn Dd and press the START
button. Where T is the tool number and D is roughly the diameter of
the special tool. (For example, G152 T3 D3.5)
3. The spindle turns on in reverse and the Z-axis should go down and
touch the top of the probe stylus keeping the X and Y position the
same, then rapid up 0.02” (0.508 mm) and then retouch using the
slow feedrate programmed in the machine setup parameter. The
cycle then updates the tool-length offset register clearing any value in
the length wear register, turn the spindle off and return the tool to the
Z height where it started.
4. The Tool Length has been set and you can now change to another
tool, and repeat steps 1 through 3.

5-72 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Manual Tool Diameter Measure for Special Tools (G153)

Format: G153 Tn Dn En Mn Sn Rn
This cycle is used to measure the diameter of irregularly shaped tools or
tools with a hole in the center of the bottom. Refer to Table 5-43.
Table 5-43, G153 Address Words

Address
Word Description
T Tool number. (Required)
The T cycle parameter must be the same as the current
tool in the spindle.
D This is the rough diameter of the tool. (Required)
The diameter specified in this cycle parameter should be
larger then the actual diameter of the tool being measured
but no more then 0.04” (1.0 mm) over. If you have a left-
handed tool, you would give a negative value to the
diameter so the spindle turns on in the forward direction.
E The distance to go down along the side of the probe stylus
when doing a diameter pick. The maximum E value is
0.55” (13.97 mm) or the tool may crash into the probe or
table. If you enter a value larger than 0.55” (13.97 mm),
the control issues an error message. If E is not set, the
cycle uses a default value of 0.1” (2.54 mm). (Optional)
[Default: 0.1”]
Ball nose cutters and special cutters that require a move
down more than 0.55” (13.97 mm) are not supported.
M This is the override for the medium feedrate that was set in
the machine setup parameter
ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium. Sometimes there may be
a tool that has a large diameter making it necessary to slow
it down to prevent the touch probe from being hit too hard.
This can only be set slower. Trying to set this higher will
result in the software using the original feedrate. (Optional)
S This is the override for the slow feedrate that was set in the
machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow.
This is used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter.
This can only be set slower. Trying to set this higher will
result in the software using the original feedrate. (Optional)
R This is the override for the RPM that was set in the
machine setup parameter
calibAndToolMeasurementRPM. This is used for the
same reason as the M cycle parameter. This can only be
set slower. Trying to set this higher will result in the
software using the original RPM. (Optional)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-73

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

WARNING: Large tools can result in probe damage if the touch

feedrate is set too fast. For this reason, the cycle parameters: M, S,
and R have been added to enable the programmer/operator to
override the values in the machine setup parameters for the specific
tool being checked or set.
You must:
• Load the tool in the spindle and call up that tools offset.
• Know the distance from the top of the probe stylus down you have to
move so that the largest part of the tool diameter is even with the side
of the probe stylus for diameter measurement. That value is placed in
E if different from the default 0.1” (2.54 mm).
• Position the tool over the probe stylus so that the tooth that sticks
down the furthest is directly over the center of the probe stylus and
above the stylus less then 0.200 (5.08 mm).
To measure the tool diameter:
1. Jog the tool to the top of the probe stylus so that the tooth that sticks
down the furthest is directly over the center of the probe stylus.
2. From the manual mode and the spindle off, input:

“G153 Tn Dn En” and press the START button. Where T is the tool
number, D is roughly the diameter of the special tool (this should be
larger but not more then 0.100” (2.54 mm) larger), and E is the Z-axis
move down needed if different then the default 0.100” (2.54mm) so
that the largest part of the tool diameter comes in contact with the
edge of the probe stylus. (For example, G153 T3 D3.5 E.25 and press
the START button.)
3. The Z-axis feeds down with the spindle on, touching the top of the
probe stylus. Once the top of the probe is found, the Z-axis rapids
back up above the probe and moves over to one side of the probe
stylus. The tool then moves down the distance in E or 0.1” (2.54 mm)
if E is not programmed. Then, with the spindle turning in reverse, the
canned cycle touches the side of the tool to the probe stylus twice on
opposite sides establishing the tool’s diameter. The new diameter is
then stored in that tool’s diameter register and clears any value in the
diameter wear register. The Z-axis then rapids up to machine home.
4. The Tool Diameter has now been set and you can change to another
tool and repeat steps 1 through 3.

5-74 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Tool Breakage, Length, and Diameter Wear Detection (G154)

Format: G154 Tn Dn Kn Jn En Un Mn Sn Rn
Refer to Table 5-44.
Table 5-44, G154 Address Word
Address
Word Description
T Tool number. (Required)
The T cycle parameter is the tool number you want checked.
D This is the rough diameter on the bottom of the tool. (Optional)
The diameter specified in this parameter should be roughly the
diameter on the bottom of the tool that you want to be over the
center of the probe stylus. If you have a left-handed tool, you would
give a negative value to this diameter so the spindle turns on
forward verses reverse. When stepping over for checking the
diameter of the tool, this cycle uses the diameter in the tool table for
the tool being checked.
K The maximum length wear value limit. The cycle checks to see if
the cutter length has changed by more then this amount and
triggers the alarm, stopping the program if exceeded. If not set, the
cycle does not check the tool length. (Optional)

NOTE: At least one, K or J must be set or the cycle alarms.

J The maximum diameter wear value limit. The cycle checks to see if
the cutter diameter has changed by more then this amount and
alarms, stopping the program if exceeded. If not set, the cycle does
not check the tool diameter. (Optional)
NOTE: At least one, K or J must be set or the cycle alarms.
E The distance to go down along the side of the probe stylus when
doing a diameter check. The maximum E value is 0.55” (13.97 mm)
or the tool may crash into the probe or table. If you enter a value
larger than 0.55” (13.97 mm), the control issues an error message.
If E is not set, the cycle uses a default value of 0.1” (2.54 mm).
(Optional) [Default: 0.1”]
Ball nose cutters and special cutters that require a move down
more than 0.55” (13.97 mm) are not supported.
U If this is undefined or set to 0, the G154 cycle does not update the
diameter or length wear register each time it checks a tool. If set to
one, the cycle updates the wear registers. In both cases, the
control alarms when the maximum limit set in K or J has been
exceeded. (Optional)
(Continued…)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-75

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-44, G154 Address Word (Continued)

Address
Word Description
M This is the override for the medium feedrate that was set in the
machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium.
Sometimes there may be a tool that has a large diameter making it
necessary to slow it down to prevent the touch probe from being hit
too hard. This can only be set slower. Trying to set this higher will
result in the software using the original feedrate. (Optional)
S This is the override for the slow feedrate that was set in the
machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow. This is used
for the same reason as the M cycle parameter. This can only be
set slower. Trying to set this higher will result in the software using
the original feedrate. (Optional)
R This is the override for the RPM that was set in the machine setup
parameter calibAndToolMeasurementRPM. This is used for the
same reason as the M cycle parameter. This can only be set
slower. Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the
original RPM. (Optional)

WARNING: Large tools can result in probe damage if the touch feedrate
is set too fast. For this reason, the cycle parameters: M, S, and R have
been added to enable the programmer/operator to override the values in
the machine setup parameters for the specific tool being checked or set.

WARNING: Running this cycle without first initially setting the length and
diameter offset could result in damage to the probe and/or the machine
tool. G150 Calibration and G151 Automatic Tool Length and
Diameter set, or G152 Manual Tool Length Measure for Special Tools
and G153 Manual Tool Diameter Measure for Special Tools, must be
run first before using the G154 cycle.
The G154 cycle loads the tool, checks, and updates length and diameter
wear registers if specified, until a maximum value is exceeded, then it
alarms out stopping the program.
This cycle can be used in place of calling up a tool before running it.
You must know the distance from the top of the probe stylus down that
you have to move so that the largest part of the tool diameter is even with
the side of the probe stylus for diameter measurement. That value is
placed in E if different then the default 0.1” (2.54 mm).
To check the tool length and/or tool diameter for wear or breakage:
In place of the usual Tn M6 command, use:
G154 Tn Dn Kn Jn En Un” at a tool change according to the instructions
above and the control checks the tool prior to using it. To activate the
new offset wear values you must call that tool with “T(Tool#) M6” after this
cycle has been run.

5-76 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Spindle Probe Cycles

This section describes operation and an overview of the spindle probing
cycles available in 6000i CNCs. It is designed to assist in part setup.
Before using your spindle probe for part setup, you must set the probe up
according to the probe manufacturer’s specification so that it is set to turn
on with a signal (if cordless) from the optical module sending unit and to
automatically time out after approximately 120 seconds.
Also, before using the spindle probe or spindle probe cycles, you must
have the tool number of the spindle probe active with its tool attribute
“Type” set to “Touch Probe” verses “Milling Cutter” as shown below with
tool #1.

Rotation, mirroring and scaling is not allowed while running these cycles.
Plane is set to XY G17 when these cycles are complete.
This section contains the following topics:
‰ Spindle Probe G-Code Cycle Designations
‰ Canned Cycle Parameter Settings
‰ Description of Spindle Probe Cycles

Spindle Probe G-Code Cycle Designations

The following summarizes the cycles available:
G140 Spindle Probe Calibration Cycle
This is used to set the effective probe stylus diameter and set the
compensation factor for any run-out of the probe stylus.
You also need to calibrate the probe using the G140 cycle.
NOTE: On machines that do not have spindle orientation or if you are
using a corded probe or cordless UD probe and cannot orient
the spindle 180 degrees during calibration, the spindle probe
stylus needs to be indicated true to the spindle centerline.
Also, before calibrating the probe with a wired type probe, the
center of spindle rotation must be indicated exactly over the
probe gauge center. In this case the accuracy of the spindle
probe is only as good as the stylus concentricity to the spindle
and the closeness to the probe gauge center. Calibration
must be done at least once before using the spindle probe.
Once calibrated, calibration does not have to be done again
unless you replace the probe stylus.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-77

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

G141 Single Surface Measure/Edge Find

This cycle finds a single surface and store that surface in a work or
fixture offset register if programmed. If the TLO option (Q6) is
selected, the result will calibrate the Tool Length Offset of the Spindle
Probe.

G142 Outside Part Corner Find

This cycle finds the X & Y surface on an outside corner of a part and
store that location in a work or fixture offset register if programmed.

G143 Inside Part Corner Find

This cycle finds the X & Y surface in an inside corner of a part and
store that location in a work or fixture offset register if programmed.
G144 Inside or Outside Hole or Boss Center Find
This cycle finds the X & Y center of an inside hole or outside standing
boss on a part and store that location in a work or fixture offset register
if programmed.

G145 Inside or Outside Web or Slot Center Find

This cycle finds the X or Y center of an inside or outside web or slot on
a part and store that location in a work or fixture offset register if
programmed. The slot or standing web must be parallel to either the
X- or Y-axes.

G146 Protected Positioning Move

This cycle allows for safe positioning of the probe around the part and
generates an alarm and stops the program if an obstruction is
encountered.
G147 Skew Error or Angle Find
This cycle makes two touches on a surface in the X or Y axes and
stores the angle relative to the 3 O’clock position. This cycle can also
activate the SkewComp at the same time as it is measured or in a
subsequent call at another place in the program without measuring
again by using Q2.

Canned Cycle Parameter Settings

Before you set the cycle parameters for the Spindle probe you must:
• Know the exact diameter of the Ring Gauge (calibration standard).
• Know that the Ring Gauge is a standard that is specifically designed
for calibrating the probe. The D cycle parameter is the diameter of
hole that comes in contact with the probe stylus during calibration and
should be an exact measurement.
• When entering values in the probing machine parameters, keep in
mind that all values are entered in metric.
Set the following 6000i Machine Probing Parameters (refer to the 6000i
CNC Technical Manual, P/N 627787-21).

5-78 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Description of Spindle Probe Cycles

This section contains detailed descriptions of the spindle probe cycles:

‰ Spindle Probe Calibration (G140)

‰ Edge Finding (G141)
‰ Outside Corner Finding (G142)
‰ Inside Corner Finding (G143)
‰ Out/Inside Boss/Hole Finding (G144)
‰ Out/Inside Web Finding (G145)
‰ Protected Probe Positioning (G146)
‰ Skew Error Find (G147)
‰ Using the Z Work Offset Update Feature

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-79

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Spindle Probe Calibration (G140)

Format: G140 Qn Hn En Vn Dn An Bn

Refer to Table 5-45.

Table 5-45, G140 Address Word

Address
Word Description
Q Set Q to 1 if you are calibrating to a boss verses a ring
gauge. Otherwise, do not set or set to 0. Default is: 0.
(Optional)
H If set to 1, the cycle finds the top of the part before
calibrating the probe. If Q parameter is set to 1, H is forced
to 1 as well; otherwise, the Default is: 0.
(Optional)
E The distance to go down from the top of the ring gauge or
standing boss for calibration. This is only used if H
parameter is set to 1. Without any E value, the cycle brings
the probe down past the top of the ring gauge after finding
the top, 0.1”. Note: If the stylus ball is greater than .2” (5.08
mm), E must be set to at least half the ball diameter.
(Optional)
V The V parameter specifies the distance to back away from
the edge for the probe to fast feed to before trying to find it.
Default is: 0.1” (2.54 mm) if not set.
(Optional)
D The diameter of the ring gauge hole the probe stylus comes
in contact with. This is only to override the value in the
machine setup parameter diameterOfSpindleProbeGauge
if needed and should be an exact measurement.
(Optional)
A The distance from the starting point to move in the X-axis to
find the top of the gauge. The default, if Q is not set or set
to 0, is 0.1” (2.54 mm) beyond the edge of the ring gauge
hole. If Q is set to 1, the default is the current probe
position.
(Optional)
B The distance from the starting point to move in the Y axis to
find the top of the gauge. The default is the current probe
position.
(Optional)
You must have:
1. The probe in the spindle with its tool number active and the tool type
set to “Touch Probe”.
2. The Ring Gauge mounted on the machine table.

5-80 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

To calibrate the probe:

1. Using a “Wireless Probe ONLY”, jog the probe to the approximate
center of the ring gauge by eye and into the hole of the ring gauge at
the depth that you wish the probe stylus to come in contact with the
inside of the ring gauge hole.

NOTE: If you are using a wired probe as opposed to a wireless probe,

you must indicate the probe stylus true to the spindle rotation
center and you also must be “exactly” over the center of the
gauge hole by indicating it in, because a wired type probe is not
able to orient the spindle.

2. From the manual mode, type G140 and press START.

3. The probe touches four sides of the inside of the hole. The spindle
rotates 180 degrees (if machine has spindle orientation) and touches
the same four sides again establishing the center of the ring gauge.
The spindle then orients and touches four sides one more time
calibrating the probe.
4. Remove the ring gauge from the machine and you are now ready to
start spindle probing.

NOTE: On machines that allow the spindle probe to be installed in the

spindle with more than one orientation or machines that cannot
orient the spindle, the probe stylus must be indicated true to the
spindle centerline or the probe is not accurate once removed and
replaced into the spindle again.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-81

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Edge Finding (G141)

Format: G141 Qn Wn
• Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle.
• A preliminary tool-length offset must be set by eye for the work probe
and that tool offset active before using this cycle in a program. See
“Section 9, Tool-Length Offsets” for setting and activating tool-length
offsets.
• A preliminary work offset must be set by eye and that work coordinate
active before using this cycle in a program. See “Section 9, Tool-
Length Offsets” for setting and activating work coordinate offsets.
• The G141 Edge Finding Cycle can be run from within a program or
from the manual mode. Refer to Table 5-46.
Table 5-46, G141 Address Words

Address
Word Description
Q Axis and direction to find edge.
0 = X+, 1 = X-, 2 = Y+, 3 = Y-, 4 = Z+, 5 = Z-
(Required)
W Work Coordinate to update with edge location in X- or
Y-axes. If set, work coordinate is updated if 0 through 3 are
specified for Q or Z work offset (or TLO if
updateTloOrWorkOffsetZAxis is set to TLO) if Q is set to 4
or 5 and Z TLO if Q is set to 6.
NOTE: Before any tool-length offset is active, you must re-
call that tool. Work coordinate register or Tool-length
register is not updated if W is not set and a warning
message tells the operator no update has taken place
except when Q is set to 6 in which case the Spindle Probe
TLO will always be reset. (Optional)
To use the Edge Finding Cycle:
1. Place the probe in the spindle with its tool number active and the tool
type set to “Touch Probe”.
2. Manually jog the probe stylus less then 0.1” (2.54 mm) away from the
surface to be found.

3. Type G141 Qn Wn. If this is run from inside a program, this line
needs to be repeated for every surface you wish to find.

CAUTION: When positioning the probe from within the program you
should always use the G146 (Protected Probe Positioning) cycle
(see G146 instructions later in this document).
4. Execute that line in Manual by pressing START.

5-82 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Outside Corner Finding (G142)

Format: G142 Qn Hn En Dn Vn An Bn In Jn Kn Wn
• Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle.
• A preliminary tool-length offset must be set by eye for the work probe
and that tool offset must be active before using this cycle in a
program. See “Section 9, Tool-Length Offsets” for setting and
activating tool-length offsets.
• A preliminary work offset must be set by eye and that work coordinate
active before using this cycle in a program. See “Section 9, Tool-
Length Offsets” for setting and activating work coordinate offsets.
• The G142 Outside Corner Finding Cycle can be run from within a
program or from the manual mode. Refer to Table 5-47.
Table 5-47, G142 Address Words

Address
Word Description
Q Quadrant of corner to find.
0 = +,+ (upper right) 1 = -,+ (upper left)
2 = -,- (lower left) 3 = +,- (lower right)
(Required)
H If set to 1, the cycle finds the top of the part before finding
the X & Y corner coordinate. Default is: 0. If H is not set or
is set to 0, the Z-axis must be at the picking depth. If H = 1,
then the Z-axis must be within 0.1” (2.54 mm) above the
part. The probe stylus must be positioned within 0.1” (2.54
mm) from the outside of the corner in X & Y.
(Optional)
E The distance to go down from the top of part to find X & Y
coordinate of the corner. This is only used if H parameter is
set to 1. Without any E value, the cycle brings the probe
stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the
top, 0.1” (2.54 mm). (Optional)
D The distance over from the corner to find X & Y edge. This
allows for a part corner that has a large chamfer or radius
where you cannot pick the edge close to the theoretical
corner or has an obstruction interfering with the default
move. Default is: 0.4” (10.16 mm).
(Optional)
V Specifies the distance away from the edge for the probe to
fast feed to before trying to find it. Default is: 0.1”
(2.54 mm) if not set. (Optional)
A The distance from the starting point to move in the X-axis to
find the top of the part. The default is toward the corner
being found 0.4” (10.16 mm). (Optional)
(Continued…)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-83

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-47, G142 Address Words (Continued)

Address
Word Description
B The distance from the starting point to move in the Y-axis to
find the top of the part. The default is toward the corner
being found 0.4” (10.16 mm). (Optional)
I This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the
coordinate entered relative to the current active work
coordinate before finding the corner.
(Optional)
J Same as I only for the Y-axis. (Optional)

K Same as I only for the Z-axis. (Optional)

W Work Coordinate to update with edge location in X- and
Y-axes. If set, work coordinate is updated. Work coordinate
register is not updated if not set and a warning message
tells the operator no update has taken place if W is not set.
(Optional)
To use the Outside Corner Finding Cycle:
1. Place the probe in the spindle with its tool number active and the tool
type set to “Touch Probe”.
2. Manually jog the probe stylus less then 0.1” (2.54 mm) away from the
outside of the corner you wish to find in X & Y. If H = 1, the Z-axis
should be within 0.1” (2.54 mm) above the part otherwise the Z-axis
should be at the side picking depth.
3. Type G142 Qn Wn. If this is run from inside a program, this line needs
to be repeated for every corner you wish to find or whose position you
want to reestablish.

CAUTION: When positioning the probe from within the program, you
should always use the G146 (Protected Probe Positioning) cycle
(see G146 instructions later in this document) or use the I, J, or K
cycle parameters for the same purpose.

4. Execute that line in Manual by pressing START.

5-84 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Inside Corner Finding (G143)

Format: G143 Qn Hn En Dn Vn An Bn In Jn Kn Wn
• Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle.
• A preliminary tool-length offset must be set by eye for the work probe
and that tool offset active before using this cycle in a program. See
“Section 9, Tool-Length Offsets” for setting and activating tool-length
offsets.
• A preliminary work offset must be set by eye and that work coordinate
active before using this cycle in a program. See “Section 9, Tool-
Length Offsets” for setting and activating work coordinate offsets.
• The G143 Inside Corner Finding Cycle can be run from within a
program or from the manual mode. Refer to Table 5-48.
Table 5-48, G143 Address Words

Address
Word Description
Q Quadrant of corner to find.
0 = +,+ (upper right) 1 = -,+ (upper left)
2 = -,- (lower left) 3 = +,- (lower right)
(Required)
H If set to 1, the cycle finds the top of the part before finding
the X & Y corner coordinate. Default is: 0. If H is not set or
is set to 0, the Z-axis must be at the picking depth. If H = 1,
then the Z-axis must be within 0.1” (2.54 mm) above the
part. The probe stylus must be positioned within 0.1” (2.54
mm) from the inside of the corner in X & Y.
(Optional)
E The distance to go down from the top of part to find X & Y
coordinate of the corner. This is only used if H parameter is
set to 1. Without any E value, the cycle brings the probe
stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the
top, 0.1” (2.54 mm). (Optional)
D The distance over from the corner to find X & Y edge. This
allows for a part corner that has a large chamfer or radius
where you cannot pick the edge close to the theoretical
corner or has an obstruction interfering with the default
move. Default is: 0.4” or 10.16 mm.
(Optional)
V Specifies the distance away from the edge for the probe to
fast feed to before trying to find it. Default is: 0.1”
(2.54 mm) if not set. (Optional)
A The distance from the starting point to move in the X-axis to
find the top of the part. The default is toward the corner
being found 0.4” or 10.16 mm.
(Optional)
(Continued…)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-85

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-48, G143 Address Words (Continued)

Address
Word Description
B The distance from the starting point to move in the Y-axis to
find the top of the part. The default is toward the corner
being found 0.4” or 10.16 mm.
(Optional)
I This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the
coordinate entered relative to the current active work
coordinate before finding the corner.
(Optional)
J Same as I only for the Y-axis. (Optional)

K Same as I only for the Z-axis. (Optional)

W Work Coordinate to update with edge location in X- and
Y-axes. If set, work coordinate is updated. Work coordinate
register is not updated if not set and a warning message
tells the operator no update has taken place if W is not set.
(Optional)
To use the Inside Corner Finding Cycle:
1. Place the probe in the spindle with its tool number active and the tool
type set to “Touch Probe”.
2. Manually jog the probe stylus 0.1” (2.54 mm) away from the inside of
the corner you wish to find in X & Y. If H = 1, the Z-axis should be
within 0.1” (2.54 mm) above the part otherwise the Z-axis should be at
the side picking depth.

3. Type G143 Qn Wn. If this is run from inside a program, this line
needs to be repeated for every corner you wish to find or whose
position you want to reestablish.

CAUTION: When positioning the probe from within the program you
should always use the G146 (Protected Probe Positioning) cycle
(see G146 instructions later in this document) or use the I, J, or K
cycle parameters for the same purpose.

4. Execute that line in Manual by pressing START.

5-86 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Inside/Outside Boss/Hole Finding (G144)

Format: G144 Qn Xn Yn Hn En Vn An Bn In Jn Kn Rn Wn
• Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle.
• A preliminary tool-length offset must be set by eye for the work probe
and that tool offset active before using this cycle in a program. See
“Section 9, Tool-Length Offsets” for setting and activating tool-length
offsets.
• A preliminary work offset must be set by eye and that work coordinate
active before using this cycle in a program. See “Section 9, Tool-
Length Offsets” for setting and activating work coordinate offsets.
• The G144 Inside or Outside Boss/Hole Finding Cycle can be run from
within a program or from the manual mode. Refer to Table 5-49.
Table 5-49, G144 Address Words

Address
Word Description
Q Inside or Outside.
0 = Inside Hole 1 = Outside Boss
(Required)
X Estimated length of boss/hole if rectangular or the Diameter
if round.
(Required)
Y Estimated width of boss/hole. Y is only specified if boss or
hole is rectangular in shape.
(Optional)
H If set to 1, the cycle finds the top of the part before finding
center of hole or boss. If Q parameter is set to 1, H is
forced to 1 as well; otherwise, the Default is: 0.
(Optional)
E The distance to go down from the top of part to find X & Y
coordinate of the center. This is only used if H parameter is
set to 1. Without any E value, the cycle brings the probe
stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the
top, 0.1” (2.54 mm).
(Optional)
V Specifies the distance away from the edge for the probe to
fast feed to before trying to find it. Default is: 0.1”
(2.54 mm) if not set.
(Optional)
A The distance from the starting point to move in the X-axis to
find the top of the part. The default, if Q is not set or set to
0, is 0.1” beyond the edge of the boss/hole. If Q is set to 1,
the default is the current probe position.
(Optional)
(Continued…)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-87

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-49, G144 Address Words (Continued)

Address
Word Description
B The distance from the starting point to move in the Y-axis to
find the top of the part. The default is the current probe
position.
(Optional)
I This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the
coordinate entered relative to the current active work
coordinate before finding the boss/hole center.
(Optional)
J Same as I only for the Y-axis.
(Optional)
K Same as I only for the Z-axis.
(Optional)
W Work Coordinate to update with the center location in X and
Y axes. If set, work coordinate is updated. Work coordinate
register is not updated if not set and a warning message
tells the operator no update has taken place if W is not set.
(Optional)
R If set to 1, the cycle does a preliminary measure in the
X-axis to get on center before measuring the Y-axis, making
a total of 6 touches. If set to 0, the cycle only measures “X”
once for a total of 4 touches. Default is: 0.
(Optional)

To use the Inside/Outside Boss/Hole Finding Cycle:

1. Place the probe in the spindle with its tool number active and the tool
type set to “Touch Probe”.
2. Manually jog the probe stylus the approximate center in X & Y within
0.1” (2.54 mm). If H = 1, the Z-axis should be within 0.1” (2.54 mm)
above the part otherwise the Z-axis should be at the side picking
depth.

3. Type G144 Qn Xn Yn Wn. If this is run from inside a program, this

line needs to be repeated for every boss/hole you wish to find or
whose position you want to reestablish.

CAUTION: When positioning the probe from within the program, you
should always use the G146 (Protected Probe Positioning) cycle
(see G146 instructions later in this document) or use the I, J, or K
cycle parameters for the same purpose.

4. Execute that line in Manual by pressing START.

5-88 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Inside/Outside Web Finding (G145)

Format: G145 Qn Xn Yn Hn En Vn An Bn In Jn Kn Wn
• An inside Web is a slot. An outside Web is a standing rib.
• Webs can only be measured in the X- or Y-axis.
• Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle.
• A preliminary tool-length offset must be set by eye for the work probe
and that tool offset active before using this cycle in a program. See
“Section 9, Tool-Length Offsets” for setting and activating tool-length
offsets.
• A preliminary work offset must be set by eye and that work coordinate
active before using this cycle in a program. See “Section 9, Tool-
Length Offsets” for setting and activating work coordinate offsets.
• The G145 Inside or Outside Web Finding Cycle can be run from within
a program or from the manual mode. Refer to Table 5-50.
Table 5-50, G145 Address Words

Address
Word Description
Q Inside or Outside.
0 = Inside Hole 1 = Outside Boss
(Required)
X Estimated X width of Web if measuring in the X-axis. X or Y
must be specified; but only one, not both.
Y Estimated Y width of Web if measuring in the Y-axis. X or Y
must be specified; but only one, not both.
H If set to 1, the cycle finds the top of the part before finding
center of Web. If Q parameter is set to 1, H is forced to 1 as
well; otherwise, the Default is: 0.
(Optional)
E The distance to go down from the top of part to find X or Y
coordinate of the center. This is only used if H parameter is
set to 1. Without any E value, the cycle brings the probe
stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the
top, 0.1” (2.54 mm). (Optional)
V Specifies the distance away from the edge for the probe to
fast feed to before trying to find it. Default is: 0.1” (2.54
mm) if not set. (Optional)
A The distance from the starting point to move in the X-axis to
find the top of the part. The default, if Q is not set or set to
0, is 0.1” beyond the edge of the web. If Q is set to 1, the
default is the current probe position.
(Optional)
(Continued…)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-89

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-50, G145 Address Words (Continued)

Address
Word Description
B The distance from the starting point to move in the Y-axis to
find the top of the part. The default is the current probe
position. (Optional)
I This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the
coordinate entered relative to the current active work
coordinate before finding the web center.
(Optional)
J Same as I only for the Y-axis. (Optional)

K Same as I only for the Z-axis. (Optional)

W Work Coordinate to update with the center location in X- or
Y-axes. If set, work coordinate is updated. Work coordinate
register is not updated if not set and a warning message
tells the operator no update has taken place if W is not set.
(Optional)

To use the Inside/Outside Web Finding Cycle:

1. Place the probe in the spindle with its tool number active and the tool
type set to “Touch Probe”.
2. Manually jog the probe stylus the approximate center in X or Y within
0.1” (2.54 mm). If H = 1, the Z-axis should be within 0.1” (2.54 mm)
above the part otherwise the Z-axis should be at the side picking
depth.
3. Type G145 Qn Xn Wn. If this is run from inside a program, this line
needs to be repeated for every web you wish to find or whose position
you want to reestablish.

CAUTION: When positioning the probe from within the program you
should always use the G146 (Protected Probe Positioning) cycle
(see G146 instructions later in this document) or use the I, J, or K
cycle parameters for the same purpose.

4. Execute that line in Manual by pressing START.

5-90 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Protected Probe Positioning (G146)

Format: G146 Xn Yn Zn Fn

• When an X, Y, and/or Z move is programmed using the G146

(Protected Positioning Cycle), the control stops the axis travel and
program and alarm, if the probe stylus is triggered before reaching the
target set in the X, Y, and/or Z parameters.
• This cycle is intended to offer some degree of safety when moving the
probe around the part; however, it is not fool proof and does not
protect against gross bad programming where the probe body would
encounter an obstruction before the probe stylus is triggered.
Extreme care should be taken to avoid this condition as probe
damage may result.
• Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle.
• A preliminary tool-length offset must be set by eye for the work probe
and that tool offset active before using this cycle. See “Section 9,
Tool-Length Offsets” for setting and activating tool-length offsets.
• A preliminary work offset must be set by eye and that work coordinate
active before using this cycle. See “Section 9, Tool-Length Offsets”
for setting and activating work coordinate offsets.

• The G146 Protected Probe Positioning Cycle can be run from within a
program or from the manual mode. Refer to Table 5-51.

Table 5-51, G146 Address Words

Address
Word Description
X X Target position relative to current active work coordinate.

Y Y Target position relative to current active work coordinate.

Z Z Target position relative to current active work coordinate

combined with the current active tool-length offset.
F Feedrate at which to travel to target. F is only active for the
current move so it must be restated every time or the default
takes precedence. The default is set in the machine setup
parameter positioningFeedrate_Normally.
(Optional)

To use the Protected Probe Positioning Cycle:

1. Place the probe in the spindle and make sure that its tool and work
coordinate offsets are active and the tool type set to “Touch Probe”.
2. Type G146 Xn Yn Zn Fn. If this is run from inside a program, this line
needs to be repeated for every move you wish to make.
3. Execute that line in Manual by pressing START.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-91

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Skew Error Find (G147)

Format: G147 Qn Sn Dn Hn En Vn An Bn In Jn Kn

• G68, axis rotation, cannot be used with G147, skew error find.
• Skew error is only supported for along the side edge of a part relative
to the X,Y plane.
• Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle.
• A preliminary tool-length offset must be set by eye for the work probe
and that tool offset active before using this cycle in a program. See
“Section 9, Tool-Length Offsets” for setting and activating tool-length
offsets.
• A preliminary work offset must be set by eye and that work coordinate
active before using this cycle in a program. See “Section 9, Tool-
Length Offsets” for setting and activating work coordinate offsets.
• The probe must be pre-positioned to the proper spot in relation to the
part in accordance with the specified S parameter as described below
or an I, J, and/or K should be included for pre-positioning.
• The G147 Skew Error Finding Cycle can be run from within a program
or from the manual mode. Refer to Table 5-52.

Table 5-52, G147 Address Words

Address
Word Description
Q Q0 Finds the skew angle, but does not activate skew compensation.
Q1 Finds the skew angle, and activates skew compensation.
Q2 Activates skew compensation with the current skew value, but does not
rerun the cycle on the part.
NOTE: If Q2 is used, all other G147 parameters are ignored.

NOTE: Before using G147 Q2, you must have called G147 at least once with
Q0 or Q1, or the error message “Skew error has not been found!” is
displayed.
Skew compensation is activated around the current active work coordinate
and only works from within the program being run.
Skew compensation cannot be activated directly or indirectly using G147 from
the MDI mode.
The operator can run the G147 from MDI but must place G147 Q2 inside the
program for skew compensation to take effect.
A G53 work coordinate call deactivates skew compensation, necessitating a
re-issuance of G147 Q2 to activate skew compensation.
Using Q1 or Q2 defaults the control to G90 (Absolute). If you are in G91
(Incremental), you need to switch back after the cycle has been run.
(Optional)
(Continued…)

5-92 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-52, G147 Address Words (Continued)

Address
Word Description
S Estimated amount of angle from 3 O’clock. Default is 0 which causes the
cycle to find the angle of the back edge of the part starting its first pick in the
upper-left corner and making the second pick to the left of that, as you are
facing the surface being picked. Examples:
S=90 would start in the lower-left side, picking in the X positive direction,
finding the skew of the left side of the part.
S=-90 would start in the upper-right side, picking in the X negative direction,
finding the skew of the right side of the part.
S=180 would start in the lower-right front edge of the part, picking in the Y
positive direction, finding the skew of the front edge of the part.
Default is: 0.
(Optional)
D The distance from the first pick to the second pick. Default is: 2.0”
(50.8 mm) (Optional)
H If set to 1, the cycle finds the top of the part before finding part skew angle.
Default is: 0. If H” is set to 1, the probe stylus should be pre-positioned within
0.1” (2.54 mm) above the part. If H is set to 0, the probe stylus should be
positioned at the Z-axis depth from which you want to make side picks.
(Optional)
E The distance to go down from the top of part to find part skew angle. This is
only used if H parameter is set to 1. Without any E value, the cycle brings the
probe stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the top, 0.1”
(2.54 mm).
(Optional)
V Specifies the distance away from the edge for the probe to fast feed to before
trying to find it. Default is: 0.1” (2.54 mm) if not set. This would be used to
make sure that the cycle is picking from far enough away from the edge so
that it does not trigger the probe prematurely when stepping over to make the
second pick.
Hint: If the S cycle parameter is relatively accurate, this parameter is not
needed because the default is good enough.
(Optional)
A The distance from the starting point to move in the “X” axis to find the top of
the part. The Default is: 1.0” (25.4 mm) toward the part at the angle specified
in the S cycle parameter.
(Optional)
B The distance from the starting point to move in the “Y” axis to find the top of
the part. The Default is: 1.0” (25.4 mm) toward the part at the angle specified
in the S cycle parameter.
(Optional)
I This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the coordinate entered
relative to the current active work coordinate before finding the skew angle.
(Optional)
(Continued…)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-93

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Table 5-52, G147 Address Words (Continued)

Address
Word Description
J Same as I only for the Y-axis.
(Optional)
K Same as I only for the Z-axis.
(Optional)

To use the Skew Error Finding Cycle:

1. Place the probe in the spindle with its tool number active and the tool
type set to “Touch Probe”.
2. Manually jog the probe stylus to the appropriate start position relative
to the part as specified by the S parameter in Table 5-52, G147
Address Words above. X or Y should be within 0.1” (2.54 mm) of the
part edge. If H = 1, the Z-axis should be within 0.1” (2.54 mm) above
the part otherwise the Z-axis should be at the side picking depth. If
run from within a program, probe must be pre-positioned.
3. Type G147 Qn Sn. If this is run from inside a program, this line needs
to be repeated every time you wish to find a skew angle.

CAUTION: When positioning the probe from within the program you
should always use the G146 (Protected Probe Positioning) cycle
(see G146 instructions above in this document) or use the I, J, or K
parameters for the same purpose.
4. Execute that line in Manual by pressing START.

5-94 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Canned Cycles and Subprograms

Using the Z Work Offset Update Feature

If you would like to calibrate all your tools to a fixed Z axis location on the
machine, and then use the Z Axis Work Offset to shift all the tools to the
top of a part, you must use the G141 Edge Finding cycle with Spindle
Probing parameter updateTloOrWorkOffsetZAxis set to WorkOffset.
Only Q4, Q5, and Q6 cycle parameters will affect the Z-axis.
1. First, use Q6 to set the spindle probe tool length offset to the fixed
surface on the machine where all the tools are calibrated.

2. Next, use Q4 or Q5 on the top of the work piece or to where you want
the Z zero to be located, to set the Z-axis work offset shift to that Z
position.

Warning: Both, the tool length offset and the G53 work offset must be
active before the Z part zero point will be correct. If either one of these is
not active at the same time, a collision could occur.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 5-95

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

Section 6 - Program Editor

The following topics are described in this section:
‰ Activating the Program Editor
‰ Editing Soft Keys
‰ Marking Programming Blocks
‰ Unmarking Program Blocks
‰ Saving Edits
‰ Canceling Unsaved Edits
‰ Deleting a Character
‰ Deleting a Program Block
‰ Inserting a Program Block
‰ Undeleting a Block
‰ Canceling Edits to a Program Block
‰ Restore Canceled Edits to a Program Block
‰ Inserting Text without Overwriting Previous Text
‰ Inserting Text and Overwriting Previous Text
‰ Advancing to the Beginning or End of a Block
‰ Advancing to the First or Last Block of a Program
‰ Searching the Program Listing for Specific Text
‰ Replacing Typed Text with New Text
‰ Going to a Block of the Program Listing
‰ Scrolling Through the Program
‰ Paging Through the Program
‰ Inserting a Blank Line
‰ Copying Program Blocks
‰ Pasting Blocks within a Program
‰ Including Comments in a Program Listing

Activating the Program Editor

Program blocks are written using the Program Editor. The Program
Editor can be activated from the Manual screen, Program Manager, or
Draw Graphics.
When you activate the Program Editor, the selected program opens for
editing.
The following topics are described:
‰ Activating Edit Mode from the Manual Screen
‰ Activating Edit Mode from the Program Manager
‰ Activating Edit Mode from Draw Graphics

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 6-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

Activating Edit Mode from the Manual Screen

To activate the Edit Mode from the Manual screen:
1. With the appropriate program loaded, press Edit (F3). The Edit
Screen activates. See Figure 6-1.

Activating Edit Mode from the Program Manager

To activate the Edit Mode from the Program Manager:
1. Highlight a program in the Program Manager.
2. Press Edit (F8). The Edit screen activates and Insert (F3) highlights.

Activating Edit Mode from Draw Graphics

To activate the Edit Mode from Draw Graphics:
1. Press Edit (F2). The Edit screen activates. Refer to Figure 6-1.

Program
Name

Program
Listing

Physical
line
numbers

Soft Key
EDIT
Labels
Figure 6-1, Edit Screen

You can write and edit programs from the Edit screen. The Edit screen
provides the following areas:
Program Name The name of the program listed on the screen.
Program Listing Area of the screen where the program is listed.
Soft Key Labels These labels define soft key functions. Some soft
keys, when pressed, activate screens that contain
additional features.

2. Press the SHIFT key on the keyboard to display the Manual Shift
screen (refer to Figure 6-2). Refer to Table 6-1, Edit Soft Keys.

6-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

SHIFT EDIT

Figure 6-2, Program Editor SHIFT Screen

Editing Soft Keys

The Edit screen contains 14 soft keys, four of which are activated by
pressing the SHIFT key. See Table 6-1, Edit Soft Keys.
To activate any SHIFT soft key:
1. In Edit Mode, press SHIFT and then press the appropriate soft key.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 6-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

Table 6-1, Edit Soft Keys

Label Soft Key Function

Help F1 Activates Edit Help screen.

Delete F2 Deletes a single character located to the right of the
cursor.
Insert F3 Activates Insert Mode. Use to insert typed
characters at the cursor position without overwriting
the existing text.
Delete F4 Deletes a single block located at the cursor.
Block
Page Up F5 Scrolls the display up one page.
Page F6 Advances the display to the next page of the
Down Program Listing.
Move F7 Activates the Move pop-up menu. Refer to “Move
(F7) Description from Edit Screen.” Use this pop-up
menu to return to the beginning or advance to the
end of a block or program.
Edit Funct F8 Activates the Edit Function pop-up menu. Refer to
“Edit Funct (F8) Description from Edit Screen.” Use
this pop-up menu to perform various editing
functions within a single program or between two
programs. This includes inserting blocks. It also
includes cutting and pasting blocks within a program
or writing and reading blocks between programs.
The pop-up menu contains word and line search
features.
Exit F10 Saves the program, closes the Edit screen, and
returns the CNC to the Program Manager.
Msgs (SHIFT + F1) Displays the last 10 messages, both old (already
read) and new (not yet read).
Undo (SHIFT + F3) Use to cancel edits made to a program block and
restore the block to its original form. See
“Undeleting a Block” and “Canceling Edits to a
Program Block.”
Redo (SHIFT + F4) Use to reverse canceled edits to a program block
and restore the block to its original form. See
“Restore Canceled Edits to a Program Block.”
Quit (SHIFT + F10) Returns the CNC to the Program Manager without
saving edits made to the Program Listing.

The following topics are described:

‰ Move (F7) Description from Edit Screen
‰ Edit Funct (F8) Description from Edit Screen

6-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

Move (F7) Description from Edit Screen

Press Move (F7) to display the Move pop-up menu. Refer to Figure 6-3
and Table 6-2.

Figure 6-3, Move (F7) Pop-up Menu

Table 6-2, Move (F7) Pop-up Menu Description

Label Description
Start of Block The cursor returns to the beginning of the block.
See “Advancing to the Beginning or End of a Block.”
End of Block The cursor advances to the end of the block. See
“Advancing to the Beginning or End of a Block.”
Goto Block Use to move to any line in the Program Listing. See
“Going to a Block of the Program Listing.”
Start of Prog The cursor returns to the first block of the program.
See “Advancing to the First or Last Block of a
Program.”
End of Prog The cursor advances to the last block of the
program. See “Advancing to the First or Last Block
of a Program.”

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 6-5

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

Edit Funct (F8) Description from Edit Screen

Press Edit Funct (F8) to display the Edit Funct pop-up menu. Refer to
Figure 6-4 and Table 6-3.

EDIT FUNCT POP-UP

Figure 6-4, Edit Funct (F8) Pop-up Menu

Table 6-3, Edit Funct (F8) Pop-up Menu Description

Label Function
Insert Block Insert a program block at the cursor. See “Inserting
a Program Block.”
Find / Replace Use to search blocks for specific text; searches
forward and reverse in the program. See
“Searching the Program Listing for Specific Text”
and “Find/Replace Description from Edit Funct (F8)
Screen.”
Mark Blk ON Use to mark and unmark program blocks. See
Mark Blk OFF “Marking Programming Blocks” and “Unmarking
Program Blocks.”
Copy Copy program blocks using the BLOCK operations
Copy feature. See “To Mark and Copy Blocks:”
Paste Paste copied or cut blocks into another section of
the program using the BLOCK operations Paste
feature. See “Pasting Blocks within a Program.”
Cut Delete program blocks using the BLOCK operations
Cut feature. See “Deleting a Program Block” and
“To Mark and Cut Blocks:”

6-6 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

Marking Programming Blocks

For many editing features, you must mark the affected program blocks
before the edit is performed. To mark program blocks:
1. In Edit Mode, place the cursor at the beginning of the first block to be
marked.
2. Press Edit Funct (F8) to display the pop-up menu. Refer to
Figure 6-4, Edit Funct (F8) Pop-up Menu.
3. Select Mark Blk ON. The block is marked.
4. Use ARROW keys to mark additional blocks up or down from the cursor
position.

Unmarking Program Blocks

1. In Edit Mode, press Edit Funct (F8) to display the pop-up menu.
Refer to Figure 6-4, Edit Funct (F8) Pop-up Menu.

2. Select Mark Blk OFF. Previously marked blocks are no longer

highlighted.

Saving Edits
The Program Listing displays edits as soon as they are made, but the edits
are not saved until you exit the Program Editor.
To save edits:
1. In Edit Mode, press Exit (F10). The CNC returns to the Program
Manager or Draw Graphics screen and saves all edits.

Canceling Unsaved Edits

If edits have not been saved, they can be canceled.
To cancel unsaved edits:
1. In Edit Mode, press SHIFT and then press Quit (F10).
2. The message ProgramFilename has changes. Would you like to
quit without saving? displays on the screen, and the soft keys
change. Press Yes (F1) to cancel edits and return to the Program
Manager. Press No (F3) to return to the Edit Mode.
Deleting a Character
To delete a character:
1. In Edit Mode, use ARROWS to place the cursor to the left of the
character you want to delete.
2. Press Delete (F2) to delete the character.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 6-7

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

Deleting a Program Block

There are two ways to delete program blocks from a Program Listing.
• Use the Delete Block (F4) soft key to delete blocks one at a time.
• Use Edit Funct (F8) pop-up menu, Mark Blk ON, to mark a block,
and then press the Delete (F2) soft key to delete marked block.

To delete a program block using the Delete Block (F4) soft key:
1. In Edit Mode, place the cursor on the program block to be deleted.
2. Press Delete Block (F4). The CNC deletes the block.

To delete program blocks using the Edit Funct (F8) pop-up menu Cut
feature:
1. In Edit Mode, mark the blocks to be deleted.
2. Press Edit Funct (F8) to display the pop-up menu. Refer to
Figure 6-4, Edit Funct (F8) Pop-up Menu.
3. Select Mark Blk ON and the cursor highlights. Then use the ARROW
keys to move up or down to the number of the lines you want to mark
for delete.
4. Select Delete (F2) and the CNC deletes the marked blocks.

Inserting a Program Block

Insert a program block at the cursor by using either method:

• Edit Funct (F8) pop-up menu Insert Block feature

• Edit soft key Insert (F3) feature

Using either method all subsequent lines are moved down one line in the
program.
To insert a program block using the Edit Funct (F8) pop-up menu Insert
Block feature:
1. In Edit Mode, place the cursor at the beginning of the line where you
want the program block to display.
2. Select Insert Block, press ENTER, and a blank line is inserted at the
cursor. You can type a new program block on the line.
To insert a program block using the Edit soft key Insert (F3) feature:
1. In Edit Mode, place the cursor at the beginning of the line where you
want the program block to display.
2. Press Insert (F3) to highlight it, then press ENTER, and a blank line is
inserted at the cursor. You can type a new program block on the line.

6-8 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

Undeleting a Block
You can restore deleted blocks with the Edit Undo (SHIFT + F3) soft key.
Refer to Figure 6-2, Program Editor SHIFT Screen. The last block
deleted is the first block restored.
To restore a block:
1. In Edit Mode, place the cursor at the point where the restored block is
displayed.
2. Press the Undo (SHIFT + F3) soft key and the last line deleted from
the program displays at the cursor.

NOTE: Up to 128 consecutively deleted blocks can be restored.

Canceling Edits to a Program Block

Use the Undo feature to cancel edits made to a program block and
restore the block to its original form.
To cancel edits to a program block:
1. In Edit Mode, press SHIFT to display the SHIFT Edit soft keys. Refer to
Figure 6-2, Program Editor SHIFT Screen.
2. Press Undo (SHIFT + F3) soft key. The last line(s) deleted is restored.

Restore Canceled Edits to a Program Block

Use the Redo feature to reverse cancel edits made to a program block
and restore the block to its original form.
To restore cancel edits to a program block:
1. In Edit Mode, press SHIFT to display the SHIFT Edit soft keys. Refer to
Figure 6-2, Program Editor SHIFT Screen.
2. Press Redo (SHIFT + F4) soft key. The CNC reverses the canceled
edits one character at a time to restore the original block.

Inserting Text without Overwriting Previous Text

Use Insert (F3) to activate the Insert Mode. In Insert Mode, the CNC
inserts typed text at the cursor, without overwriting previously entered
text.
To insert text into a program without overwriting previously entered text:
1. In Edit Mode, press Insert (F3). Make sure the Insert soft key is
highlighted.
2. Place the cursor where you want to insert the text. Enter the new text.
The new text is inserted to the left of the cursor. The CNC does not
delete previously typed text as you type.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 6-9

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

Inserting Text and Overwriting Previous Text

To insert text into a program while overwriting previously entered text:
1. In Edit Mode, press Insert (F3) so the soft key is no longer
highlighted.
2. Place the cursor where the text is to be inserted. Type the new text.
The new text is inserted overwriting the character to the right of the
cursor. The CNC deletes previously typed text as you type.

Advancing to the Beginning or End of a Block

To advance to the beginning or end of a program block:
1. In Edit Mode, place the cursor on the desired block of the program.
Press Move (F7) to display the pop-up menu. Refer to Figure 6-3,
Move (F7) Pop-up Menu.
2. Select End of Block. The cursor advances to the end of the block.
– or –
Select Start of Block. The cursor returns to the beginning of the
block.

Advancing to the First or Last Block of a Program

To advance to the first or last block of a program:
1. In Edit Mode, press Move (F7) to display the pop-up menu. Refer to
Figure 6-3, Move (F7) Pop-up Menu.
2. Select End of Prog. The cursor advances to the last block of the
program.
– or –
Select Start of Prog. The cursor returns to the first block of the
program.

6-10 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

Searching the Program Listing for Specific Text

Use Edit Funct (F8) pop-up menu Find / Replace feature to search
blocks for specific text.
To find all references of text in a program:
1. In Edit Mode, place the cursor at the beginning of the program.
(Find / Replace searches forward and reverse in the program.)
2. Press Edit Funct (F8) to display the pop-up menu. Refer to
Figure 6-4, Edit Funct (F8) Pop-up Menu.
3. Select Find / Replace and press enter to display the Find screen.
Refer to Figure 6-5.
4. The message Find what: displays on the screen. Enter the text to be
found, and press Find next (F2) or Find prev (F1). The cursor
advances to the first occurrence of the text in the program or
regresses to the previous occurrence of the text in the program from
the current cursor position. Use Match Case (F4) for a case-sensitive
search.
5. To advance to the next occurrence of the text, press Find next (F2)
again. The CNC advances to the next occurrence of the text in the
program.
To regress to the previous occurrence of the text, press Find prev
(F1). The CNC regresses (Page Up) to the previous occurrence of
the text in the program.
6. Use this method to search for all occurrences of the text in the
Program Listing.
7. Press Return (F10) to exit the Find / Replace screen.

FIND_REPLACE

Figure 6-5, Edit Funct (F8) Find/Replace Screen

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 6-11

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

The following topic is described:

‰ Find/Replace Description for Edit Funct (F8) Pop-up Menu

Find/Replace Description from Edit Funct (F8) Pop-up Menu

Press Find/Replace to display the Find/Replace screen (refer to
Figure 6-5, Edit Funct (F8) Find/Replace Screen) and Table 6-4.

Table 6-4 describes the Find/Replace screen active soft keys.

Table 6-4, Find/Replace Screen Soft Keys

Label Soft Key Function

Find previous F1 Finds the previous occurrence (Page
up) of the Find what: text in the
program; highlighted text does not
change.
Find next F2 Finds the next occurrence (Page down)
of the Find what: text in the program;
highlighted text does not change.
Match Case F4 Use a case-sensitive search.
Replace F6 Inserts replacement text (Replace
with:) for highlighted text (Find what:)
and goes to the next occurrence of the
Find what: text in the program.
Replace all F7 Inserts replacement text (Replace
with:) for all occurrences of the
highlighted text (Find what:) in the
program.
Cancel F9 Cancels the find/replace search.
Return F10 Returns the CNC to the original Edit
Funct (F8) Screen.

6-12 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

Replacing Typed Text with New Text

Use Replace with: to replace selected occurrences of text. Enter the
appropriate text and the CNC searches the Program Listing for all
occurrences of the text. You can edit or skip each occurrence. Use
Match Case (F4) for a case-sensitive replacement. Refer to Figure 6-5,
Edit Funct (F8) Find/Replace Screen.
To replace specific occurrences of the typed text:
1. In Edit Mode, press Edit Funct (F8) to display the pop-up menu.
Refer to Figure 6-4, Edit Funct (F8) Pop-up Menu.
2. Select Find / Replace and press ENTER to display the Find screen.
Refer to Figure 6-5, Edit Funct (F8) Find/Replace Screen.
3. Type in Find what: and Replace with: texts. Press Replace (F6).
Use Match Case (F4) for a case-sensitive search.
4. Each time you press Replace (F6) the CNC finds the next occurrence
of the text in the program. You can search forward [Find next (F2)] or
backward [Find previous (F1)] in the program. The text is not
replaced until you press the Replace (F6) soft key. A description of
the Find / Replace soft keys follows:

Going to a Block of the Program Listing

Use Goto Block to move to any line in the Program Listing. Goto Block
operates independently of block numbering. Blocks can be numbered
sequentially by any increment (1, 5, 10...). Goto Block counts the blocks
of the program in increments of 1 (1 [starting block], 2, 3...). When the
feature is activated, the CNC goes to the line number specified by the
user, regardless of how the blocks are numbered.
Block # Line #
N10 Line 1
N20 Line 2
N30 Line 3

1. In Edit Mode, press Move (F7) to display the pop-up. Refer to

Figure 6-3, Move (F7) Pop-up Menu.
2. Highlight Goto Block. And press enter to display the Goto dialog
prompt. Refer to Figure 6-6, Goto Block Dialog Prompt.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 6-13

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

Figure 6-6, Goto Block Dialog Prompt

3. Type in the appropriate line number. Press ENTER. The CNC places
the cursor at that line number.

Scrolling Through the Program

In Edit Mode, press the up and down ARROWS to scroll up and down in
the Program Listing.

Paging Through the Program

With long programs, it is convenient to move the Program Listing display
up and down a whole page at a time.
1. In Edit Mode, press Page Up (F5) to go backward one page or press
Page Down (F6) to advance down one page in the program. The
CNC advances or goes back one page at a time.

Inserting a Blank Line

Insert a line at the cursor position with the Insert Line feature. All
subsequent lines are moved down one line in the program. To insert a
blank line:
1. In Edit Mode, place the cursor at the beginning of the string and press
ENTER to add a blank line before the string. Place the cursor at the
end of the string and press ENTER to add a blank line after the string.
2. You can type a new program block on the blank line.

6-14 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

Copying Program Blocks

NOTE: You can cut, copy, and paste blocks within a Program Listing.
The Cut, Copy, and Paste features work for copying and pasting
blocks between two different programs.
Copy one or more program blocks and place them elsewhere in the same
Program Listing. Table 6-5 describes two ways to copy program blocks.
Table 6-5, Copying Program Blocks
Method Description
Mark and copy blocks Copies and stores marked blocks. Leaves
original blocks unchanged.
Mark and cut blocks Cuts and stores marked blocks. Deletes
original blocks.

To Mark and Copy blocks:

1. In Edit Mode, place the cursor at the beginning of the first block to be
copied.
2. Mark the blocks to be copied. See “Marking Programming Blocks.”
3. Press Edit Funct (F8) to display the pop-up menu. Refer to
Figure 6-4, Edit Funct (F8) Pop-up Menu.
4. Select Copy. The CNC saves the blocks in memory and the original
blocks remain in the Program Listing.
To Mark and Cut blocks:
1. In Edit Mode, place the cursor at the beginning of the first block to be
copied.
2. Mark the blocks to be copied. See “Marking Programming Blocks.”
3. Press Edit Funct (F8) to display the pop-up menu. Refer to
Figure 6-4, Edit Funct (F8) Pop-up Menu.
4. Select Cut. The CNC saves the blocks in memory and deletes the
original blocks from the Program Listing.

Pasting Blocks within a Program

To paste copied or cut blocks into another section of the program:
1. In Edit Mode, place the cursor where you want to paste the copied
blocks.
2. Press Edit Funct (F8) to display the pop-up menu. Refer to
Figure 6-4, Edit Funct (F8) Pop-up Menu.
3. Select Paste. The CNC pastes the copied blocks into the Program
Listing behind the current cursor position.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 6-15

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Editor

Including Comments in a Program Listing

Use an asterisk (*) to make comments within a Program Listing or to
mask all or part of a block from the CNC. When an asterisk is placed
before a string of text, the CNC ignores all the text to the right of the
asterisk. Table 6-6 shows various ways to use the asterisk in a Program
Listing.

Table 6-6, Comment Blocks

Commented Block Ignored Text
*N20 G1 X5 Z6 CNC ignores the entire block. The
N30 … next block is executed.
N20 G1 *X5 Z6 CNC activates Linear Interpolation
N21 … (G1). Then, programmed move to
X5 Z6 is ignored. The next block is
executed.
N10 G70 G90 G0 X0 Z0 T0 Block N20 activates Tool #1. The
N20 T1 *FACE/TURN TOOL comment contains the type of tool
used as a note to the operator only.

6-16 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Section 7 - Edit Help

Edit Help provides diagrams and entry fields to program move types and
Canned Cycles. The following section describes how to activate a Help
Screen for a G-Code command and type values in the appropriate entry
fields. Refer to Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1, Edit Help Screen

To access the Edit Help Screen:
1. In Edit Mode, open the appropriate program. Press Help (F1). The
Edit Help screen activates.
2. Select the Help group from the top left and the specific helps are
displayed on the top right.
3. Select the specific code that you want to add to your code and
complete the required and optional fields displayed.
4. Press Use to add the code to your program.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 7-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

The following topics are described in this section:

‰ Edit Help Soft Keys
‰ Using Help Graphic Screens to Enter Program Blocks
‰ G-Functions
‰ M-Functions
‰ Tools
‰ G-Code Listing
‰ Entry Fields
‰ M-Code Listing
‰ Typing in Address Words
‰ Typing in M-Codes
‰ Examples of G-Code Help Screens

Edit Help Soft Keys

The Edit Help Menu contains the following soft keys. Refer to Table 7-1.
Table 7-1, Edit Help Soft Keys
Soft Key
Label Number Description
Find F1 Moves highlight to the requested Help
Template.
Help Window F3 Switches between selecting codes for
help on the top portion of the screen
and directly editing the program “free
form” on the bottom portion of the
screen.
ReEdit F6 To edit a typed command (G-Code or
canned cycle), place the cursor on the
appropriate block and press ReEdit
(F6). Once all the fields have been
edited, press Use (F10).
Return F9 Deactivates the Edit Help Menu and
returns you to the Program Listing.

7-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Using Help Graphic Screens to Enter Program Blocks

The Program Editor displays help graphic screens, in which you write and
edit program blocks.
When the CNC activates a help graphic screen, its first entry field is
highlighted. A highlight indicates that you can type values in an entry field
or make the appropriate selection. Press ENTER to move the highlight to
the next entry field. In the last entry field of the help graphic screen,
press Use (F10) or ENTER to add the block to the Program Listing. Press
the ARROWS to move the highlight between entry fields without typing
values. Press CLEAR to clear an entry field.
There are two types of entry fields:
Required entry fields Contain 0.000. You must type a value for
operation of canned cycle or other command.

Optional entry fields Blank. Entry optional.

If a required entry field is left blank, the CNC writes the block using the
0.0000 default. This may generate an error message when the program
runs.
Optional entry fields do not require a value. When left blank, a default
value or position is usually assumed.
You must remember to type: decimal points and negative signs where
needed. The CNC assumes a positive value if no negative sign is typed.

Press the (+/-) key to insert a negative sign.

Press the CLEAR key to clear an entry.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 7-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

G-Functions
The G-Code functions have the following functional groups:
• All – All G-Codes are listed (including user defined G-Codes)
• Basic Modal Functions
• Arcs
• Drilling Cycles
• Pocket Cycles
• Milling and Profiles
• Rotation, Scaling, and Mirroring
• Spindle Probing
• Tool Probing
• Tool Radius Compensation
• Other G-Functions

The following topics are described:

‰ Basic Modal Functions
‰ Tool Radius Compensation
‰ Arcs
‰ Milling and Profiles
‰ Drilling Cycles
‰ Pocket Cycles
‰ Rotation, Scaling, and Mirroring
‰ Other G-Functions

7-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Basic Modal Functions

The Basic Modal Functions enables:
G0 Rapid Move – End-Point
Refer to “Section 4, Rapid Move (G0)”
G1 Feed Move – End-Point
Refer to “Section 4, Feed Move (G1)”
G17 XY Plane
Refer to “Section 4, Plane Selection (G17, G18, G19)”
G18 XZ Plane
Refer to “Section 4, Plane Selection (G17, G18, G19)”
G19 YZ Plane
Refer to “Section 4, Plane Selection (G17, G18, G19)”
G59 Modal Radius/Chamfer
Refer to “Section 4, Modal Corner Radius/Chamfer (G59,
G60)”
G60 Cancel Modal Radius or Chamfer
Refer to “Section 4, Modal Corner Radius/Chamfer (G59,
G60)”
G70 Inch
Refer to “Section 4, Activating Inch (G70) or MM (G71) Mode”
G71 MM
Refer to “Section 4, Activating Inch (G70) or MM (G71) Mode”
G90 Absolute
Refer to “Section 4, Activating Absolute (G90) or Incremental
(G91) Mode”
G91 Incremental.
Refer to “Section 4, Activating Absolute (G90) or Incremental
(G91) Mode”
Feed Feedrate.
Refer to “Section 4, Feedrate (FEED)”
Tool Radius Compensation
The Tool Radius Compensation enables:
G40 Compensation OFF
Refer to “Section 9, Compensation (G40, G41, G42)”
G41 Compensation LEFT
Refer to “Section 9, Compensation (G40, G41, G42)”
G42 Compensation RIGHT
Refer to “Section 9, Compensation (G40, G41, G42)”

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 7-5

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Arcs
The Arcs enables:
G2 Arc CW
Refer to “Section 4, Circular Interpolation (G2 and G3)”
G3 Arc CCW
Refer to “Section 4, Circular Interpolation (G2 and G3)”
Refer to “Programming Concepts” in “Section 1 - Introduction” for
information on planes and arc directions. The CNC executes arcs in the
XY (G17) plane by default. For an arc in the XZ (G18) or YZ (G19) plane,
program the plane change before the arc move. After you make all the
required moves in the XZ or YZ plane, return the CNC to the XY plane.

Refer to Figure 7-2. There are two arcs that can intersect any two points:
an arc with an included angle less than 180 degrees and an arc with an
included angle greater than 180 degrees.

Included Angle Included Angle

Less Than 180 Degrees Greater Than 180 Degrees
(Positive Radius Value) (Negative Radius Value)

Start End Start End

Point Point Point Point

Figure 7-2, Endpoint Radius Arc Types

To program an arc with an included angle of less than 180 degrees, type
a positive radius value. To program an Arc with an included angle of
greater than 180 degrees, type a negative radius value. The CNC
chooses which arc center to use, based on the sign of the typed value.

7-6 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Refer to Figure 7-3 and Figure 7-4. Specify the appropriate Absolute or
Incremental Mode for the angle and center point. The direction (Cw/Ccw)
of the Arc and the sign (+/-) of the angle control the path of the tool.
If the Z-axis starting and end positions differ, the arc will be a helix.

o o
90 Absolute 60 Position
Cw Tool Path
Ccw Tool Path
o

0 Absolute Angle
Center Point Reference
(Absolute Position)

Starting Point
(Present Position)

Figure 7-3, Absolute Mode, Center-Angle Arc

Figure 7-4, Incremental Mode, Center-Angle Arc

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 7-7

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Table 7-2, G2 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
End X X endpooint (Required)
Horizontal
End Y Y endpoint (Required)
Vertical
Radius R Radius of arc (Required)

Table 7-3, G3 Address Words

Address
Label Word Description
End X X endpoint (Required)
Horizontal
End Y Y endpoint (Required)
Vertical
Radius R Radius of arc (Required)

7-8 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Milling and Profiles

The Milling and Profiles enables:
G170 Face Mill Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Face Mill Cycle (G170)”
G171 Circular Profile Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Circular Profile Cycle (G171)”
G172 Rectangular Profile Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Rectangular Profile Cycle (G172)”
G175 Mill Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Mill Cycle (G175)”
G176 EndMill Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, EndMill Cycle (G176)”
G181 Tread Mill Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Tread Mill Cycle (G181)”
G190 Engrave Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Engrave Cycle (G190)”
Drilling Cycles
The Drilling Cycles enables:
G79 Drill Bolt Hole Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Drill Bolt Hole Cycle (G79)”
G80 Drilling Off
Refer to “Section 5, Drilling Off (G80)”
G81 Basic Drill Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Basic Drill Cycle (G81)”
G82 CounterBore Drill Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, CounterBore Drill Cycle (G82)”
G83 Peck Drill Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Peck Drill Cycle (G83)”
G84 Tapping Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Tapping Cycle (G84)”
G85 Boring Bidirectional Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Boring Bidirectional Cycle (G85)”
G86 Boring Unidirectional Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Boring Unidirectional Cycle (G86)”
G87 Chip Break Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Chip Break Cycle (G87)”
G89 Flat Bottom Boring Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Flat Bottom Boring Cycle (G89)”
G179 Drill Pattern Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Drill Pattern Cycle (G179)”

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 7-9

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Pocket Cycles
The Pocket Cycles enables:
G73 Draft Angle Pocket Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Draft Angle Pocket Cycle (G73)”
G75 Frame Pocket Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Frame Pocket Cycle (G75)”
G76 Hole Mill Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Hole Mill Cycle (G76)”
G77 Circular Pocket Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Circular Pocket Cycle (G77)”
G78 Rectangular Pocket Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Rectangular Pocket Cycle (G78)”
G162 Islands
Refer to “Section 5, Islands (G162)”
G169 Irregular Pocket Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Irregular Pocket Cycle (G169)”
G177 Plunge Circular Pocket Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Plunge Circular Pocket Cycle (G177)”
G178 Plunge Rectangular Pocket Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Plunge Rectangular Pocket (G178)”
G210 Slot Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Slot Cycle (G210)”
G211 Circular Slot Cycle
Refer to “Section 5, Circular Slot Cycle (G211)”
Rotation, Scaling, and Mirroring
The Rotation, Scaling, and Mirroring enables:
G68 Rotation (Axis)
Refer to “Section 4, Axis Rotation (G68)”
G72 Scaling
Refer to “Section 4, Scaling (G72)”
G100 Mirroring
Refer to “Section 4, Mirroring (G100)”

7-10 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Other G-Functions
The Other G-Functions enables:
G04 Dwell
Refer to “Section 4, Dwell (G4)”
G09 Exact Stop
Refer to “Section 4, Programming Non-modal Exact Stop (G9)”
G22 Stroke Limit
Refer to “Section 4, Setting Stroke Limit (G22)”
G28 Reference Point Return
Refer to “Section 4, Reference Point Return (G28)”
G29 Return from Reference Point
Refer to “Section 4, Return from Reference Point (G29)”
G53 Fixture Offset
Refer to “Section 4, Fixture Offset (Work Coordinate System
Select), (G53)”
G61 Exact Stop Mode
Refer to “Section 4, In-Position Mode (Exact Stop Check)
(G61)”
G64 Contouring Mode
Refer to “Section 4, Contouring Mode (Cutting Mode) (G64)”
G65 Macro Call, Single
Refer to “Section 4, User Macros (G65, G66, G67)”
G66 Macro Call, Modal
Refer to “Section 4, User Macros (G65, G66, G67)”
G67 Cancel Modal Macro
Refer to “Section 4, User Macros (G65, G66, G67)”
G92 Zero Set
Refer to “Section 4, Absolute Zero Point Programming (G92)”
G120 BlockForm
Refer to “Section 4, BlockForm (G120)”

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 7-11

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

M-Functions
The M-Code functions have the following functional groups:
• All – All M-Codes are listed (including user defined M-Codes)
• Basic M-Functions
• Cooling, Cleaning, and Lubrication
• Spindle Functions
• Tool Change

The following topics are described:

‰ Basic M-Functions
‰ Cooling, Cleaning, and Lubrication
‰ Spindle Functions
‰ Tool Change
Basic M-Functions
The Basic M-Functions enables the following M-Codes:
M0 Program Stop Mode
M1 Optional Program Stop
M2 End of Program
M30 Jump to New Program
M98 Call SubProgram
M99 End of SubProgram
M105 Dry Run, All Axes
M106 Dry Run, No Z Axis
M107 Dry Run, Off - Cancel M105 and M106
Cooling, Cleaning, and Lubrication
The Cooling/Cleaning/Lubrication M-functions enables the following M-
Codes:
M8 Coolant On
M9 Coolant Off
Spindle Functions
The Spindle Functions M-functions enables the following M-Codes:
M3 Spindle Forward
M4 Spindle Reverse
M5 Spindle Off
M19 Spindle Orientation
SPEED Spindle Speed
Tool Change
The Tool Change M-function enables the following M-Code:
M6 Tool Mount

7-12 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Tools
The Tools enables the following:
TOOL Tool Mount

G-Code Listing
When a G-Code is selected from the list, an input screen activates. It
contains instructions and entry fields that pertain to the selected G-Code.
Use the screens to input G-Codes. Refer to Table 7-4.
Table 7-4, Most Common Modal G-Codes
G-Code Function
Rapid Move G0 Axis moves made at rapidrate
Feed Move G1 Axis moves made at feedrate
Arc CW G2 Sets clockwise circular interpolation
Arc CCW G3 Sets counterclockwise circular interpolation
XY Plane G17 Sets default XY plane
XZ Plane G18 Sets default XZ plane
YZ Plane G19 Sets default YZ plane
Inch G70 Sets CNC to Inch measurements
MM G71 Sets CNC to MM measurements
Absolute G90 Sets CNC to Absolute Mode
Incremental G91 Sets CNC to Incremental Mode

Table 7-5 describes the other G-Codes in the menu.

Table 7-5, Edit Help G-Code Listing
G-Code Label and Description
G0 Rapid Move. Axis moves made at rapidrate. See also
Table 7-4, Most Common Modal G-Codes.
G1 Feed Move. Axis moves made at feedrate. See also
Table 7-4, Most Common Modal G-Codes.
G2 Arc CW. Sets clockwise circular interpolation. See also
Table 7-4, Most Common Modal G-Codes.
G3 Arc CCW. Sets counterclockwise circular interpolation.
See also Table 7-4, Most Common Modal G-Codes.
G4 Dwell. Programs a timed or infinite dwell.
G9 Exact Stop. Non-modal exact stop check. Activates
exact stop check for a single block.
G17 XY Plane. Sets default XY plane. See also Table 7-4,
Most Common Modal G-Codes.
G18 XZ Plane. Sets default XZ plane. See also Table 7-4,
Most Common Modal G-Codes.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 7-13

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Table 7-5, Edit Help G-Code Listing (Continued)

G-Code Label and Description
G19 YZ Plane. Sets default YZ plane. See also Table 7-4,
Most Common Modal G-Codes.
G22 Stroke Limit. Activates/deactivates software limits.
G28 Reference Point Return. Return to Machine Home
directly or through an intermediary point.
G29 Return from Reference Point. Return from Machine
Home to the coordinates specified. (G29 Xn Zn)
G40 Compensation OFF. Tool radius compensation cancel
G41 or G42.
G41 Compensation LEFT. Tool radius compensation LEFT.
G42 Compensation RIGHT. Tool radius compensation
RIGHT.
G53 Fixture Offset. Shifts the location of Absolute Zero to a
preset location. The preset location is the specified
fixture offset, measured from Machine Home and stored
in the Fixture Offsets Table.
G59 Modal Radius/Chamfer. Use to program modal corner
rounding or chamfering.
G60 Cancel Modal Radius or Chamfer. Use to cancel the
program modal corner rounding or chamfering.
G61 Exact Stop Mode. Contouring Mode OFF. Modal Exact
Stop Check. Activates In-Position Mode.
G64 Contouring Mode. Exact Stop Mode OFF. Modal
Contouring Mode. De-activates In-Position Mode.
G65 Macro Call, Single. (Non-Modal) Used in a program to
call a stored macro. Macros can be entered after the
main program (subprogram) or in another file (must use
file inclusion to call to active program). In non-modal
macro (G67) call, the variables can be changed at each
call.
G66 Macro Call, Modal. Used in a program to call a macro.
Macros can be entered after the main program
(subprogram) or in another file (must use file inclusion to
call to active program). In Modal macro (G66) call, the
variables always contain the same values.
G67 Cancel Modal Macro. Cancels a G66 Modal Macro call.
G68 Rotation (Axis). Axis rotation is modal and remains
active until canceled.
G70 Inch. Sets CNC to Inch measurements. See also
Table 7-4, Most Common Modal G-Codes.
(Continued…)

7-14 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Table 7-5, Edit Help G-Code Listing (Continued)

G-Code Label and Description
G71 MM. Sets CNC to MM measurements. See also
Table 7-4, Most Common Modal G-Codes.
G72 Scaling. Use Axis Scaling to enlarge or reduce patterns
commanded by the program.
G73 Draft Angle Pocket Cycle. Use the draft angle pocket
cycle (G73) to machine a draft angle on a pocket.
G75 Frame Pocket Cycle. Frame pocket cycle (G75) mills a
frame or trough around an island of material.
G76 Hole Mill Cycle. Use the hole mill cycle (G76) to
machine through holes or counter-bores.
G77 Circular Pocket Cycle. Use the circular pocket cycle
(G77) to mill round pockets.
G78 Rectangular Pocket Cycle. Use the rectangular pocket
cycle (G78) to mill square or rectangular pockets.
G79 Drill Bolt Hole Cycle. Use the automatic drill bolt hole
cycle (G79) to drill a partial or full bolt circle.
G80 Drilling Off. Use G80 to cancel drill, tap, and bore
canned cycles (G81 to G89).
G81 Basic Drill Cycle. G81 is a basic drilling cycle, generally
used for center drilling or hole drilling that does not
require a pecking motion.
G82 CounterBore Drill Cycle. G82 is the counterbore drill
cycle, generally used for counterboring.
G83 Peck Drill Cycle. G83 is the peck drilling cycle,
generally used for peck drilling relatively shallow holes.
G84 Tapping Cycle. G84 is the tapping canned cycle, used
for tapping holes.
G85 Boring Bidirectional Cycle. G85 is a boring cycle,
generally used to make a pass in each direction on a
bore or to tap with a self-reversing tapping head.
G86 Boring Unidirectional Cycle. G86 is a boring cycle that
allows the X-axis to back off the bore surface after the
spindle has stopped and oriented itself.
G87 Chip Break Cycle. G87 is the chip-breaker peck-drilling
cycle, generally used to peck-drill medium to deep holes.
G89 Flat Bottom Boring Cycle. G89 is a boring cycle,
generally used to program a pass in each direction with a
dwell at the bottom.
G90 Absolute. Sets CNC to Absolute Mode
G91 Incremental. Sets CNC to Incremental Mode
(Continued…)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 7-15

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Table 7-5, Edit Help G-Code Listing (Continued)

G-Code Label and Description
G92 Zero Set. Shifts the location of Absolute Zero to a preset
location. The preset location, measured from Machine
Home, is specified in the G92 command.
G100 Mirroring. G100 programmed with axis (G100 X)
activates “mirror image” (ON) for that axis. Mirror image
reverses the sign (+/-) of subsequent numbers. More
than one axis can be mirrored at once (G100 XY). To
cancel mirror image, program G100 on a block by itself.
G120 BlockForm. G120 is used to define a window in relation
to the X and Y machine home and the Z part zero.
G162 Islands. This cycle allows islands in irregular pockets.
G169 Irregular Pocket Cycle. Use G169 to mill irregular
pockets.
G170 Face Mill Cycle. Facing cycles simplify the programming
required to face the surface of a part.
G171 Circular Profile Cycle. The Circular Profile Cycle cleans
up the inside or outside profile of an existing circle.
G172 Rectangular Profile Cycle. The Rectangular Profile
Cycle cleans up the inside or outside profile of a
rectangle.
G175 Mill Cycle. Use the mill cycle (G175) to machine through
holes or counter-bores.
G176 EndMill Cycle. The mill cycle is terminated with the
EndMill block; at which point, it rapids up to the StartHgt
and returns to the uncompensated X and Y location.
G177 Plunge Circ Pocket Cycle. Use the plunge circular
pocket cycle (G177) for carbide tooling, when a multiple-
axis ramp-in move is not possible. The Z-axis plunges
(single-axis) to programmed depths.
G178 Plunge Rect Pocket. Use the plunge rectangular pocket
cycle (G178) for carbide tooling, where a multiple-axis
ramp-in move is not possible. The Z-axis plunges
(single-axis) to the programmed depth.
G179 Drill Pattern Cycle. Use the automatic hole pattern
canned cycle (G179) to program partial or full pattern
hole grids. You can use G179 for a corner pattern when
holes are required only on four corners.
G181 Thread Mill Cycle. Use the thread mill cycle for cutting
inside or outside threads. It cuts either Inch or MM, left or
right hand, and Z movement up or down. A single tooth
or multi-toothed tool may be used.
(Continued…)

7-16 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Table 7-5, Edit Help G-Code Listing (Continued)

G-Code Label and Description
G190 Engrave Cycle. Use the engrave cycle to engrave part
numbers, legends, or any alpha/numeric inscription. The
usual type of cutter is a sharp point or center-drill type
tool.
G210 Slot Cycle. Use the slot cycle to mill a slot.
G211 Circular Slot Cycle. Use the circular slot cycle to mill a
slot along a circular path.
FEED Feedrate. Use to set the feedrate.
Entry Fields
When a G-Code is selected from the G-Code Listing, instructions and
entry fields are listed on the screen. Type values for the required
parameters.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 7-17

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

M-Code Listing
You can program M-Codes by selecting them from the list. If the M-Code
requires a parameter, the software displays the Help Graphic for the
entered M-Code. Only M30 and M98 require parameters. Fill in the entry
fields for these M-Codes. Press Use (F10) to insert the selected code in
the block or Cancel (F9) to cancel.

For other M-Codes, select the code and press Use (F10) to insert the
code in the block. Press Cancel (F9) to cancel.
Table 7-6 describes the M-Codes in the menu.

Table 7-6, Edit Help M-Code Listing

M-Code Function
M0 or M00 Program Stop Mode
M1 or M01 Optional Program Stop
M2 or M02 End of Program
M3 or M03 Spindle Forward
M4 or M04 Spindle Reverse
M5 or M05 Spindle Off
M6 or M06 Tool Mount
M8 or M08 Coolant On
M9 or M09 Coolant Off
M19 Spindle Orientation
M30 Jump to New Program
M98 Call SubProgram
M99 End of SubProgram
M105 Dry Run, All Axes
M106 Dry Run, No Z Axis
M107 Dry Run, Off - Cancel M105 and M106
SPEED Spindle Speed

7-18 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Typing in Address Words

You can manually type in most address words without exiting Edit Help.
Address words that can be typed into the program via Edit Help include:
dimension coordinates (XYZUW); spindle codes (S); feedrates (F); tool
codes (T); and preparatory codes (G). Use the following procedure:
1. From the Main Edit Help screen or from a Help Template Menu, type
the required commands. Edit Help displays the typed commands in
the center of the screen. If the address word requires a parameter,
the software displays an entry field in which you type the appropriate
value or selection.
2. Type the value or selection, if required. You can accept or cancel
commands just as you would in the Help Graphic Menus. Press Use
(F10) to enter the block into the program. Press Cancel (F9) to
cancel your entry and clear the screen. Accepted commands are
inserted in the program.
Example: Entering G-Codes
From the Main Edit Help screen, type G77, and press ENTER. The CNC
activates the Help Graphic for Circular Pocket Milling (G77).

Typing in M-Codes
You can manually type in M-Codes listed in the table. Refer to
Table 7-5, Edit Help M-Code Listing. Most of these M-Codes
(except M30 and M98) do not require additional parameter settings.

For M-Codes that do require additional parameter settings (M30 and

M98), Edit Help displays the Help Graphic for the M-Code. Type the
required parameters and press Use (F10) to insert the M-Code into the
program.
1. From the Main Edit Help screen or from a Help Template Menu, type
the entire M-Code. (Example: M2, etc.) The Edit Help displays the
typed M-Code.

NOTE: If the M-Code requires a parameter, the software displays the

Help Graphic for the typed M-Code. Only M30 and M98 require
parameters. Fill in the entry fields for these M-Codes.
2. Press Use (F10) to enter the block into the program. Press Cancel
(F9) to cancel your entry and clear the screen. Accepted commands
are inserted in the program.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 7-19

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

Examples of G-Code Help Screens

Some examples of the G-Code Help screens are illustrated below. For
example, from Milling and Profiles select Face Mill Cycle (G170) to
display the Help screen (refer to Figure 7-5):

Figure 7-5, Face Mill Cycle Screen

From Milling and Profiles select Circular Profile Cycle (G171) to display
the Help screen (refer to Figure 7-6):

Figure 7-6, Circular Profile Cycle Screen

7-20 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

From Milling and Profiles, select Rectangular Profile Cycle (G172) to

display the Help screen (refer to Figure 7-7):

Figure 7-7, Rectangular Profile Cycle Screen

From Milling and Profiles, select Mill Cycle (G175) to display the Help
screen (refer to Figure 7-8):

Figure 7-8, Mill Cycle Screen

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 7-21

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

From Milling and Profiles, select EndMill Cycle (G176) to display the Help
screen (refer to Figure 7-9):

ENDMILL CYCLE

Figure 7-9, EndMill Cycle Screen

From Milling and Profiles, select Thread Mill Cycle (G181) to display the
Help screen (refer to Figure 7-10):

THREAD MILL CYCLE

Figure 7-10, Thread Mill Cycle Screen

7-22 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

From Milling and Profiles, select Engrave Cycle (G190) to display the
Help screen (refer to Figure 7-11):

ENGRAVE CYCLE

Figure 7-11, Engrave Cycle Screen

From Drilling Cycles, select Basic Drill Cycle (G81) to display the Help
screen (refer to Figure 7-12):

BASIC DRILL CYCLE

Figure 7-12, Basic Drill Cycle Screen

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 7-23

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

From Drilling Cycles, select CounterBore Drill Cycle (G82) to display the
Help screen (refer to Figure 7-13):

COUNTER BORING CYCLE

Figure 7-13, CounterBore Drill Cycle Screen

From Drilling Cycles, select Drill Pattern Cycle (G179) to display the Help
screen (refer to Figure 7-14):

DRILL PATTERN CYCLE

Figure 7-14, Drill Pattern Cycle Screen

7-24 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

From Pocket Cycles, select Plunge Circ Pocket Cycle (G177) to display
the Help screen (refer to Figure 7-15):

PLUNGE CIRC POCKET CYCLE

Figure 7-15, Plunge Circ Pocket Cycle Screen

From Pocket Cycles, select Plunge Rect Pocket (G178) to display the
Help screen (refer to Figure 7-16):

Figure 7-16, Plunge Rect Pocket Screen

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 7-25

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Edit Help

From Pocket Cycles, select Slot (G210) to display the Help screen (refer
to Figure 7-17):

SLOT CYCLE

Figure 7-17, Slot Cycle Screen

From Pocket Cycles, select Circular Slot (G211) to display the Help
screen (refer to Figure 7-18):

Figure 7-18, Circular Slot Cycle Screen

7-26 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Section 8 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Draw Graphics (part graphics) is a method by which to prove a program
before you cut any material. It allows you to view the part edge and/or
tool path from different angles, inspect the moves the machine is
programmed to make, without necessarily moving the axes. This reduces
waste and the chance of damaging a part.
The CNC has two Draw Modes: Draw Simulation Mode and Real-Time
Draw Mode. This section explains how to use Draw Simulation Mode to
view programs. It also explains how to set the display for a detailed
inspection of the programmed moves.

NOTE: Draw (lowercase letters with an uppercase D) refers to the

CNC’s Draw Simulation Mode; DRAW (all uppercase letters)
refers to the CNC’s Real-Time Draw Mode.

• In Draw Simulation Mode, the CNC runs programs and simulates

machine movements in the viewing area. The machine does not
move.
• In the Real-Time DRAW Mode, the CNC displays the machine moves
in the viewing area as it runs the program in Auto or Single Step
Mode.
Refer to “Section 11 - Running Programs” for instructions on how to run
DRAW while cutting a part.

When you select Draw (F7) from the Program Manager, Draw Simulation
Mode is activated. The CNC draws the part without machine movement.
When you start DRAW from Auto or S.Step Modes, Real-Time Draw
Mode is activated. The CNC draws the part while it is machining it.

The following topics are described in this section:

‰ Starting Draw
‰ Draw Screen Description
‰ Exiting Draw

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 8-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Starting Draw
Draw Simulation Mode is started from the Program Manager. You can
make some changes from the soft keys while a simulation is running. In
Draw Simulation Mode, the CNC does not hold the operation of the
program for Dwells and tool mounts and other machine related features.

NOTE: G120 (BlockForm) must be defined in the program that is using

Draw and a tool with a diameter defined must be active in the
program for Draw to work.

To activate Draw Simulation Mode:

1. In the Program Manager, highlight a program and press Draw (F7).
The Draw graphic screen activates.
2. Press Run (F1). Refer to Figure 8-1. Refer to Table 8-1, Draw (F7)
Screen Soft Keys for a description of the Draw screen soft keys.
3. Draw runs the highlighted program and the machine remains idle.

DRAW1D

Figure 8-1, Draw Screen

8-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Draw Screen Description

Information is displayed on the screen. In the Dashboard on the left side
of the screen, axis position, Tool#, Diameter, Length, G-Code, and
M-Code are displayed. Refer to Figure 8-2, Display Program (F8)
Screen.
Use the Draw screen to change the operation mode:
• Run (F1) [Auto Mode (the default operation mode)] runs the entire
program without pause.
• Select Single Step (F4) to run the program in Single Step. Single
Step Mode executes the program one block at a time. Toggle F4 to
return to Auto Mode.
Table 8-1, Draw (F7) Screen Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function
Run F1 Run the program and start Draw Simulation
Mode.
Edit F2 Edit the program
Stop F3 Stop the program
Single Step F4 Execute the program one block at a time
View Type F5 Open the type view screen. See
Figure 8-3, View Type (F5) Screen.
Adjust View F6 Change the image display screen. See
Figure 8-4, Adjust View (F6) Screen.
F8 Display Program – Displays program and
dashboard screen. See Figure 8-2,
Display Program (F8) Screen.
Opts F9 Open the Options screen. See Figure 8-5,
Opts (F9) Screen.
Exit F10 Return to Draw screen

The following topics are described:

‰ Display Program (F8)
‰ View Type (F5)
‰ Adjust View (F6)
‰ Opts (F9)
‰ Line Number (F8)
‰ Prog Contr. (F9)
‰ Adjust Block Form (F1)
‰ Zoom (F2)
‰ Rotate (F3)
‰ Pan (F4)
‰ Move Cursor (F5)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 8-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Display Program (F8)

Press Display Program (F8) to open the Display Program and
dashboard screen. Refer to Figure 8-2.

Dashboard

Program

PROG-DASHBOARD1D

Figure 8-2, Display Program (F8) Screen

8-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

View Type (F5)

Press View Type (F5) on the Draw screen to open the View Type screen.
Refer to Figure 8-3. Refer to Table 8-2 for a description of the View
Type screen soft keys.

DRAW5D

Figure 8-3, View Type (F5) Screen

Table 8-2, View Type (F5) Screen Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function
F1 Plane View – No features

F2 3-D Perspective View – Adjust view form

features
F3 Projection View – Adjust view form and
cursor features
F4 2-D Line Draw – Adjust view form features

F5 3-D Line Draw – Adjust view form features

F6 3-D Shaded– Adjust view form features

NOTE: When a user has selected the 3-D
Shaded view and then runs a program, the
software changes to the fast 3-D
Perspective View. After the simulation is
complete, the user can switch back and
forth among all views. While running, the
3-D Shaded view is grayed out.
(Continued…)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 8-5

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Table 8-2, View Type (F5) Screen Soft Keys (Continued)

Label Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function
Line Number F8 For F4 or F5, displays/hides line numbers
when toggled. Refer to Figure 8-6, Line
Number (F8) Screen.
Prog Contr. F9 For F4 or F5, displays the programmed
contour beside the tool path. Only visible in
Part Programs using pocket cycles or tool-
radius compensation. Refer to Figure 8-7,
Prog Contr. (F9) Screen.
Return F10 Return to Draw screen

8-6 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Adjust View (F6)

Press Adjust View (F6) on the Draw screen to open the Adjust View
screen. Refer to Figure 8-4. Refer to Table 8-3 for a description of the
Adjust View screen soft keys.

DRAW6D

Figure 8-4, Adjust View (F6) Screen

Table 8-3, Adjust View (F6) Screen Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function
Adjust Blk F1 Changes the work piece size to simulate a
Form cut away feature. See Figure 8-8, Adjust
Block Form (F1) Screen.
Zoom F2 Open the zoom screen. See Figure 8-9,
Zoom (F2) Screen.
Rotate F3 Open the rotate screen. See Figure 8-10,
Rotate (F3) Screen.
Pan F4 Open the pan screen. See Figure 8-11,
Pan (F4) Screen.
Move Cursor F5 Open the move cursor screen. See
Figure 8-12, Move Cursor (F5) Screen.
Clear Draw F8 Erase the Draw image
Reset Blk Form F9 Resets view
Return F10 Return to Draw screen

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 8-7

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Opts (F9)
Press Opts (F9) on the Draw screen to open the Options screen. Refer
to Figure 8-5. Refer to Table 8-4 for a description of the Options screen
soft keys.

DRAW9D

Figure 8-5, Opts (F9) Screen

Table 8-4, Opts (F9) Screen Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function
Msgs F1 Displays the Messages screen. See
Figure 3-8, Messages Screen.
Opt / Skip F7 Optional skip feature
Opt Stop F8 Optional stop feature
Return F10 Return to Draw screen

8-8 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Line Number (F8)

To display the Line Number (F8) soft key from the View Type (F5)
screen, select F4 or F5. Press Line Number (F8) to display/hide line
numbers when toggled. Refer to Figure 8-6 (for this figure, F4 is
selected).

LINE NUMBER

Figure 8-6, Line Number (F8) Screen

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 8-9

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Prog Contr. (F9)

To display the Prog Contr. (F9) soft key from the View Type (F5) screen,
select F4 or F5. Press Prog Contr. (F9) to display the programmed
contour beside the tool path. Only visible in Part Programs using pocket
cycles or tool-radius compensation. Refer to Figure 8-7 (for this figure,
F4 is selected).

PROG CONTOUR

Figure 8-7, Prog Contr. (F9) Screen

8-10 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Adjust Block Form (F1)

Press Adjust View (F6) on the Draw screen then press Adjust Blk Form
(F1) on the Adjust View Screen to open the Adjust Blk Form screen.
Refer to Figure 8-8. Refer to Table 8-5 for a description of the Adjust Blk
Form screen soft keys.

ADJUST BLK FORM1D

Figure 8-8, Adjust Block Form (F1) Screen

Table 8-5, Adjust Block Form (F1) Screen Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function
Adjust In F1 Adjust the block form – In
Adjust Out F2 Adjust the block form – Out
F3 Adjust the block form – Left side

F4 Adjust the block form – Right side

F5 Adjust the block form – Top

F6 Adjust the block form – Bottom

F7 Adjust the block form – Front

F8 Adjust the block form – Back

Reset Draw F9 Resets the graphic to original image before

adjust block activity
Return F10 Return to Adjust View screen

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 8-11

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Zoom (F2)
Press Adjust View (F6) on the Draw screen then press Zoom (F2) on the
Adjust View Screen to open the Zoom screen. Refer to Figure 8-9.
Refer to Table 8-6 for a description of the Zoom screen soft keys.

ZOOM1D

Figure 8-9, Zoom (F2) Screen

Table 8-6, Zoom (F2) Screen Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function
Zoom In F1 Zoom in the image
Zoom Out F2 Zoom out the image
Reset Zoom F9 Resets the graphic to original image before
zoom activity
Return F10 Return to Adjust View screen

8-12 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Rotate (F3)
Press Adjust View (F6) on the Draw screen then press Rotate (F3) on
the Adjust View Screen to open the Rotate screen. Refer to
Figure 8-10. Refer to Table 8-7 for a description of the Rotate screen
soft keys.

ROTATE1D

Figure 8-10, Rotate (F3) Screen

Table 8-7, Rotate (F3) Screen Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function
F1 Rotate Right – Rotate the image right

F2 Rotate Left – Rotate the image left

F3 Rotate Up – Rotate the image up

F4 Rotate Down – Rotate the image down

Block Form F8 Outline the block form in red

Reset Rotate F9 Resets the graphic to original image before
rotate activity
Return F10 Return to Adjust View screen

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 8-13

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Pan (F4)
To display the Pan (F4) soft key from the Adjust View (F6) screen:
1. From the View Type (F5) screen, select F4, F5, or F6.
2. Select Return (F10) to display the Draw screen.
3. Select Adjust View (F5) to display the Adjust View screen.
4. Select Pan (F4), to display the Pan screen.
Refer to Figure 8-11 (for this figure, F4 is selected). Refer to Table 8-8
for a description of the Pan screen soft keys.

PAN1D

Figure 8-11, Pan (F4) Screen

Table 8-8, Pan (F4) Screen Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function
F1 Left Arrow – Move the image left

F2 Right Arrow – Move the image right

F3 Up Arrow – Move the image up

F4 Down Arrow – Move the image down

F8 x10 Arrow Right – Reduce image

Reset Pan F9 Resets the graphic to original image before

pan activity
Return F10 Return to Adjust View screen

8-14 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Move Cursor (F5)

To display the Move Cursor (F5) soft key from the Adjust View (F6)
screen:
1. From the View Type (F5) screen, select F3.
2. Select Return (F10) to display the Draw screen.
3. Select Adjust View (F5) to display the Adjust View screen.
4. Select Move Cursor (F5), to display the Move Cursor screen.
Refer to Figure 8-12. Refer to Table 8-9 for a description of the Pan
screen soft keys.

Figure 8-12, Move Cursor (F5) Screen

Table 8-9, Move Cursor (F5) Screen Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function
F1 Cursor Left – Move cursor line left

F2 Cursor Right – Move cursor line right

F3 Middle Cursor Up – Move middle cursor line

up
F4 Middle Cursor Down – Move middle cursor
line down
F5 Top Cursor Up – Move top cursor line up

F6 Top Cursor Down – Move top cursor line down

Return F10 Return to Adjust View screen

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 8-15

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Viewing Programs with Draw

Exiting Draw
To exit Draw and return to the Program Manager, press Exit (F10).

8-16 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Section 9 - Tool Page and Tool Management

The Tool Page stores data on tools, such as: tool number, diameter,
length offset, diameter wear, length wear, and tool type. Refer to
Figure 9-1. For a description of the Tool Page soft keys, see
Table 9-1, Tool Page Soft Keys.

Position
Display

Tool Number
Column

Column
Description

Column
Value Limits
or Range

Soft Key
Labels
TOOLPAGE

Figure 9-1, The Tool Page

Other functions related to the Tool Page may be accessed using the
SHIFT key. These functions are described in this section. Press the SHIFT
key to redisplay the Tool Shift screen. Refer to Figure 9-2, Shift Screen
from Tool Page.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Figure 9-2, Shift Screen from Tool Page

For a description of the Tool Page soft keys, see Table 9-2, Tool Page
Secondary Soft Keys.
The following topics are described in this section:
‰ Activating the Tool Page
‰ Using the Tool Page
‰ Finding Tools by Number
‰ Changing Tool Page Values
‰ Tool Page Soft Keys and Secondary Soft Keys
‰ T-Codes and Tool Activation
‰ Tool-Length Offsets
‰ Diameter Offset in Tool Page
‰ Compensation (G40, G41, G42)
‰ Activating Offsets via the Program

Activating the Tool Page

Activate the Tool Page as follows:
1. Go to the Manual screen.
2. In the Manual screen, press TOOL (F9). The Tool Page activates
(refer to Figure 9-1, The Tool Page).
3. Press the SHIFT key on the keyboard to display the Shift screen from
Tool Page (refer to Figure 9-2). The SHIFT Message (F1) functions
are described in “Section 3, Messages (Msgs) (SHIFT + F1).” Press
SHIFT again to return to the Tool Page.

9-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Using the Tool Page

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to highlight and select tool numbers (row
numbers). You can type tool information only in a highlighted row.
Highlight the appropriate row and column to enter the selected fields, and
type the values. The cursor marks the location of information to be typed.
Numbered rows correspond to tool numbers. When the CNC executes a
program block that activates a tool number, the values on that row of the
Tool Page are activated.
Press RIGHT and LEFT ARROWS to move from column to column. Tool
Page values are automatically converted to their inch or millimeter
equivalents when you change the CNC’s unit mode. All typed values
must match the CNC’s current unit mode.

NOTE: The Tool Page is the only place where the CNC converts values
from Inch Mode to MM Mode, and vice-versa. Programmed
positions are not converted when you change the unit mode.
Press Page Up (F5) or Page Down (F6) to scroll through the tool table
one page at a time.
When you activate Tool #0, you cancel the active tool diameter and
length offset of the CNC. The Tool #0, Z0 position is usually set as the
fully retracted position of the Z-axis.
All of the CNC’s Jog features can be run from the Tool Page. The
handwheels (if installed) can also be used if activated prior to entering the
Tool Page.
The Figure 9-1, The Tool Page labels:
Position Display Displays information regarding current machine
position and active Units Mode (Inch/MM).
Tool Number The tool numbers are listed in the first column
Column (CNC provides).
Column Displays a brief description of the column on which
Description the cursor is located.
Column Value Displays the column value type or limits range.
Limits or Range
Soft Key Labels Identify the functions of the active soft keys.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

The following tool attributes display on the Tool Page:

Tool Number Row Numbers link the values on a row of the Tool
Page to a tool number. A program block that
activates a tool number activates the values and
settings on that row of the Tool Page (CNC
provides).
Diameter Tool diameter applied when you activate tool
diameter compensation or use some canned
cycles.
Length Tool-length offset, which enable the CNC to adjust
the Z-axis tool tip reference position.
Diameter Wear Diameter wear offset, which compensate for wear
on the tool diameter or an incorrectly sized tool.
Length Wear Length wear offset, which compensate for wear on
the tool length or an incorrectly sized tool.
Type Type any character or press ENTER to display the
options: Milling cutter, Touch probe, or Undefined.
Use the UP and DOWN ARROWS to highlight a type
and press ENTER to select the type.

Finding Tools by Number

To find a specific tool number in the Tool Page:
1. Press Find (F8). The CNC display the “Find Tool #:” line below the
Column Description. Refer to Figure 9-3, Find (F8) from Tool Page.
2. Type a tool number in the “Find Tool #:” line that you want to locate
and press ENTER. The cursor moves to the selected tool number.

9-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Changing Tool Page Values

1. In the Tool Page, highlight the desired row. Position the cursor on the
desired column.

CAUTION: Ensure that the CNC is in the same unit mode, MM or

Inch, as the value you enter. To verify the unit setting,
look at the G-Code area of the Tool Page where either
G70 (Inch) or G71 (MM) is displayed.
2. Type the new value with all appropriate decimal values and press
ENTER (or press any ARROW). The value is entered.

The following topics are described:

‰ Clearing a Tool (Whole Row)
‰ Clearing a Single Value
‰ Adjusting a Single Value
Clearing a Tool (Whole Row)

To clear a row:
1. In the Tool Page, highlight the row to be cleared.
2. Press Clear Line (F7). All values in the row return to zero.
Clearing a Single Value

To clear a single value:

1. In the Tool Page, highlight an entire row.
2. Position the cursor on the value you wish to clear and press the
CLEAR key (on auxiliary keyboard press DELETE or (ALT + C)). The
value changes to zero.
Adjusting a Single Value

To adjust a single value:

1. In the Tool Page, highlight the desired row. Position the cursor on the
desired column.
2. Press the letter A key to display the message, “Add value.”
3. Type the amount of the adjustment. The adjustment value may be
positive or negative.
4. Press ENTER to adjust the value, and display the adjusted value on the
table.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-5

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Tool Page Soft Keys and Secondary Soft Keys

Refer to Table 9-1.
Table 9-1, Tool Page Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Function
Tools F1 The Tools soft key label is highlighted for
standard tool.
Extra F2 Provides access to additional tool attributes.
Refer to “Extra Tool Information.”
Offset F3 Enables entry to the G53 Offset pop-up menu.
Refer to “Section 4, Fixture Offsets (Work
Coordinate System Select), (G53)” and “Offset
Tool Information.”
Bin F4 Soft key displays only when machine is
equipped with a random tool changer.
Provides access to the pocket table. Refer to
“Bin Tool Information.”
Page Up F5 Moves the cursor one page backward.
Page Down F6 Moves the cursor one page forward.
Clear Line F7 Clears the entire single line. Refer to “Clearing
a Tool (Whole Row).”
Find F8 Enables “search” of a tool number. Refer to
“Finding Tools by Number” and “Find Tool
Number.”
Teach F9 Sets the current machine Z axis value into the
tool length column of the highlighted row. On
the offset table, however, the machine axis that
is copied to the table depends on which column
is highlighted.
Exit F10 Exits the Tool Page. (The changes are saved
as they are completed.)

9-6 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Press SHIFT while in the Tool Page to activate the secondary soft key
functions (refer to Figure 9-2, Shift Screen from Tool Page). Refer to
Table 9-2.

Table 9-2, Tool Page Secondary Soft Keys

Label Soft Key Function
Msgs (SHIFT + F1) Displays messages, prompts, and
reminders. Refer to “Section 3, Messages
(Msgs) (SHIFT + F1).”
Config (SHIFT + F3) Provides access to machine parameters.
PLC (SHIFT + F5) Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
Refer to “PLC and OLM Descriptions.”
OLM (SHIFT + F7) On-line Monitor (OLM) Refer to “PLC and
OLM Descriptions.”
Find in (SHIFT + F8) Enables “search” of the tool table. It
Table enables you to search for content inside the
table. Refer to “Find in Table.”
Teach (SHIFT + F9) Sets the current program Z axis value into
Program the tool length column of the highlighted
row. On the offset table, however, the
program axis that is copied to the table
depends on which column is highlighted.

The following topics are described:

‰ Extra Tool Information
‰ Bin Tool Information
‰ Offset Tool Information
‰ Find Tool Number
‰ Find in Table
‰ PLC and OLM Descriptions

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-7

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Extra Tool Information

On the Tool Screen (refer to Figure 9-1, The Tool Page), press Extra
(F2) to display the Extra screen. The Extra (F2) soft key highlights and
new screen field attributes display which can be optionally set. These
screen field attributes may be necessary for specific canned cycles.

The Extra (F2) screen field attributes follow:

Tool Number Row Numbers link the values on a row of the Tool
Page to a tool number. A program block that
activates a tool number activates the values and
settings on that row of the Tool Page. (CNC
provides)
Tool Age Time the tool has been in use.
Max Length Maximum length of tool to be used for roughing
cycle. (Default = 0)
Plunge Angle Plunge angle (used by some canned cycles)
Comment You type any comment you want (for user
reference only). (up to 17 alphanumeric characters)
Bin Tool Information
Soft key displays only when machine is equipped with a random tool
changer. On the Tool Screen (refer to Figure 9-1, The Tool Page), press
Bin (F4) to display the Bin screen or pocket table. The Bin (F4) soft key
highlights and new screen field attributes display which can be optionally
set. These screen field attributes may be necessary for random style tool
changers.

The Bin (F4) screen field attributes follow:

Bin Number Bin number (CNC provides)
Tool Number Row Numbers link the values on a row of the Tool
Page to a tool number. A program block that
activates a tool number activates the values and
settings on that row of the Tool Page. (CNC
provides)
Reserved Press ENTER to assign R (Reserved) to the Bin
number. Press ENTER again to clear the Reserved
field.
Fixed Tool Press ENTER to toggle between “Not Fixed” and
“Fixed”. When a tool is fixed, it is assigned to a
specific pocket.
Bin Locked Press ENTER to toggle between “Not Locked” and
“Locked”.

9-8 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Offset Tool Information

On the Tool Screen (refer to Figure 9-1, The Tool Page), press Offset
(F3) to display the Offset screen. The Offset (F3) soft key highlights and
new screen field attributes display which can be optionally set. These
screen field attributes are necessary for fixture offsets (G53).

The Offset (F3) screen field attributes follow:

Offset Fixture offset number
X Axis X-axis shift from Machine Home
Y Axis Y-axis shift from Machine Home
Z Axis Z-axis shift from Machine Home

Find Tool Number

On the Tool Screen (refer to Figure 9-1, The Tool Page), press Find
(F8) to display the “Find Tool #:” line below the Column Description. Type
in the “Find Tool #:” line the tool number that you want to locate. Press
ENTER on the right of the “Find Tool #:” line to start your search. Refer to
Figure 9-3.

TOOLFIND

Figure 9-3, Find (F8) from Tool Page

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-9

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Find in Table
On the SHIFT Tool Screen (refer to Figure 9-2, Shift Screen from Tool
Page), press Find in Table (SHIFT + F8) to display the “Find in Table:”
line below the Column Description. Type in the “Find in Table:” line the
table content that you want to locate. Press ENTER on the right of the
“Find in Table:” line to start your search. Refer to Figure 9-4.

FIND IN TABLE

Figure 9-4, Find in Table (F8) from Shift Tool Page

PLC and OLM Descriptions

Refer to 6000i CNC Technical Manual, P/N 627787-21, for PLC and OLM
descriptions.

PLC (SHIFT + F5) Refer to “Section 7, PLC Functions, Selecting the

PLC Mode” in P/N 627787-21

OLM (SHIFT + F7) Refer to “Section 6, Diagnosis with the Online

Monitor (OLM)” in P/N 627787-21

9-10 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

T-Codes and Tool Activation

To activate a tool, program a T-Code followed by the tool number. The
tool number corresponds to the row of the Tool Page that contains the
Tool-Length Offsets (TLOs) and other required values for the active tool.
Format: Txx
Two-digit T-Codes are used if the machine tool is not equipped with an
automatic tool changer (ATC). If the machine is equipped with an ATC,
then the four-digit T-Code system can be used.

The following topics are described:

‰ Tool Definition Blocks
Tool Definition Blocks

Example: N3 T1 R1.25 L-1 M6

A tool definition block defines the tool radius in the program, rather than
via the Tool Page. The block assigns Tool 1:

• Tool radius of 1.25 (diameter equals 2.50)

• Tool length of -1

• M6 is the tool activation

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-11

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Tool-Length Offsets
Tool-length offset (TLO) is the distance from Z0 Machine Home to the tip
of the tool at the part Z0 (usually the surface of the work). Refer to
Figure 9-5.
Tool-length offsets allow each tool used in the part program to be
referenced to the part surface. In an idle state, the CNC does not have a
tool-length offset active. Therefore, Tool #0 (T0) is active. When T0 is
active, all Z dimensions are in reference to the Z Home position. When
you program T1, all Z dimensions become referenced to the surface on
which the tool-length offset of Tool #1 was activated.
For machines that do not have a Z-axis automatic homing feature, you
must set the Z0 position of the Z-axis. Usually, it is the fully retracted
(Up) position of the quill or machine head. Tool-Length Offsets are
referenced to this position.
Because tools differ in length, Z0 axis (Part Zero) is not set the same way
as X0 or Y0. The tool-length offset is the distance from the tip of the tool
to the top of the part. Enter a length offset for each tool in the Tool Page.

Z-axis
Machine Home
T0, Z0

Part Zero
TOOLENOFFSET

Figure 9-5, Tool-Length Offset

With tool-length offsets active, the Z-axis position display reads 0.00
when the active tool moves to Part Zero. Tool-length offsets simplify
programming.

The following topics are described:

‰ Entering Offsets in the Tool Page
‰ Setting Tool-Length Offsets
‰ Entering the Z Position Manually

9-12 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Entering Offsets in the Tool Page

After you choose the type of tools and the order of their use in the
program, and you know the diameter and length offsets of tools, type the
data into the Tool Page.
1. In Manual Mode, press TOOL (F9) to open the Tool Page.
2. In the Tool Page, you must highlight a line before you can edit it.
Typically, you type diameter offsets in the Tool Page directly, after
measuring the tool with a micrometer.
To measure length offset:

1. In Manual Mode, put the tool in the spindle and carefully jog the tool
down until it touches surface (top of the work).
2. In the Tool Page, highlight that tool's tool number, and press Teach
(F9). This takes the dimension from Z Machine Home position, and
input it into the Length Offset column for that tool.
3. Exit the Tool Page, raise the Z-axis and continue.
– or –
Jog the tool(s) as described above, write down each offset(s) and type
it into the Tool Page.
In case of errors, to identify and correct:

1. If the value entered in out of range, the field changes to a different

color and you cannot exit the field.
2. Correct the value entered. A correct value (within the range) is the
same color as the other fields and you can exit the field.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-13

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Setting Tool-Length Offsets

Before you run a job in production, perform the following steps:

1. Review the part drawing.
2. Make a machining plan. Include fixturing, tooling, and machine
sequence.
3. Write the program on a program sheet.
4. Input the program.
5. Set the tool offsets.
The following sequence describes tool offsets for a job that center-drills,
drills and mills a part:

Tools: #1 No. 3 center drill

#2 0.3750 diameter Twist drill
#3 0.5000 diameter End-mill

Typically, you would perform the following steps to activate TLOs:

1. Insert and tighten all tools in their appropriate holders.
2. Set the CNC to Manual Mode.
3. Ensure the Z-axis has been homed or Machine Zero is set to its fully
retracted position.
4. If the machine is a vertical knee mill, place the longest tool in the
spindle and raise the knee until the tip of the tool is approximately half
an inch from the top of the work.
5. Place Tool #1 in the spindle.
6. Jog the tool over the work.
7. Carefully jog the tip of the tool down to meet the top of the work. Use
MDI moves and/or the Manual Panel Jog selections.
8. Press TOOL (F9) to open the Tool Page.
9. Ensure that the cursor is on Tool #1 (row 1).
10. Press Teach (F9) to input the Z value in the Length column.
11. Press Exit (F10).
12. Raise the tool from the work to Z Home (Z0).
13. Repeat Steps 7 to 12 for all tools.
14. Use a micrometer to measure tool diameters and type those values in
their respective columns.
15. Press Exit (F10) to return to Manual Mode.

9-14 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Entering the Z Position Manually

1. Retract the Z-axis to the Machine T0, Z0 position.

2. Load the tool and manually position its tip at the Part Z0 position.
3. Manually type the plus or minus Z position as it displays in the
position display in the Length offset column of the Tool being set and
press ENTER.
NOTE: The value of a tool-length offset is usually a negative number.
Diameter Offset in Tool Page
When you activate a tool, you automatically activate the length offset and
diameter values recorded on the Tool Page. When a tool is activated, the
length offset is applied immediately to provide an accurate Z-axis position
display.
The active diameter value is important when you program compensated
moves and use cycles with built-in tool compensation. If tool diameter is
correct, compensated moves and cycles are executed accurately.
Enter tool-length offsets and tool diameter values on the numbered lines
of the Tool Page. The numbered lines on the Tool Page identify the tool
number (T-Code) that activates those values.
You can program a tool activation as a separate block or include it within
the block for most moves and cycles. Tool activation’s programmed, as
separate blocks are easier to find in a Program Listing.
The Tool Page can store information for up to a number of tools specified
by the machine builder.
On machines equipped with collet-type tool holders, it is impractical to
use the Tool Page to store tool-length offsets. You can set tool-length
offset at tool change. Tool Page diameters are still required for
compensated moves and when using cycles that have built-in
compensation. You can run all Jog features from the Tool Page.
Tool Page offsets activate when you program a T-Code.
For example:
N3 T1
N4 G0 G41 XnYn
N5 etc...
Block N3 activates Tool #1 length offset. N4 activates tool compensation
for the following blocks.

NOTE: In Block N4, the G41 command must be accompanied by a

move (XYZ) to take effect. The motion must be in rapid (G0) or
feedrate (G1). The tool diameter activates when the CNC
executes the move programmed on the block. G40 and G42
must also be accompanied by moves, and activate in the same
manner.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-15

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

The following topics are described:

‰ Tool Path Compensation (G41, G42)
‰ Using Tool Diameter Compensation and Length Offsets with Ball-
End Mills
Tool Path Compensation (G41, G42)

NOTE: Be familiar with basic CNC principles before you attempt to write
compensated moves.
When tool compensation is not active, the CNC positions the tool’s center
on the programmed path. This creates a problem when programming a
part profile because the cutting edge is half a diameter away from the
path. Use tool diameter compensation to overcome this problem.
When tool compensation is active, the CNC offsets the tool by half a
diameter to position the cutting edge of the tool on the programmed path.
This enables you to program the coordinates along the part profile. You
do not need to adjust the path to compensate for tool diameter.
Most moves can be compensated. Specify right-hand or left-hand
compensation. "Right" or "left" refers to the side of the path to which the
tool offsets, as viewed from behind a moving tool. If the tool is to the left
of the work, use G41. If the tool is to the right of the work, use G42.

NOTE: Use tool compensation with lines and arcs only.

With left-hand tool diameter compensation (G41) active, the tool offsets to
the left of the programmed path (as viewed from behind a moving tool).
Refer to Figure 9-6, Left Hand Tool Compensation.

9-16 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Figure 9-6, Left Hand Tool Compensation

With right-hand tool diameter compensation (G42) active, the tool offsets
to the right of the programmed path (as viewed from behind a moving
tool). Refer to Figure 9-7.

Figure 9-7, Right Hand Tool Diameter Compensation

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-17

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

When the CNC encounters two consecutive, compensated moves, the

tool follows the offset path for the first move until it reaches the offset path
for the second move. The tool may intersect the offset path for the
second move, either before or after the endpoint of the first move,
depending on the geometry. Refer to Figure 9-8.

Move 2

Tool Path Move 1

End Point

Move 1 COMP2

Figure 9-8, Consecutive Compensated Moves

The moves to and from compensated moves are called ramp moves.
Ramp moves give the CNC time to position the tool. The ramp move
must be at least half the active tool’s diameter in length. Refer to
Figure 9-9, Ramping into a Compensated Move.

9-18 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Workpiece

First cut is a left hand

compensated Feed move.
(Programmed along
Offset path of edge of workpiece)
ramp intersects
offset path of cut.
Tool moves directly
Tool Starts Centered to position perpendicular to
On Ramp Move starting point.

Ramp move programmed

Ramp move must be to starting point of first cut.
at least 1/2 of a tool
diameter in length to
be effective. COMP5

Figure 9-9, Ramping into a Compensated Move

At the start of a ramp move, the tool centers on the programmed path. At
the end of the ramp move (starting point of the compensated move), the
tool centers perpendicular to the starting point, offset by half the tool’s
diameter.
When a compensated move starts and stops in a corner, the tool gouges
the work because the tool offsets to a position perpendicular to the
endpoint. Begin ramp moves at the side to avoid gouging the work.
Refer to Figure 9-10, Ramp On/Off Choices for Milling Inside a
Square.

NOTE: Use canned cycles to cut profiles and pockets, when possible.
The CNC automatically selects Ramp On/Off positions in a
canned cycle.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-19

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Black Area Gouged

Ramp on
Position #1 Position #4

Ramp Off

Start

Position #2 Position #3

Poorly Chosen Starting & End Points.

Position #1
Position #2 Position #5
Ramp On And Ramp Off

Start

Position #3 Position #4

Preferred Method COMP4

Figure 9-10, Ramp On/Off Choices for Milling Inside a Square

9-20 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Using Tool Diameter Compensation and Length Offsets with Ball-End Mills

When you use a ball-end mill to cut contoured surfaces, use tool diameter
compensation and tool-length offset together, if at all. Unlike a flat-bottom
tool, the tool-length offset for a ball-end mill is not necessarily set to the
tip of the tool.
In most cases, set the tool-length offset for a ball-end mill half the tool’s
diameter back from the tip. Refer to Figure 9-11.

Ball End Mill

Z-axis at T0 Z0 position

Tool Diameter From Tip

Tool Length Offset

Adjusted To Ball's Center

Part Zero BALLENDMILL

Figure 9-11, Setting Tool-Length Offset for Ball End Mill

Compensation (G40, G41, G42)

The following topics are described:
‰ Cancel Mode in Tool Compensation (G40)
‰ Startup and Movement in Z Axis
‰ Temporary Change of Tool Diameter
‰ Motion of Tool During Tool Compensation
‰ Compensation Around Acute Angles
‰ General Precautions
‰ G41 Programming Example
‰ G42 Programming Example

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-21

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Cancel Mode in Tool Compensation (G40)

At the end of a cutting sequence that performs tool compensation (G41 or

G42); you must use G40 to cancel compensation. The following example
describes a part programmed in the XY plane using G41.

NOTE: You must make an X and/or Y move with or after G40, before
changing the active tool number.
Example:
N4 G17 G0 G41 Xn Yn
N5 etc...
.
.
N20 G0 G40 Xn Yn
N21 etc...
Program G40 on a line with G0 or G1 (unless G0 or G1 is already active).
G40 programmed with or immediately following G2 or G3 generates an
alarm message.

Startup and Movement in Z Axis

The CNC “looks ahead” far enough to determine the next planar
intersection. Z-axis moves, even many consecutive Z moves, are
permitted at any time after a compensation block.

Refer to Example 1. N10 contains compensation block, properly

accompanied by an XY move. N11 contains a Z move.
Refer to Example 2. N10 contains the compensation block. N11 and
N12 contain two consecutive Z moves.

Example 1: Single Z move in a compensated program

N10 G0 G41 X0 Y-.5

N11 G1 Z-.125 F3
N12 Y3.625 F7.5
N13 X5.5
N14 etc...
Example 2: Two Z moves in a compensated program

N10 G0 G41 X0 Y-.5

N11 Z.1
N12 G1 Z-.125 F3
N13 Y3.625 F7.5
N14 X5.5
N15 etc...

9-22 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Temporary Change of Tool Diameter

To change the tool radius in order to leave stock for a finish pass,
program the "stock-variable". The variable assigned for this function is
#1030.
Example: N120 #1030 = .015
When the CNC reads the above block, 0.015 is added to the active tool
radius. The value in the Tool Page for that tool # is not updated, and tool
compensation is affected only until the tool is cancelled. #1030 is
temporary.
When the tool is cancelled (T0), #1030 is also cancelled.
Example: N120 #1030 = -.015
In this case, 0.015 is subtracted from the active tool's radius.
You must program the variable after the tool is activated.
#1030 is ignored for pocket canned cycles.
The variable must be programmed before programming G41 (Cutter
Compensation LEFT) or G42 (Cutter Compensation RIGHT) and cannot
be changed while G41 or G42 is active.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-23

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Motion of Tool During Tool Compensation

In linear-to-linear or linear-to-circular moves, the position at the end of the

startup block (block with G41 [Compensation LEFT] or G42
[Compensation RIGHT]) is perpendicular to the next programmed move in
the plane. Refer to Figure 9-12 and Figure 9-13.

Tool Diameter

TOOL PATH
G41

PGM. PATH

G41PATH

Figure 9-12, A Linear-to-Linear Move

Tool Diameter

G41
TOOL PATH

PGM. PATH
G41LTOC

Figure 9-13, A Linear-to-Circular Move

In either case, the axes moves to a point perpendicular to the next move
during the startup block.
The length of the XY move that activates compensation must be equal to
or greater than the tool radius value. Example: If tool radius equals
0.3750", the vector length of the XY move that activates compensation
must be 0.3750" or greater.
The same applies to the G40 (Compensation OFF) move.

Refer to Figure 9-14, Paths During Tool Compensation. During tool

compensation, the CNC performs offset correctly and automatically. Non-
positioning moves such as dwells (except dwell zero or infinite dwells),
coolant, or other auxiliary functions are allowed (except M1 [Optional
Program Stop] and M0 [Program Stop Mode], these are not allowed).
Moves in the third axis are also allowed during compensation.

9-24 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

You cannot program a plane change (G17, G18, or G19) during tool
compensation. However, a 2-axis move off the currently active plane is
allowed.
For example: G17 is the active plane (compensation in XY). You
program an XZ or YZ move. The Z-axis reaches the programmed target
as X/Y reaches its compensated target. Helical moves in the active plane
are also allowed.
= INTERSECTING POINT

G41 G41
Tool Diameter

TOOL PATH
TOOL PATH

PGM. PATH
PGM. PATH

PATHS

Figure 9-14, Paths during Tool Compensation

Program G40 (cancel compensation) alone or with a move in the active

plane. The move must be in rapid (G0) or feedrate (G1). Deactivation
with G2/G3 is not permitted. The move must be at least the tool radius in
length.
The CNC "looks ahead" to following blocks in order to compensate
correctly. When it “sees” an upcoming G40 block, the CNC positions the
tool perpendicular to the last move before the G40 block.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-25

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Figure 9-15 shows tool movement as compensation is deactivated.

Tool Diameter

G40

Figure 9-15, Offset Cancel

The tool moves to a point perpendicular to the last move before the G40
(deactivation) move.

9-26 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Compensation Around Acute Angles

Refer to “Temporary Change of Tool Diameter” in this section. During

compensation, the CNC finds the compensated intersection of moves and
travels to that point.
On very sharp angles, this is not always desirable. For example, if you
compensate along the outside of a 15-degree corner angle, the
compensated intersection point is far away from the actual point on the
work. Time is wasted by "cutting air" until the compensated point is
reached. To save time, the CNC creates an arc around the end of the
point on the work.
The CNC applies the arc where there are angles of 15 degrees or less.
This can be set in the Setup Utility or in the program. To change the angle
via program, set #1031.
Example: to change an angle to 10 degrees, program: #1031=10. Re-
program this value to 15 degrees (default) when finished.

The bottom part of Figure 9-16 shows how the CNC will automatically
"round" the compensated intersection. The work remains a sharp corner.

Actual Compensated
Intersection

Intersection
Automatically
Rounded

ACUTE

Figure 9-16, Compensation around an Acute Angle

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-27

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

General Precautions

1. When you program tool path instead of part edge, a negative diameter
in the Tool Page effectively changes G41 to G42 in the moves during
compensation.
2. Third axis moves (not in the active plane) are permitted during
compensation.
3. The CNC automatically rounds off the compensated intersection of
acute angles of 15 degrees or less. To change this value, program
#1031.
4. It is possible to change the tool diameter currently in use with "stock"
variable #1030.
5. Startup (Ramp On) and cancellation (Ramp Off) blocks must be of G0
or G1 type, and must be at least the tool radius in length.
6. You must enter proper diameter value in the Tool Page before you
use tool compensation.
7. Compensated arcs must be on the active plane (G17 = XY, G18 = XZ,
G19 = YZ).
8. G53 (Fixture Offset) and G92 (Zero Set) are not permitted during
compensation.
9. In Manual Mode, any active compensation deactivates.
10. Jog/Return is permitted during compensation.
11. System variable #1032 is available to change the number of blocks
the CNC can "look-ahead" while in tool-comp.

CAUTION: Changing this value can change the compensated tool

path. This variable enables further look ahead to prevent
undercut (excessive tool diameter). At default, the CNC
looks ahead far enough to find a valid intersection
between the current and next move. Set the variable
#1032 before you turn on the compensation (G40, G41 or
G42).

9-28 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

G41 Programming Example

Tool compensation can be activated with G41 or G42. Therefore you can
program the part-edge directly, rather than having to calculate the offset
manually. Refer to Figure 9-17 and Table 9-3. On a 3/8" diameter end
mill, the diameter value in the Tool Page for Tool #1 is .3750".

8"
(203.2mm)

2.5" 7.5"
(63.5mm) (190.5mm)

3"
5" (76.2mm) .5" R
(127mm) (12.7mm)
90 deg.

G41

Figure 9-17, Motion Example using G41: Absolute (G90)

Table 9-3, Motion Example Using G41

Standard Metric
N1 O1010 * COMP-EX-1 N1 O1010 * COMP-EX-1
N2 G90 G70 G0 T0 Z0 N2 G90 G71 G0 T0 Z0
N3 X-3.0 Y1.0 N3 X-76 Y25
N4 T1 * .375 MILL N4 T1 * 9.52 MILL
N5 G41 X-.5 Y0 N5 G41 X-12 Y0
N6 Z.1 N6 Z2
N7 G1 Z-.125 F5.0 N7 G1 Z-3.175 F125
N8 X8.0 F12.0 N8 X203.2 F300
N9 X7.5 Y-2.5 N9 X190.5 Y-63.5
N10 G3 X7.0 Y-3.0 I0 J-.5 N10 G3 X177.8 Y-76.2 I0 J-12.7
N11 G1 X5.0 N11 G1 X127
N12 X0 Y-2.5 N12 X0 Y-63.5
N13 Y.5 N13 Y12
N14 G0 Z.1 N14 G0 Z2
N15 G40 X-3.0 Y1.0 N15 G40 X-76 Y25
N16 T0 Z0 N15 T0 Z0
N17 M2 N17 M2

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-29

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Refer to Table 9-4 for line by line details of Table 9-3, Motion Example
Using G41.
Table 9-4, Line by Line Description of Table 9-3, Motion Example Using G41
N-Code Function
N1 Establishes program # and name.
N2 Sets Absolute, Inch, Rapid; cancels tool offset, raises Z-axis.
N3 Moves to tool change position.
N4 Activates tool-length comp., also contains comment (*).
N5 Activates tool diameter compensation and positions tool.
N6 Positions Z above part.
N7 Feeds Z to depth, at feedrate of 5.
N8 Feeds first element of contour at new feedrate.
N9 N9 to N13 feeds around contour.
N14 Rapids Z above part.
N15 Disables diameter compensation during rapid move to X-3.0
Y1.0.
N16 Cancels tool, moves Z to home position.
N17 Ends program, resets CNC to N1.

G42 Programming Example

Refer to Figure 9-18 and Table 9-5, Milled Pocket Using G42 for an
example of a milled pocket created using G42.

5.5"
(139.7MM)

X0YO

2"
.5" (50.8MM )
(12.7MM)

.5" (12.7 MM) ALL AROUND

G42

Figure 9-18, A Milled Pocket Using G42

9-30 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Table 9-5, Milled Pocket Using G42

Standard Metric
N1 O1011 * COMP-EX-2 N1 O1011 * COMP-EX-2
N2 G90 G70 G0 T0 Z0 N2 G90 G71 G0 T0 Z0
N3 X-2 Y2 N3 X-50 Y50
N4 T1 * .5000 MILL N4 T1 * 12.7 MILL
N5 X1.5 Y-1.0 N5 X38.1 Y-25.4
N6 Z.1 N6 Z2
N7 G1 Z-.25 F5 N7 G1 Z-6.35 F127
N8 G42 X.5 F12 N8 G42 X12.7 F300
N9 G2 X1 Y-.5 I.5 J0 N9 G2 X25.4 Y-12.7 I12.7 J0
N10 G1 X5.0 N10 G1 X127
N11 Y-1.5 N11 Y-38.1
N12 X1 N12 X25.4
N13 G2 X.5 Y-1 I0 J.5 N13 G2 X12.7 Y-25.4 I0 J12.7
N14 G40 G1 X4.7 N14 G40 G1 X119
N15 T0 G0 Z0 N15 T0 G0 Z0
N16 X-2 Y2 N16 X-50 Y50
N17 M2 N17 M2

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 9-31

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Tool Page and Tool Management

Refer to Table 9-6 for line by line details of Table 9-5, Milled Pocket
Using G42.

Table 9-6, Line by Line Description of Table 9-5, Milled Pocket Using G42
N-Code Function
N1 Establishes program # and name.
N2 Sets Absolute, Inch, Rapid, cancels tool offset, and raises Z-
axis.
N3 Moves to tool change position.
N4 Activates tool-length comp., block also contains comment (*).
N5 Positions to inside of pocket.
N6 Position Z above part.
N7 Feeds Z to depth at feedrate of 5.
N8 Initiates compensation during feed move to arc start point.
N9 to N13 N9 to N13 feeds around slot's contour.
N14 Deactivates comp during move to clean-up center of pocket.
N15 Cancels tool offset and rapids Z home.
N16 Moves to tool (part) change position.
N17 Ends program, resets CNC to N1.
Activating Offsets via the Program
In a program, T1 (by itself) calls the Tool Page diameter and length
offsets for the specified tool. T1 with D, R, and L address words
programs a temporary diameter/radius and length offset independent of
the Tool Page. The entered D (diameter) or R (radius) and L (tool-length)
offsets remain active until you cancel the active tool. Refer to
Table 9-7.
Table 9-7, Activating Offsets Using T1
T1 Format Description
T1 Activates Tool #1 diameter offset listed in the
Tool Page.
T1 D.5000 L-1.2500 Applies a diameter offset of .5000 and length
offset of -1.2500 to the active tool.
T1 R.2500 L-1.2500 Applies a tool radius value of .2500 and
length offset of -1.2500 to the active tool.
The diameter offset takes effect when you program G41 or G42. All
dimensions are in reference to the work surface.

CAUTION: If you use T1 to activate a tool later in the program, the

Tool Page offsets for Tool #1 are used (not the values
programmed via T1 Dn/Rn Ln).

NOTE: ANILAM recommends that you use the Tool Page to avoid
confusion or possible entry errors on the offsets.

9-32 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Management

Section 10 - Program Management

The Program Manager provides access to all of the program
management utilities. These functions include creating, selecting,
deleting, and copying programs. The Program Manager also provides
access to the network or USB.
Press Program (F2) to activate the Program Manager from the Manual
screen.

The Program Manager’s USER listing lists the programs stored in the
CNC. Refer to Figure 10-1. All CNC programs have .G extensions after
their names. Change the Program Type mode to view programs with
other formats.

NOTE: The folder where the user programs are stored is V:\USER. All
programs should be created and saved in this folder. Additional
folders can be created in V:\USER to better organize programs.
Do not delete or alter files or folders outside of V:\USER. Some
files and folders outside of V:\USER may be needed for normal
operation of the CNC.

Current
Directory

Program
List

Program
Preview

Loaded
Program

Program Type
mode (filter)
Soft
Keys
PROGRAM

Figure 10-1, Program Screen

Other functions related to the Program screen may be accessed using the
SHIFT key. These functions are described in this section. Press the SHIFT
key to display the Program Shift screen. Refer to Figure 10-2, Shift
Screen from Program Screen.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 10-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Management

Figure 10-2, Shift Screen from Program Screen

The following topics are described in this section:

‰ Program Screen Soft Keys and Secondary Soft Keys
‰ Activating the Program Screen
‰ Changing the Program Manager Display
‰ Creating a New Part Program
‰ Choosing Program Names
‰ Selecting a Program for Running
‰ Selecting a Program for Editing
‰ Deleting a Program
‰ Utils Function Pop-Up Menus
‰ Copy Programs from/to Other Directories
‰ Moving Programs from/to Other Directories
‰ Renaming Programs
‰ Marking and Unmarking Programs
‰ Deleting Groups of Programs
‰ Creating Subdirectories

10-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Management

Program Screen Soft Keys and Secondary Soft Keys

Refer to Table 10-1.
Table 10-1, Program Screen Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function
DirTree F1 Toggles between tree and list control
Create F2 Creates a new blank program
Delete F3 The CNC deletes the selected program
Select F6 You must load a program before you can
run it. Only one program can be loaded at
a time.
Draw F7 Enables Draw functionality
Edit F8 Select a program for editing
Utils F9 Displays the Utils pop-up menu. See
Table 10-3, Utils (F9) Pop-up Menu
Description.
Exit F10 Return to Manual screen
Press SHIFT while in the Program screen to activate the secondary soft
key functions (refer to Figure 10-2, Shift Screen from Program Screen).
Refer to Table 10-2, Program Screen Secondary Soft Keys.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 10-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Management

Table 10-2, Program Screen Secondary Soft Keys

Label Soft Key Soft Key Label and Function
Msgs (SHIFT + F1) Displays messages, prompts, and
reminders. See “Section 3, Messages
(Msgs) (SHIFT + F1)”
Create Dir (SHIFT + F2) Creates a new directory.
Log to (SHIFT + F4) Changes the current directory to the
selected directory:
o Expanded by using the right ARROW
o Compressed by using the left ARROW
o Traverse the directory using up and
down ARROW keys
o Go to parent directory of current
directory by using the ARROW keys
Mark (SHIFT + F6) To mark a program. See “Marking and
Unmarking Programs.”
Show Details (SHIFT + F7) Show the Program Manager details. Refer
to Figure 10-4, Show Details Screen.
Filters (SHIFT + F8) Used to move the highlighter to Program
Name to enable search.
Change (SHIFT + F9) Shows the Program Manager structure.
Layout Refer to Figure 10-3, Change Layout
Screen.
Up Dir (SHIFT + F10) Shows the Program Manager structure.
Refer to Figure 10-5, Up Dir Screen.

Activating the Program Screen

Activate the Program screen as follows:
1. Go to the Manual screen.
2. In the Manual screen, press Program (F2). The Program screen
activates (refer to Figure 10-1, Program Screen).
3. Press the SHIFT key on the keyboard to display the Shift screen from
Program screen (refer to Figure 10-2, Shift Screen from Program
Screen). Press SHIFT again to return to the Program screen.

10-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Management

Changing the Program Manager Display

You can change the Program Manager display to one of the following:
• Select Change Layout (SHIFT + F9) to show the Program Manager
structure. Refer to Figure 10-3.

CHANGE LAYOUT1

Figure 10-3, Change Layout Screen

• Select Show Details (SHIFT + F7) to show the Program Manager
details (part program names (ending with .G extensions) along with
size, date, and time of last edit). Refer to Figure 10-4, Show Details
Screen.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 10-5

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Management

Figure 10-4, Show Details Screen

• Select Up Dir (SHIFT + F10) to show the source directory without the
tree structure. Refer to Figure 10-5.

UP DIR1

Figure 10-5, Up Dir Screen

The display setting that shows only part program names is usually the
easiest to use.

10-6 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Management

Creating a New Part Program

To create a new part program:
1. In Manual Mode, press Program (F2). The Program Manager
activates.
2. Press Create (F2). The control displays the Create pop-up with the
prompt, Enter the name of the new Program
Program Name: _.
3. Type the new program name.
4. Press ENTER. The new program name is inserted in the Program
Manager.

Choosing Program Names

A name cannot be longer than 60 alphanumeric characters. The CNC
displays program names as they were entered. No two programs can
have the same name. The CNC automatically places the .G extension
after the name.

Selecting a Program for Running

You must select a program before you can run it. Only one program can
be selected at a time.
To Select a program:
1. In the Program Manager, use ARROWS to highlight a program.
2. Press Select (F6). The CNC loads the program. The name of the
currently loaded program displays in the Program Name field at the
bottom left of the screen.

Selecting a Program for Editing

When the required program is highlighted, press Edit (F8) to activate the
Editor.

NOTE: If the Program Editor is activated in Manual Mode, the Editor

opens the loaded program.

To select a program for editing:

1. In the Program Manager, use ARROWS to highlight the program name.
2. Press Edit (F8). The Program Editor activates. The CNC displays
the listing for the selected program.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 10-7

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Management

Deleting a Program
To delete a program:
1. Highlight a program in the Program Manager.
2. Press Delete (F3). The CNC prompts to confirm the deletion and the
soft keys change for your response.
3. Press Yes (F1). The CNC deletes the selected program.
– or –
Press No (F3). The Delete command is canceled.

NOTE: Deleting a program automatically deletes the associated .S file.

Utils Function Pop-Up Menus

Figure 10-6, Utils Pop-up Menu

10-8 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Management

On the Program screen, select Utils (F9) to display the Utilities pop-up
menu. Refer to Figure 10-6, Utils Pop-up Menus. Refer to Table 10-3.
Table 10-3, Utils (F9) Pop-up Menu Description
Label Description
Copy To copy programs to another drive or to floppy disks. See “Copying
Programs from/to Other Directories.” Copies currently highlighted file
and files that were previously marked.
o Expanded by using the right ARROW
o Compressed by using the left ARROW
o Traverse the directory using up and down ARROW keys
o Go to parent directory of current directory by using the ARROW keys
o Display directory name in status area at bottom, which defaults to
current drive
o If copying to current location, need to create file with “copy of …”
o If copying to a new location and file exists, need to prompt to
overwrite: OK (F1) and Cancel (F10)
Move To move a program. Copies currently highlighted file and files that
were previously marked.
o Expanded by using the right ARROW
o Compressed by using the left ARROW
o Traverse the directory using up and down ARROW keys
o Go to parent directory of current directory by using the ARROW keys
o Display directory name in status area at bottom, which defaults to
current drive
o If copying to a new location and file exists, need to prompt to
overwrite: OK (F1) and Cancel (F10)
o Deletes source file after copying
Rename Use to rename a program. See “Renaming Programs.”
Mark All To mark all programs in the Program Manager. See “Marking and
Unmarking Programs.”
UnMark All To unmark all marked programs. See “Marking and Unmarking
Programs.”

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 10-9

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Management

Copying Programs from/to Other Directories

Use Copy to copy programs to or from another directory, such as a
subdirectory or a Universal Serial Bus (USB). Refer to Figure 10-6, Utils
Pop-up Menu.
To copy programs to or from another directory:
1. In the Program Manager, highlight the program or mark all programs
to be copied.
2. Press Utils (F9) to display the Utils pop-up menu (refer to
Figure 10-6, Utils Pop-up Menu and Table 10-3, Utils Soft Keys
from Program Screen). Select Copy to display the Select Copy to
destination: pull up menu.
3. Highlight the target drive, and press ENTER. The CNC copies marked
programs to the target drive.
– or –
Type the new location (complete path), and press ENTER. The
program is copied into the new location.

Moving Programs from/to Other Directories

To move a program copies the currently highlighted file or files that were
previously marked to or from another directory, such as a subdirectory or
a Universal Serial Bus (USB). Refer to Figure 10-6, Utils Pop-up Menu.
To move programs to or from another directory:
1. In the Program Manager, highlight the file or mark all files to be
moved.
2. Press Utils (F9) to display the Utils pop-up menu (refer to
Figure 10-6, Utils Pop-up Menu and Table 10-3, Utils Soft Keys
from Program Screen). Select Move to display the Select Move to
destination: pull up menu.
3. Highlight the target drive, and press ENTER. The CNC moves marked
programs to the target drive.
– or –
Type the new location (complete path), and press ENTER. The
program is moved into the new location.

10-10 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Management

Renaming Programs
To rename a program:
1. In the Program Manager, highlight a program.
2. Press Utils (F9) to display the Utils pop-up menu (refer to
Figure 10-6, Utils Pop-up Menu and Table 10-3, Utils Soft Keys
from Program Screen). Select Rename, and press ENTER.
3. Type new program name, and press ENTER. The new name replaces
the old name.

Marking and Unmarking Programs

You can perform some operations on more than one program at a time.
The Program Manager enables you to select (Mark) one, some, or all of
the programs in the USER listing.
The following topics are described:
‰ Marking Programs
‰ Unmarking Marked Programs
‰ Marking All Programs
‰ Unmarking All Marked Programs

Marking Programs
To mark a program:
1. Highlight a program in the Program Manager.
2. Select Mark (SHIFT + F6).
3. Press ARROWS to highlight another program in the list, and select
Mark (SHIFT + F6).
4. Repeat these steps to mark as many program as required.

Unmarking Marked Programs

To unmark a program:
1. Highlight any marked program, and press ENTER. The program is no
longer marked. The CNC unmarks the program in the Program
Manager. (The Program is no longer highlighted.)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 10-11

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Program Management

Marking All Programs

To mark all programs in the Program Manager:
1. In the Program Manager, press Utils (F9) to display the pop-up menu.
Refer to Figure 10-6, Utils Pop-up Menu and Table 10-3, Utils Soft
Keys from Program Screen). Select Mark All.
2. The CNC displays a Select a Filter for Marking Files pull up menu
and another pull up menu with the file extensions. Highlight the file
extension that you want to mark all.
3. Press ENTER to mark all of the files in the file extension you have
highlighted.

Unmarking All Marked Programs

To unmark all programs in the Program Manager:
1. In the Program Manager, select Utils (F9) to display the pop-up
menu. Refer to Figure 10-6, Utils Pop-up Menu and Table 10-3,
Utils Soft Keys from Program Screen). Select UnMark All.
2. Press ENTER to unmark all of the marked files.
3. The CNC unmarks all programs in the Program Manager. (Programs
are no longer highlighted.)

Deleting Groups of Programs

1. From the Program Manager, mark all of the programs to be deleted.
2. Select Delete. The CNC prompts to confirm the deletion and the soft
keys change for your response.
3. Press Yes (F1) to delete the selected programs.
– or –
Press No (F2) to cancel.

Creating Subdirectories
Press Create Dir (SHIFT + F2) to create subdirectories. Ensure that the
CNC is in the desired drive before you create a subdirectory.

[Default: V:\USER]
To create a subdirectory:
1. Press Create Dir (SHIFT + F2).
2. The CNC prompts for the new subdirectory. Type the subdirectory
name, and press ENTER. The CNC creates the subdirectory.

10-12 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

Section 11 - Running Programs

NOTE: Verify all programs in Draw before you run them. Refer to
“Section 8 - Viewing Programs with Draw.”

There are two modes of programmed operation:

Single-Step Mode Runs a program one block at a time.
Automatic Mode Runs a program automatically, without pausing.

The screens for both modes resemble the Manual screen. Use the soft
key labels to distinguish between modes. The CNC highlights the label
for the active mode.
You must load a program before you can run it to cut a part. Load
programs from the Program Manager. Refer to “Section 10 - Program
Management” for information on how to load programs.
The Manual Data Input Mode (MDI) enables you to program a few quick
moves without having to create and save a program. MDI is usually used
for manual operation. It is available only in Manual Mode.
All programming tools, moves, and cycles are available in MDI.
Refer to “Section 3 - Manual Operation and Machine Setup” for additional
information.

The following topics are described in this section:

‰ Running a Program One Step at a Time
‰ Position Display Modes
‰ Automatic Program Execution
‰ Clearing a Halted Program
‰ Using Draw While Running Programs
‰ Parts Counter and Program Timer
‰ Jog/Return

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 11-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

Running a Program One Step at a Time

Single-Step Mode runs a program block by block. This mode enables
you to step through the program and verify the moves before you cut an
actual part. Refer to Figure 11-1.
To run a program in Single-Step Mode:
1. Go to the Program Manager, select a program and press Select (F6)
to load the required program.
2. Press Exit (F10) to return to the Manual screen.
3. In Manual Mode, press Single Step (F5) to activate Single-Step
Mode.
4. Press START to execute each block or motion.

NOTE: In Auto Mode, press Single Step (F5) to activate Single-Step

Mode.

SINGLE STEP

Figure 11-1, Single Step Screen

11-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

Table 11-1 describes the active soft keys on the Single Step screen and
Auto screen (refer to Figure 11-2, Auto Screen).
Table 11-1, Single-Step and Auto Screen Soft Keys

Label Soft Key Function

Draw F1 Activates the Draw function
Jog F2 Displays the Jog screen
Block F3 Activates the Block Search. Refer to
search “Using Block Search to Select a Starting
Block.”
Manual F4 Activates Manual Mode from Auto and
Single Step
Single Step F5 Changes to Single-Step Mode
Auto F6 Changes to Auto Mode. Use to run part
programs for production.
Tool F9 Activates the Tool page.

Press the SHIFT key on the keyboard to display the Single-Step and Auto
Mode Shift screen (refer to Figure 11-2, Auto Screen). Refer to
Table 11-2.
Table 11-2, Single-Step and Auto Mode Screen Secondary Soft Keys
Label Soft Key Function
Msgs (SHIFT + F1) Displays the last 10 messages, both old
(already read) and new (not yet read)
BG Prog (SHIFT + F3) Background programming displays
Figure 10-1, Program Screen and
enables to change the program while it
is running.
Parts (SHIFT + F4) Activates the Parts Counter pop-up
Counter window to reset the New Value.
OSC (SHIFT + F7) Oscilloscope. For details see 6000i
CNC Technical Manual, P/N 627787-
21.
OLM (SHIFT + F8) On-line Monitor. For details see 6000i
CNC Technical Manual, P/N 627787-
21.

The following topics are described:

‰ Using Single-Step Mode
‰ Holding or Canceling a Single-Step Run
‰ Single-Step Execution of Selected Program Blocks

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 11-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

Using Single-Step Mode

When Single-Step is active, Single Step (F5) highlights.
• In Single-Step Mode, the CNC holds before it executes each block.
Press START to execute each block.

Holding or Canceling a Single-Step Run

Press HOLD to halt the execution of the program. Press START to restart a
program that is on hold. Press MANUAL (F4) to cancel a program that is
on hold. When you cancel a program, the CNC terminates tool
compensation and canned cycles. All other modal settings remain active.

Single-Step Execution of Selected Program Blocks

The following topics are described:
‰ Using Arrow Keys to Select a Starting Block
‰ Using Block Search to Select a Starting Block
‰ Switching from Single-Step Mode to Auto Mode

Using Arrow Keys to Select a Starting Block

Select the starting block before you start program.
1. Load the required program and return to the Manual screen.
2. Press Single Step (F5) to activate Single-Step Mode.
3. Press Block Search (F3), and then press Scroll (F9).
4. Highlight the desired starting block using the ARROW keys.
5. Press Return (F10).
6. Press START to execute the next block or motion.

11-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

Using Block Search to Select a Starting Block

Use Block search to locate a specific block number or entered text. The
CNC highlights the first block found that contains the specified
information. Block search only searches forward in the program. Begin
the search from the starting block to search through the entire program.
1. From the Program Manager, load the required program and return to
the Manual screen.
2. Press Single Step (F5) or Auto (F6).
3. Press Block search (F3). The CNC prompts for search number or
text. Or press Goto (F4) to search for a line in the program.
4. Type the required number or text, and press ENTER. The CNC runs
the search and highlights the first block it finds that contains the
number or text.
5. Press START to run the program from the highlighted block.

NOTE: After you start the program, it executes normally.

Table 11-3 describes the active soft keys on the Block Search screen.
Table 11-3, Block Search Screen Soft Keys

Label Soft Key Function

Find F1 Moves the program display one page backward.
previous
Find next F2 Moves the program display one page forward.

Match case F3 Displays the Find pop-up with the message Find what:
and an entry field for you to type the case-sensitive string
that you want.
Goto F4 Displays the Goto pop-screen with the message, Go to
line: and an entry field.
Start of F5 The cursor returns to the first block of the program. See
Prog “Section 6, Advancing to the First or Last Block of a
Program.”
End of F6 The cursor advances to the last block of the program. See
Prog “Section 6, Advancing to the First or Last Block of a
Program.”
Find F8 Displays the Find screen. The Find pop-up screen
displays with the message, Find what: and an entry field.
For the Find screen soft keys, refer to Table 11-4, Block
Search>Find (F8) Screen Soft Keys.
Scroll F9 Scrolls the display

Return F10 Return to the Single-Step Screen.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 11-5

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

Table 11-4 describes the active soft keys on the Block Search>Find
screen.

Table 11-4, Block Search>Find (F8) Screen Soft Keys

Label Soft Key Function

Find F1 Moves the program display one page
previous backward.

Find next F2 Moves the program display one page

forward.
Match case F4 Displays the Find pop-up with the
message Find what: and an entry field
for you to type the case-sensitive string
that you want.
Return F10 Return to the Block Search Screen.

Switching from Single-Step Mode to Auto Mode

To switch from Single-Step Mode to Auto Mode:
1. In Single-Step Mode, press Auto (F6) to complete the current move,
then hold.
2. Press START to restart the CNC and run the rest of the program in
Auto Mode.

Position Display Modes

Position Displays for X, Y, Z, and U show:
Program Movement to the programmed (commanded)
position in reference to Part Zero or datum.

Distance to Go Distance to go to reach the commanded

position.

Automatic Program Execution

The Auto Mode is the CNC’s production mode. All or any part of a
program can be executed in the Auto Mode. Put the CNC in Auto Mode
from either the Manual or Single-Step Modes.
The Auto screen is similar to a Manual screen, but has fewer soft keys.
The Auto (F6) soft key label highlights when the Auto Mode is active.
Refer to Figure 11-2, Auto Screen.

11-6 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

To run a program in Auto Mode:

1. In the Program Manager, load the required program and return to the
Manual screen.
2. Press Auto (F6) to activate Automatic Mode.
3. Press START. The CNC begins to execute program blocks.

Program
Position
Display Area

Distance to Go
Position
Display Area

Machine
Status
Display Area

Program Area

Active Soft Key

(Highlighted)
AUTO Screen

Figure 11-2, Auto Screen

The following topics are described:

‰ Holding or Canceling an Auto Run
‰ Starting at a Specific Block

Holding or Canceling an Auto Run

Press HOLD to halt the program. To restart a program on hold, press
START. To cancel a program that is on hold, press MANUAL (F4). The
CNC cancels any active tool compensation and canned cycles. Modal
settings (such as Absolute Mode or Inch Mode) remain active.

Starting at a Specific Block

The following topic is described:
‰ Using Arrow Keys to Select a Starting Block

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 11-7

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

Using Arrow Keys to Select Starting Block

1. From the Program Manager, select the required program and return to
the Auto screen.
2. Press Block Search (F3), and then press Scroll (F9).
3. Highlight the required starting block using the ARROW keys.
4. Press Return (F10).
5. Press START to begin automatic program execution from the selected
block.

Clearing a Halted Program

When the CNC encounters a program block that generates an error, it
displays a Warning or error message and halts the program. Go back to
Manual Mode to correct the problem.
A program error could generate more than one message. Refer to
“Section 2 - CNC Console and Software Basics” for instructions on
reviewing undisplayed error messages.
After you correct the program, load and restart it at the appropriate block.

Using Draw While Running Programs

In Real-Time Draw, the CNC displays moves as it executes them. The
active Single Step (F5) or Auto (F6) highlights as does Draw (F1). Refer
to Figure 11-3, Draw (Real-Time Mode).
All display options in Draw Simulation Mode are available in the Real-
Time Draw Mode.

To activate Draw while running a program:

1. Load the required program and put the CNC in Single Step or Auto
Mode.
2. Press Draw (F1) to activate the Real-Time Draw screen and change
the soft keys.
3. Press START to run the program. The CNC displays moves as it
executes them.

11-8 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

DRAW REAL TIME

Figure 11-3, Draw (Real-Time Mode)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 11-9

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

Parts Counter and Program Timer

The CNC keeps track of program run-time (Timer) and the number of
completed parts (Parts). The CNC displays Run-time in hours, minutes,
and seconds. These two features are available in the Manual, Auto, and
Single-Step Modes. Refer to Figure 11-4.

Number of Completed Parts

TIMER

Program Run Time Accumulated

Program Run Time
Figure 11-4, Program Timer and Parts Counter

The Timer begins timing the program run when you press START and
stops when it encounters an M2 block. Therefore, ensure that an M2
block has been included at the end of the program.
The timer pauses if the CNC holds. The timer stops if you switch to
Manual Mode. If you re-run the program before going back to Manual,
the total time for all runs is displayed. The Timer values remain the same
until you switch to Auto or Single-Step Mode again. Then, the timers
reset to zero.
The Parts counter starts at zero and increments by one every time the
CNC runs an M2 block. Therefore, ensure that an M2 block has been
included at the end of the program. The CNC continues to count parts
when you re-run the program in Auto or Single-Step. The parts counter
value is maintained when you switch to Manual Mode, but resets to 0
when you switch back to Auto or Single-Step Mode.

Refer to Figure 11-1, Single Step Screen. Press

(SHIFT + Parts Counter (F4)) to display the Part Counter pop-up window.
Type the New Value to display the new value in the Parts field.

11-10 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

Jog/Return
Jog/Return is a function in the CNC that allows the tool to be removed
from the cut while in Auto or Single-Step Modes, without switching the
CNC to Manual. It has an ‘automatic return’ capability that returns the
tool to its departure point.
It is generally used to check the tool’s wear and to change a cutting
tool/offset in case of tool breakage or excessive wear in the middle of an
operation, or inspect a critical dimension or cut.

The following topics are described:

‰ Initiating Jog/Return
‰ Operations Allowed While “In” Jog/Return
‰ Jog/Return Soft Keys
‰ EXAMPLES:
‰ Notes on Jog/Return

Initiating Jog/Return
The Jog/Return function may be initiated from the Auto or Single-Step
modes of the CNC.
To use the Jog/Return feature, the HOLD key must be pressed first, before
pressing JOG (F2). This ensures that the machine cannot be stopped
accidentally while cutting by pressing JOG (F2). In this way, the axes
must be halted before the Jog/Return feature may be used.

Operations Allowed While “In” Jog/Return

Several motions/functions are allowed after the CNC has been put into
“Jog/Return”. The axes may be moved using the Manual Panel or by the
soft keys. Manual Date Input (MDI) moves are not allowed.
Any Tool-Length Offset can be changed while in Jog/Return mode.
Diameter offsets SHOULD NOT be altered with in Jog/Return mode (if the
current diameter offset is altered, the new value DOES NOT take affect
until the next time it is activated). ONLY THE CURRENT TOOL LENGTH
OFFSET should be altered with in this special mode. In this way, if a tool
breaks while in an operation, the user may replace the tool, re-set the tool
length offset, and “return” the tool to the cut without aborting the program.
This is very useful and saves a great deal of time, if a tool breaks while in
the middle of a canned cycle or an extremely long cut.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 11-11

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

Jog/Return Soft Keys

After the axes are halted by the HOLD key, and JOG (F2) is pressed, a
new strip of soft keys related to the Jog/Return function is displayed:

Restart Pos (F1) Sends the axes to a pre-determined point, the

position before halted by the HOLD key.
Tool (F7) Activates the Tool screen
Handwheel (F8) Enable or disables handwheel moves
Return (F10) Return to the Single Step or Auto screen

The following topics are described:

‰ TOOL (F7)
‰ HANDWHEEL (F8)
‰ RETURN (F10)

TOOL (F7)
Tool (F7) when pressed displays the CNC’s Tool Page. This allows the
operator to make a change to the tool length or wear offsets.
If these values in the Tool Page are changed, the new values are not
invoked until that tool is (re-) activated in the part program.

HANDWHEEL (F8)
Enable or disables handwheel moves.

RETURN (F10)
Once any axis is moved, the Restart Pos (F1) highlights and Return
(F10) grays out. Return (F10) can only be used if no axis has changed
position and after pressing Return (F10); you simply press START to
continue.
If any axis has been moved in the jog mode, Restart Pos (F1) highlights
and when you are done, you press Restart Pos (F1) and a new set of
soft keys are displayed. Use these soft keys to return the axes moved in
the order that you want. Once all axes are returned, the control
automatically switches back.

11-12 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

EXAMPLES:
The following are typical scenarios as to how and when to use the
Jog/Return function. Assume the CNC is running the program in Auto or
Single-Step Modes.
SITUATION 1:

SITUATION1

Figure 11-5, Drilling Illustration

Refer to Figure 11-5. The tool is drilling in an X+ row of holes in a

workpiece. The tool becomes dull and breaks.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 11-13

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

Keystrokes/operations:
1. HOLD

2. JOG (F2)
3. Raise the Z-axis using jogging keys
4. Press SPINDLE OFF to stop spindle
5. Remove drill from holder
6. Place new drill in holder
7. Jog tool over workpiece with Manual Panel
8. Jog tool down to offset surface
9. TOOL (F9)
10. TEACH (F8)
11. EXIT (F10)
12. Jog Z+ with Manual Panel
13. Restart spindle by pressing SPINDLE FWD
14. Press Restart Pos (F1) and use soft keys (F1–F4) to return
the axes to their positions
15. Press START to continue program
The axes return to the position they were jogged from when the
Jog/Return function was initiated, in the described path.
SITUATION 2:

SITUATION2

Figure 11-6, Cutting Illustration

Refer to Figure 11-6. The tool is feeding along a Y– cut on the right side
of a workpiece. The tool becomes clogged with materials and is no
longer able to cut.

11-14 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Running Programs

Keystrokes/operations:
1. HOLD

2. JOG (F2)
3. Press SPINDLE OFF to stop spindle
4. Remove end mill from holder
5. Place new end mill in holder
6. Jog tool over workpiece with Manual Panel
7. Jog tool down to offset surface
8. TOOL (F9)
9. TEACH (F8)
10. EXIT (F10)
11. Jog Z+ with Manual Panel
12. Restart spindle by pressing SPINDLE FWD
13. Press Restart Pos (F1) and use soft keys (F1–F4) to return
the axes to their positions
14. Press START to continue program
The axes return to the position they were jogged from when the
Jog/Return function was initiated, in the described path.

Notes on Jog/Return
• Jog/Return is generally only used in trouble situations, where a tool
breaks or a tolerance must be checked. It allows the program to be
interrupted in Auto or Single-Step mode, without having to switch to
Manual.
• The HOLD key must be pressed prior to JOG.
• Manual Panel moves are allowed while in Jog/Return.
• Manual Data Input (MDI) moves are not allowed.
• Tool length or wear offset on the tool may be altered while in
Jog/Return. However, the new values do not take effect until the tool
is reactivated again in the part program.
• The mode can be cancelled at any time by pressing F4 (Manual).
• The Manual Panel is fully active (Handwheel also if present).

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 11-15

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N627 785-22 - M Functions

Section 12 - S and M Functions

This section covers S and M code formats. Refer to Table 12-1. The
codes are included in the part program or activated in Manual Mode.

Table 12-1, S and M Codes

Code Function
S (Spindle Speed) Commands spindle speeds (S).
M (Miscellaneous) Performs miscellaneous (M) functions such
as spindle ON/OFF and coolant ON/OFF.

The following topics are described in this section:

‰ Speed Spindle Control (S-Function)
‰ Miscellaneous Functions (M-Code)
‰ Control M-Codes
‰ Order of Execution

Speed Spindle Control (S-Function)

Format: Sxxxxx
Spindle speed is programmed via S-Code. The RPM range of the
machine determines the S-Code range. Refer to Table 12-3, Control
M-Codes.

In determining spindle speeds there also may be gear ranges selected by

M-Codes. For example, you may be able to select four ranges of speed
by programming the corresponding M-Code for the required range. The
machine tool builder specifies the range. Check your machine tool
manual for details.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 12-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - M Functions

Miscellaneous Functions (M-Code)

Miscellaneous codes control a variety of machine tool functions. Refer to
Table 12-2. The machine builder assigns them. Be familiar with the
M-Codes available on your machine-control combination. M-function
availability varies from one machine to another. Refer to your machine
tool manual for a complete list of M-Codes.

Table 12-2, M-Code Controlled Functions

M-Code Function
M3 or M03 Spindle Forward.
M4 or M04 Spindle Reverse.
M5 or M05 Spindle Off.
M6 or M06 Tool Mount.
M8 or M08 Coolant On.
M9 or M09 Coolant Off.

12-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N627 785-22 - M Functions

Control M-Codes
Control M-Codes execute or alter certain CNC functions, such as
program end, subprogram call, mirror image, etc.
These M-Codes are part of the CNC software. To use them, write the
appropriate M-Code into the program. Refer to Table 12-3.
Table 12-3, Control M-Codes
M-Code Function
M0 or M00 Program Stop Mode. Program stops indefinitely.
Press START to resume.
M1 or M01 Optional Program Stop. Optional program stops
indefinitely. Press START to resume.
M2 or M02 End of Program. At M02, the program stops and
returns to the first program block.
M19 Spindle Orientation. (Followed by the C word for a
spindle orient to a specific angle [i.e., M19 C45 orients
the spindle to 45 degrees].)
M30 Jump to New Program. Return to other program. M30
O75 programmed, as the last block of a main program
returns the CNC to program #75. O75 must be in the
same file.
M98 Call SubProgram. A block in the main program with
M98 P100 executes subprogram 100. O100 must be in
the file after the end of the main program.
M99 End of SubProgram. M99 ends a subprogram and
returns to the main program at the block preceding the
last executed program call.
M105 Dry Run, All Axes. Program M105 in a program file or
in MDI to set Dry Run Mode. CNC executes all feed
moves at a rate set by the builder. It enables you to run
programs through quickly to check for mistakes.
M107disables Dry Run.
NOTE: Making and saving a change to the Setup Utility
cancels M105.
M106 Dry Run, No Z Axis. M106 in a program file or in MDI
sets Dry Run (No Z) Mode. All feed moves are executed
at a rate set by the builder, and all Z moves are ignored
during the dry-run. This enables you to run through a
program quickly, without Z-axis movement. M107
disables Dry Run, No Z Axis.
NOTE: Making and saving a change to the Setup Utility
cancels M106.
M107 Dry Run, Off - Cancel M105 and M106. This returns
the CNC to normal operating mode.
SPEED Spindle Speed. Commands spindle speeds (S).

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 12-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - M Functions

Order of Execution
The order of execution for available codes is as follows:
T, M, S, F, G, and XYZ (M98 P {sub call} is the exception)

NOTE: Subprogram call (M98 Pn) always executes last.

12-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Machine Software and Peripherals Installation

Section 13 - Machine Software and Peripherals Installation

The following topics are described in this section:
‰ Keyboard Installation (Option)
‰ Keypad Equivalent Keyboard Keys
‰ Peripherals Supported

Keyboard Installation (Option)

The machine builder determines whether the system supports a keyboard
option. If the system supports a keyboard, plug the keyboard USB
connector into the computer chassis.

WARNING: There is no keyboard equivalent for the E-STOP.

Therefore, emergency shutdowns (E-STOP) cannot be performed via
keyboard.

NOTE: Industrial grade keyboards are recommended for shop

environments.
Keypad Equivalent Keyboard Keys
Refer to Table 13-1.
Table 13-1, Keyboard Equivalents
Keyboard Keystroke
Function CNC Key Face Equivalent
CLEAR (ALT + C)
– or –
DELETE
ARROWS ARROWS

ENTER ENTER

X (axis) (X)

Y (axis) (Y)

Z (axis) (Z)

U (axis)
(U)

START (ALT + S)

HOLD (ALT+ H)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 13-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Machine Software and Peripherals Installation

Peripherals Supported
The 6000i also supports other Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices:

• USB Memory Sticks

• USB Floppy Drives

• USB CD–ROM Drives

• USB Mouse

13-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Off-line Software Installation

Section 14 - Off-line Software

The off-line software is compatible with **Microsoft® **Windows® XP
Operating System.
The hard disk drive must have a minimum of 1.5 GB of space available.
The following topics are described in this section:
‰ Running and Shutting Down

Contact your local ANILAM dealer or Sales office to obtain off-line

software.

Running and Shutting Down

The software automatically starts running when the control is powered-up.
When it is time to turn-off the machine the CNC software must be
shutdown first. This is necessary to make sure that any data that may be
in RAM is saved to the hard-drive. The shutdown process is very easy;
pressing Shut Down (SHIFT + F10) displays the Shut Down screen with
the following soft keys. Refer to Table 14-1.
Table 14-1, Shut Down Screen Soft Keys

Label Soft Key Description

Shut Down F1 Confirm the shutdown.
Cancel F2 Cancel the shutdown.

Follow the same procedure to shutdown the 6000i off-line as on the

machine. If for some reason the 6000i off-line stops responding, try using
the “Shutdown 6000i” option in the program group. (Left-click on Start at
the bottom-right of the Windows display, select All Programs, highlight
Anilam, and select SHUTDOWN 6000I.) Refer to Figure 14-1.

Figure 14-1, 6000i Off-line Program Group

As the software starts to come up (both machine and off-line), a counter
is displayed showing the progress of the start-up sequence.
The counter reaches into the 70s when the main application screen (i.e.:
manual mode) is displayed. At this point, a homing sequence must be
done by pressing Home (F4) and START [or for the off-line (ALT + S)]. For
off-line, use (ALT + H) to Hold the program.

-----
** Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 14-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Off-line Software Installation

The off-line software has a desktop icon or program group entry as shown
in Figure 14-1, 6000i Off-line Program Group.
Select either 6000i Off-Line option (desktop icon or program group entry)
to start the software.

14-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC Programming and Operations Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Four-Axis Programming

Section 15 - Four-Axis Programming

The following topics are described in this section:
‰ Axis Types
‰ Rotary Axis Programming Conventions
‰ Programming Examples

Axis Types

6000i-4X
6400M
The machine builder sets up the fourth-axis as linear or rotary axes. The
three basic axes are X, Y, and Z. The additional axis is designated as U
(6000i-4X). This section discusses the rotary axis option in detail.
Below are the programming formats for linear or rotary additional axes:
Linear: Program as Feed Mode (G1) or Rapid (G0) moves. Only rapid
and linear feed moves can be programmed. U can be
programmed along with X, Y, and Z-axis in rapid, linear, and
circular moves. The U-axis is always synchronous to the XYZ
moves.

Rotary: Program rotary moves in degrees. The typical resolution is

0.001 degrees. Minutes and seconds cannot be programmed.
Therefore, you must convert minutes and seconds to a
decimal value.
Conversion formula for minutes, seconds to decimal degrees:
Minutes to decimal: min/60 = decimal degrees.
Example: 15 min/60 = 0.25 degrees
Seconds to decimal: sec/3600 = decimal degrees
Example: 30 sec/3600 = 0.008 degrees
Example:
5 deg. 30 min. 15 sec. =
5 + (30/60) + (15/3600) =
5 + 0.5 + 0.004 =
5.504 degrees
When the U-axis is programmed alone without an X, Y, or Z linear move,
you must program a feedrate for the U-axis in degrees per minute (dpm).

Format: FU 500.0 = 500 dpm for the U axis.

FU is also allowed when the U-axis is linear. A federate is programmed
in in/min or mm/min.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 15-1

November 2009
 CNC Programming and Operations Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Four-Axis Programming

Rotary Axis Programming Conventions

A rotary axis (typically U) programs differently based on the setting of the
(Axes->PhysicalAxis->U->CfgRollOver>shortestDistance) parameter,
which is determined by the builder. The default for this parameter is off;
in which case, the U-axis behaves like a linear axis. If set to on, the
behavior of the rotary axis (U) is described below.
If programming the U-axis in Absolute:
The rotary axis never rotates more than 180 degrees in one move. So, if
a move of greater than 180 degrees is programmed, the control resolves
the number to a positive value less than 360 degrees and move to that
target, taking the shortest distance (always less than 180 degrees). A
move of exactly 180 degrees always moves positive and a move of
exactly 360 degrees does not move at all.
If programming the U-axis in Incremental:
The rotary axis moves the exact amount of degrees programmed and in
the direction indicated with the plus or minus sign. The display resets to
zero every time 360 degrees is crossed so that the highest value in the
U-axis display is 359.999 degrees depending on the displayed resolution.
Feedrate display is always vectored.

Programming Examples
All programming examples are for 4-axis machining with the rotary table
mounted on the left end of the mill table, with the centerline of the rotary
axis parallel to the X-axis. The face of the rotary table faces X+.
The examples contain both milling and drilling applications. Modal cycles
G81 to G89 and G66 can be executed at rotary locations as in XYZ
locations. Non-modal canned cycles can be executed at rotary locations.
Position the rotary axis before you execute a non-modal canned cycle.

The following topics are described:

‰ Example 1: Drill
‰ Example 2: Mill
‰ Example 3: Mill

15-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC Programming and Operations Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Four-Axis Programming

Example 1: Drill
Mount the fourth axis as described above. Mount a part 6-inches wide
and 8-inches long on the face of the rotary table. shortestDistance is
set to off.
Table 15-1 shows a drilling example. You must drill ten 0.375-inch holes
36-degrees apart, 1-inch deep, 0.75-inches in from the end of the
cylinder. Then, starting at X-2 U0, drill a spiral series of holes 36-degrees
and X-0.500 inches apart each. Set X0 at the right end, Y0 at the
cylinder's centerline, U0 at a pre-milled keyway on the cylinder. Measure
tool offsets from the top of the cylinder, with Y-axis at 0.
Table 15-1, Four-Axis Example 1
* 4-AX-DRL
* SET shortestDistance to “off”
G90 G70 G0 M5
G28 Z0
G53 O1
G0 X0 Y0 U0
T1 *#3 CENTERDRILL
M3 S2400
G81 Z-.22 R.1 F12
M98 P1
T2 * 3/8" DRILL
M3 S1850
G53 O1 *RE-ACTIVATE OFFSET CANCELED IN SUBR #1
G87 Z-1 R.1 F14 I.18 J.012 K.1 U.3334
M98 P1
M2

O1 * ROTARY HOLE LOCATIONS

G0 G90 X-.75 Y0 U0
LOOP 9
G0 G91 U36
END
G0 G90 X-2 U0
LOOP 9
G0 G91 X-.5 U-36
END
G80
M5
G0 G90 G28 Z0 *CANCELS G53 OFFSET
X0 Y0 U0
M99

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 15-3

November 2009
 CNC Programming and Operations Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Four-Axis Programming

Example 2: Mill
Mount the fourth axis as described above. Mount a part 3 inches in
diameter and 5 inches long on the face of the rotary table. The part has a
0.25-inch radius turned on the end. shortestDistance is set to off.
Table 15-2 shows a milling example only. Assume that a series of six 0.25-
inch wide grooves must be milled 60-degrees apart, 0.25-inch deep at the
start, tapering up to 0.125-inch deep and rotating 15 degrees at the far end.
The groove must follow the end contour of the part (radius). Set X0 at the
right end, Y0 at the cylinder centerline, U0 at a pre-milled keyway on the
cylinder. Set the tool offset so that the centerline of the 0.25-inch ball-end
mill is at the centerline of the 3-inch diameter part (with Y axis at 0).
Table 15-2, Four-Axis Example 2
* 4-AX-MILL
* SET shortestDistance TO “off”
G90 G70 G0 M5
G28 Z0
G53 O1
G0 X0 Y0 U0
T1 *.25 BALL-END-MILL
S2400
M3
M98 P1 L6
G90 G0 M5
G28 Z0
G0 X0 Y0 U0
M2

O1 * GROOVE
G90 G0 X.225
G0 Z2.625
G1 X.125 F5
G18 G91 G2 X-.25 Z.25 I-.25 K0 U-2.
G17 G1 X-3.25 Z.125 U-13
G90 G0 Z3.225
G0 X.225
G91 G0 U-45
M99

15-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC Programming and Operations Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Four-Axis Programming

Example 3: Mill
Mount a fourth axis as described above. Mount a part 4-inches in
diameter and 8-inches long on the face of the rotary table. Support the
part on the X+ end by a live center. The part has a 0.25-inch, 45-degree
chamfer on one end. shortestDistance is set to on. This prevents the
need to unwind the U-axis, saving operation time.

Table 15-3 shows a thread-milling example. Assume that a 4-8 UN 2A

thread must be milled from the right end, 6-inches long. The tool is
tapered to conform to the thread. Set X0 at the right end, Y0 at the
cylinder's centerline, U0 at a pre-milled keyway on the cylinder. Measure
the tool offset from the top of the part (with Y axis at 0).
The X start position is one pitch (0.125 in.) to the right of X0, so that the
tool enters the work smoothly.
Table 15-3, Four-Axis Example 3
* 4-AX-THD
* SET shortestDistance TO “on"
G90 G70 G0 M5
G28 Z0
G53 O1
G0 X0 Y0 U0
T1 * SPECIAL THD-TOOL
S3500
M3
G0 X.125 Y0 U0
Z.1
G1 Z-.075 F20
* SET shortestDistance TO “on"
* THIS IS TO PREVENT THE NEED TO UNWIND U
* U AXIS MOVE IS
* (360 X 8 PITCH X 6" LONG)
* + 360 FOR 1 TURN X.125 LEAD-IN
* U MOVE WILL BE 17,640.00 DEGREES
* OR 49 TURNS
G91 G1 X-6.125 U((360*8*6)+360)
G90 G0 M5
G28 Z0
X0 Y0 U0
M2

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 15-5

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

Section 16 - DXF Converter Feature

The DXF Converter feature allows information in a Drawing Exchange
Format (.DXF extension) to be used to create a CNC conversational
(.M extension) or G-Code (.G extension) file.
Contours and drill hole locations in the DXF file can be put in the CNC file
in the form of subroutines, using a mouse and “point and click” approach.
The DXF Converter feature creates a CNC program that must be edited
to be usable, but most of the program creation is already done.
The following topics are described in this section:
‰ Requirements
‰ Entry to the DXF Converter
‰ CNC Code
‰ Mouse Operations
‰ DXF Soft Keys
‰ DXF Entities Supported
‰ Files Created
‰ DXF Examples

Requirements
The following topics are described:
‰ Off-line Software
‰ Machine Software
Off-line Software
The Personal Computer (PC) must have a mouse installed. The Anilam
Off-line Software is required. The Anilam Off-line Software runs in a
Windows environment. (See “Section 14 - Off-line Software.”)

Machine Software
A mouse or other pointing device (for example, track ball) must be
installed to properly operate the DXF converter on the machine.
Depending on the mouse, it may be necessary to have the mouse
connected before turning the CNC on.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 16-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

Entry to the DXF Converter

To open the DXF Converter (off-line software):
1. Open the Anilam Off-line Software
2. Gain access to the Program page, select Program Type: DXF
drawings (*.dxf), and highlight the DXF file you wish to convert. For
details on how to work with the Program page see “Section 10 -
Program Management.”
3. Select the Edit (F8) soft key to open and bring the drawing into the
DXF converter. Refer to Figure 16-1, DXF Screen.

Mouse Pointer Position

X Y
Program Name

Y-axis Scale

X-axis Scale

Message Line

DXF SCRN

Figure 16-1, DXF Screen

The drawing display screen shows the file name in the upper-left border,
the current X Y position of the mouse pointer position at the top center, Y-
axis vertical scale, X-axis horizontal scale, DXF message line, and
several soft keys along the bottom edge. Refer to Table 16-2, Soft Key
Description.

The following topics are described:

‰ Creating Shapes
‰ Contours
‰ Drilling

16-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

Creating Shapes
The part drawing is used to create shapes. Shapes are then output to
CNC programs as subroutines. Converting to DXF edit creates the
subroutines to change the G-Code file. You change the features
(subroutines) attached to the G-Code file. There are many features to
make the drawing screen easier to use. Layers may be turned on or off.
Any area of the screen can be zoomed in or out. Refer to Table 16-1,
Mouse Operations.
Each shape is given a sequential number. The number is displayed on
the screen at the beginning of the shape. Press Select (F1) to toggle
Select mode on. With Select mode on, entities can be selected to be part
of a shape. Left click with the mouse to make selections. When an entity
is selected, it changes color.
When selecting entities, direction is determined by where the mouse
pointer is positioned. If nearer the left side of a line, direction is left to
right.
There are two types of shapes:
• One used for contouring or feed motion
• One for drilling a series of holes
Contours
Pick an entity where the shape is to begin. Pick the last entity in the
shape. All entities that are connected are chained together and change
color to verify this. Some shapes have to be selected one entity at a time.
This is determined by the way the part was drawn in the DXF file.
If an entity is selected that is not connected to the previous one, a
message is displayed, “SHIFT + Select to start a new contour”. This
message means you have selected an unchainable entity, maybe by
mistake. You must press and hold SHIFT if the intent is to start a new
contour. When a chainable entry is selected, a new shape number is
displayed.
Entities in a shape can be un-selected by clicking them again. This
un-selects everything previously selected to that point. To delete a
shape, click on the first entity. The first entity is typically colored differently
for this purpose.

Drilling
When circle entities are selected, they are assumed to be drilling hole
locations. As circles are selected, a dotted line shows the rapid path
between holes. Selecting anything other than a circle, ends the drilling
shape, and produces the message, “SHIFT + Select to start a new
contour”.
If you wish to create a second drilling shape, select the first hole of the
next shape while holding the SHIFT key. This tells the application that you
want to start a new contour.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 16-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

CNC Code
Each shape that is created is made into a subroutine. For each
subroutine, there is a call in the main program. Running the CNC
program in Draw mode allows the tool paths to be seen.
The file must be edited to add tool numbers, feed rates, cutter comp on or
off, and so forth.
The tool paths are only as accurate as the DXF drawing file used.

Mouse Operations
Refer to Table 16-1.

Table 16-1, Mouse Operations

Button Event Function

Left Press–Drag–Release Zoom Window

Right Press–Drag-Release Pan
Left SHIFT + Click New contour signal
Left Click (Select mode on) Select Entity

16-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

DXF Soft Keys

Refer to Table 16-2.

Table 16-2, Soft Key Descriptions

Soft Key Function Description

F1 Toggle Select Select mode must be on when chaining shapes.

Mode
F3 Layers Menu Pop-up menu has:
ƒ All Layers on
ƒ Invert Layers
ƒ Toggle Layers
Layers can be turned on or off as desired.
F5 Display Menu Pop-up menu has: Fit, Window, Half, and Double.
Select the desired display.
F8 Save Creates CNC code. The message, “Successfully
created (filename) (.M or .G).” is displayed when Save
is activated. If no shapes are defined, a warning
message is displayed.
F9 Setup Set the parameters for the DXF conversion.
F10 Exit F10 exits the Setup menus, exits the DXF Converter,
and returns to the Program page.
Be sure to Save (F8) any work done before exiting.
Anything not saved will be lost.
If shapes have been created, a message, “Exit (Y/N)?”
is displayed. This is a reminder to be sure you have
saved your work.

The following topics are described:

‰ Fitting the Display to the Viewing Window
‰ Using the Window Zoom
‰ Halving Display Size
‰ Doubling Display Size

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 16-5

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

Fitting the Display to the Viewing Window

The DXF Converter can automatically scale the display to fit into the
viewing area.
To fit the display in the viewing area:
1. In DXF, press Display (F5). A pop-up menu displays.
2. Highlight Fit, and press ENTER. The pop-up closes and the display
adjusts to fit into the viewing window.
Using the Window Zoom
The DXF Converter allows you to zoom in on any part of the display.
To zoom in on part of the display:
1. In DXF, press Display (F5). A pop-up menu displays.
2. Highlight Window, and press ENTER. A window displays inside the
viewing window.
3. Use the mouse to center the window over the area of interest.
5. Once the window is positioned, press ENTER. The part of the display
framed by the window fills the viewing window.
Halving Display Size
The DXF Converter can reduce the size of the display to half the existing
size.
To reduce the display size by half:

1. In DXF, press Display (F5). A pop-up menu displays.

2. Highlight Half, and press ENTER. The display is half its present size.
Doubling Display Size
The DXF Converter can double the size of the display.
To double the size of the display:
1. In DXF, press Display (F5). A pop-up menu displays.
2. Highlight Double, and press ENTER. The display is twice its present
size.

16-6 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

DXF Entities Supported

See Table 16-3 for the DXF entities supported.

Table 16-3, DXF Entities Supported

Transformation

Information
Chaining
Drawing
Entities

Line X X X X
Point X X X
Circle X X X X
Arc X X X X
Trace X X X
Solid X X X
Text X X
Shape X X
Insert X X
Attdef X X
Attribute X X
Vertex X X X
Polyline X X X X
Line3d X X X X
Face3d X X X

The following topics are described:

‰ Drawing Entities Not Supported

Drawing Entities Not Supported

See Table 16-3. Note that the Extrusion, Dimension, and Viewpoint
entities are not supported. Dimensions may be seen on the displayed
DXF file. Some DWG (an AutoCad drawing file) to DXF converters
convert the dimension entities into lines and arcs, which are supported
entities.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 16-7

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

Files Created
The DXF Converter creates the CNC file, .G for G-Code and .M for
conversational, based on the setting of the Output format parameter.
A file is also created with the extension .sel. This file saves the status of
parameter settings that were used in Setup.

DXF Examples
From the Program listing open the DXF file. Refer to Figure 16-2.

Figure 16-2, Example DXF File

16-8 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

Refer to Figure 16-3. Many unneeded layers have been turned off. The
Figure shows the drill locations and the contour selected (numbered 1
and 2).

ZOOM PART

Figure 16-3, Zoomed Part

The following topics are described:

‰ Unedited Conversational Program Listing
‰ Unedited G-Code Program Listing
‰ Unedited Program Run in Draw
‰ Edited Conversational Program Listing
‰ Edited G-Code Program Listing

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 16-9

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

Unedited Conversational Program Listing

The CNC conversational program is created and must be edited to be
usable. An unedited conversational program created from Figure 16-3,
Zoomed Part follows. See Table 16-4.
– or –
An unedited G-Code program created from the Figure 16-3, Zoomed
Part example is listed in Table 16-5, Unedited G-Code Program
Listing.

Table 16-4, Unedited Conversational Program Listing

* Simple setup for easy testing
Dim Abs
Unit Inch
Feed 80
@ T1 D.01 L.01
Line Z -1.0

* Call sub program(s)

Call 1
Call 2
EndMain

* Sub program definition(s) ...

Sub 1
Rapid X 2.51037 Y 0.97667
Arc Cw X 2.44669 Y 0.91299 XCenter -0.10905 YCenter 0.04536
Arc Cw X 1.58477 Y 0.91299 XCenter -0.43096 YCenter 1.03598
Arc Cw X 1.52108 Y 0.97667 XCenter 0.04536 YCenter 0.10905
Arc Cw X 1.52108 Y 1.83859 XCenter 1.03598 YCenter 0.43096
Arc Cw X 1.58477 Y 1.90228 XCenter 0.10905 YCenter -0.04536
Arc Cw X 2.44669 Y 1.90228 XCenter 0.43096 YCenter -1.03598
Arc Cw X 2.51037 Y 1.83859 XCenter -0.04536 YCenter -0.10905
Arc Cw X 2.51037 Y 0.97667 XCenter -1.03598 YCenter -0.43096
EndSub

Sub 2
Rapid X 2.01573 Y 1.86039
Rapid X 2.46848 Y 1.40763
Rapid X 2.01573 Y 0.95488
Rapid X 1.56297 Y 1.40763
EndSub

* Approximated stock for easy 3D simulated draw

BlockForm XMax 2.71258 YMax 2.10448 ZMax 0.00000 XMin 1.31888
YMin 0.71078 ZMin -2.00000

16-10 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

The unedited conversational program generated automatically has

sample tool mode and stock information that can be used as guidelines to
create the desired program. Also these sample commands enable the
user to instantly run the generated program in Draw and visualize the tool
path without having the edit it first. The unedited conversational program
can be edited to fix and/or add tool numbers, feed rates, cutter comp on
or off, and so forth. When the edits are complete, use Draw to check the
tool path. See Figure 16-4, Unedited Program Run in Draw.

Unedited G-Code Program Listing

The CNC G-Code program is created that must be edited to be usable.
An unedited G-Code program created from Figure 16-3, Zoomed Part
follows. See Table 16-5.
Table 16-5, Unedited G-Code Program Listing
* Simple setup for easy testing
G90G70F80
T1 D.01 L.01
G1 Z-1.0

* Call sub program(s)

M98 P1
M98 P2
M2

* Sub program definition(s) ...

O1
G0 X2.51037 Y0.97667
G2 X2.44669 Y0.91299 I-0.10905 J0.04536
G2 X1.58477 Y0.91299 I-0.43096 J1.03598
G2 X1.52108 Y0.97667 I0.04536 J0.10905
G2 X1.52108 Y1.83859 I1.03598 J0.43096
G2 X1.58477 Y1.90228 I0.10905 J-0.04536
G2 X2.44669 Y1.90228 I0.43096 J-1.03598
G2 X2.51037 Y1.83859 I-0.04536 J-0.10905
G2 X2.51037 Y0.97667 I-1.03598 J-0.43096
M99

O2
G0 X2.01573 Y1.86039
G0 X2.46848 Y1.40763
G0 X2.01573 Y0.95488
G0 X1.56297 Y1.40763
M99

* Approximated stock for easy 3D simulated draw

G120 X2.71258 Y2.10448 Z0.00000 I1.31888 J0.71078 K-2.00000

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 16-11

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

The unedited G-Code program generated automatically has sample tool

mode and stock information that can be used as guidelines to create the
desired program. Also these sample commands enable the user to
instantly run the generated program in Draw and visualize the tool path
without having the edit it first. The unedited G-Code program can be
edited to fix and/or add tool numbers, feed rates, cutter comp on or off,
and so forth. When the edits are complete, use Draw to check the tool
path. See Figure 16-4, Unedited Program Run in Draw.

Unedited Program Run in Draw

The unedited program run is draw is illustrated in Figure 15-4.

UNEDITED RUN IN DRAW

Figure 16-4, Unedited Program Run in Draw

The edited program listings are shown in the following Tables:
‰ Table 16-6, Edited Conversational Program Listing
‰ Table 16-7, Edited G-Code Program Listing

16-12 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

Edited Conversational Program Listing

See Table 16-6.
Table 16-6, Edited Conversational Program Listing
Dim Abs
Unit Inch
DrillOff
MCode 5
*FIXTURE OFFSET
Offset Fixture# 1
*TOOL CALL SET OFFSET IN TOOL TABLE .375 DIA MILL
Tool# 1 MCode 6
*SET SPINDLE SPEED
RPM 1500
*TURN ON SPINDLE
MCode 3
*TURN ON COOLANT
MCode 8
*POCKET USING SUBR #1
Pocket Sub# 1 X 2.00 Y 1.500 StartHgt 0.100 ZDepth -0.375 Stepover
0.250 DepthCut 0.125 FinStock 0.005 RampFeed 10.0 RoughFeed 30.0
FinFeed 20.0
*TURN OFF SPINDLE
MCode 5
*TURN OFF COOLANT
MCode 9
*CALL CENTER DRILL FOR HOLES
Tool# 2 MCode 6
RPM 3500
MCode 3
MCode 8
*SETUP CENTER DILLING CYCLE
BasicDrill ZDepth -0.5 StartHgt -0.275 ReturnHgt 1.0 Feed 15.0
*CALL SUBR FOR HOLES
Call 2
DrillOff
MCode 5
MCode 9
*CALL .125 DRILL FOR HOLES
Tool# 3 MCode 6
RPM 2500
MCode 3
MCode 8
*SETUP PECK DILLING CYCLE
PeckDrill ZDepth -1.25 StartHgt -0.275 ReturnHgt 1.0 Peck 0.50 Feed
20.0
Call 2
DrillOff
MCode 5
MCode 9

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 16-13

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

*CALL .25 COUNTER BORE FOR HOLES

Tool# 4 MCode 6
RPM 2000
MCode 3
MCode 8
*SETUP COUNTERBORE CYCLE
Boring ZDepth -0.625 StartHgt -0.275 ReturnHgt 1.0 Dwell 0.1 Feed
20.0
Call 2
DrillOff
MCode 5
MCode 9
Dim Abs
Rapid Z 5.0
Rapid X -10.0 Y 5.0
EndMain

* Sub program definition(s) ...

Sub 1
Line X 2.51037 Y 0.97667 ToolComp Right
Arc Cw X 2.44669 Y 0.91299 XCenter -0.10905 YCenter 0.04536
Arc Cw X 1.58477 Y 0.91299 XCenter -0.43096 YCenter 1.03598
Arc Cw X 1.52108 Y 0.97667 XCenter 0.04536 YCenter 0.10905
Arc Cw X 1.52108 Y 1.83859 XCenter 1.03598 YCenter 0.43096
Arc Cw X 1.58477 Y 1.90228 XCenter 0.10905 YCenter -0.04536
Arc Cw X 2.44669 Y 1.90228 XCenter 0.43096 YCenter -1.03598
Arc Cw X 2.51037 Y 1.83859 XCenter -0.04536 YCenter -0.10905
Arc Cw X 2.51037 Y 0.97667 XCenter -1.03598 YCenter -0.43096
EndSub

Sub 2
Rapid X 2.01573 Y 1.86039
Rapid X 2.46848 Y 1.40763
Rapid X 2.01573 Y 0.95488
Rapid X 1.56297 Y 1.40763
EndSub

* Approximated stock for easy 3D simulated draw

BlockForm XMax 2.71 YMax 2.1 ZMax 0 XMin 1.32 YMin 0.71
ZMin -1.125

16-14 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

Edited G-Code Program Listing

Table 16-7, Edited G-Code Program Listing
G0 G90 G70 G40 G80
G53 O1 *FIXTURE OFFSET
T1 M6 *TOOL CALL SET OFFSET IN TOOL TABLE .375 DIA MILL
S1500 M3 *TURN ON SPINDLE
M8 *TURN ON COOLANT
*POCKET USING SUBR #1
G169 W1 X2.0 Y1.5 H.1 Z-.375 M.01 S.005 A.25 B.125 I10.0 J30.0
K20.0 P1.0
M5 *TURN OFF SPINDLE
M9 *TURN OFF COOLANT
T2 M6 *CALL CENTER DRILL FOR HOLES
S3500 M3 *TURN ON SPINDLE
M8 *TURN ON COOLANT
*SETUP CENTER DILLING CYCLE
G81 Z-.5 R-.275 F15.0 P1.0
M98 P2 *CALL SUBR FOR HOLES
G80
M5
M9
T3 M6 *CALL .125 DRILL FOR HOLES
S2500 M3
M8
*SETUP PECK DILLING CYCLE
G83 Z-1.25 R-.275 I.5 F20.0 P1.0
M98 P2 *CALL SUBR FOR HOLES
G80
M5
M9
T4 M6 *CALL .25 COUNTER BORE FOR HOLES
S2000 M3
M8
*SETUP COUNTERBORE CYCLE
G82 Z-.625 R-.275 D.1 F20.0 P1.0
M98 P2 *CALL SUBR FOR HOLES
G80
M5
M9
G0 G90 Z5.0
X-10 Y5
M2 *END PROGRAM

* Sub program definition(s) ...

O1
G42 *ADDED FOR IRREG POCKET
G1 X2.51037 Y0.97667
G2 X2.44669 Y0.91299 I-0.10905 J0.04536
G2 X1.58477 Y0.91299 I-0.43096 J1.03598

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 16-15

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - DXF Converter Feature

G2 X1.52108 Y0.97667 I0.04536 J0.10905

G2 X1.52108 Y1.83859 I1.03598 J0.43096
G2 X1.58477 Y1.90228 I0.10905 J-0.04536
G2 X2.44669 Y1.90228 I0.43096 J-1.03598
G2 X2.51037 Y1.83859 I-0.04536 J-0.10905
G2 X2.51037 Y0.97667 I-1.03598 J-0.43096
G1 X2.51037 Y0.97667
M99

O2
G0 X2.01573 Y1.86039
G0 X2.46848 Y1.40763
G0 X2.01573 Y0.95488
G0 X1.56297 Y1.40763
M99

* Approximated stock for easy 3D simulated draw

G120 X2.71 Y2.1 Z0 I1.32 J0.71 K-1.125

16-16 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Section 17 - Advanced Programming Features

The following topics are described in this section:
‰ Modifiers
‰ Block Separators
‰ Tool Offset Modifications
‰ Expressions and Functions
‰ System Variables
‰ User Variables
‰ User Macros (G65, G66, G67)
‰ Probe Move (G31)
‰ Conditional Statements
‰ Unconditional LOOP Repeat
‰ Short Form Addressing
‰ Logical and Comparative Terms
‰ File Inclusion

Modifiers
Use modifiers to alter the way the CNC interprets a word address. For
example, a single value in an Inch Mode program may be forced to Metric
Mode, without programming G71. Or, arc center values (I, J, or K) may
be forced to an absolute value.
The address and modifier must be accompanied by an ampersand (&).
Place the ampersand (&) between the address word to be modified and
the modifier. The address word is programmed first, followed by &,
followed by the modifier, followed by the value.
The modifier is non-modal and is applied only to the address word it
accompanies.
Example
G02 X2.0 Y1.0 I&A1.5 J&A1.0
The example forces the I and J center of an arc to be in Absolute Mode.
I and J are incremental by default. Assume the axes are at X1 Y1.
Table 17-1 lists the available modifiers.
Table 17-1, Modifiers
A Force the address word to be in Absolute Mode.
D Force the address word to be in Incremental Mode.
E Force the address word to be in Inch Mode.
M Force the address word to be in Millimeter Mode.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Block Separators
Block separators (;) can be used to place several functions on one line of
a program. This is useful in Manual Data Input (MDI) Mode because you
can combine several commands on one line at the command line.
Example 1 executes five moves on the machine when you press START.
Each move is separated by the (;) block separator.
Example 1:
G90 G01 X0 Y0 F30 ; X3 ; Y-2 ; X0 ; Y0
Example 2 moves the axes linearly to X0 Y0, then CW to X1 Y1, then
linearly to X2.
Example 2:
G90 G01 X0 Y0 F10 ; G02 X1 Y1 I1 J0 F8 ; G01 X2
The number of separate steps in a program file is limited only by the
available memory.
Block separators can also be used in programs.

Tool Offset Modification

You can modify a tool diameter or length offset in the program without
using the Tool Page. This is useful when rough-milling a profile where
cutter diameter compensation requires different diameter definitions for
the same tool to step the width of the cut. Tool modification can be either
temporary or permanent. To make it temporary, choose not to update the
Tool Page. To make it permanent, choose to update the Tool Page.
Refer to Figure 17-1.

X0, Y0

TOOLMOD

Figure 17-1, Tool Modification Programming Example

17-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Temporary Format:
T1 D.5500 L-1.1000
Changes Tool 1 diameter offset to .5500 and length offset to -1.1000. Do
not update the Tool Page for Tool 1.

Permanent Format:
T1 D.5500 L-1.1000 H M6
Changes Tool 1 diameter offset to 0.5500 and length offset to -1.1000.
Updates the Tool Page for Tool 1 to entered values.
D and L values are absolute and replace the previous offsets. They are
not added to existing offsets. The H command instructs the CNC to
update the Tool Page offsets to the programmed values and must come
between the M6 and the D & L addresses, if an M6 is required by the tool
change of your machine.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Tool Modification Programming Example

This program mills the square shape four times. The CNC executes the
first pass using the tool diameter entered in the Tool Page. Each
subsequent pass uses a different, “modified” tool diameter, as
programmed in Blocks 8, 10, and 12. T, D, L, and H are the only word
addresses allowed on the block.
N1 O41 * TOOL-MOD.G
N2 G90 G70 G0 G17
N3 T0
N4 Z0
N5 X0 Y0
N6 T1 * .8000 DIA.
N7 M98 P1
N8 T1 D.6
N9 M98 P1
N10 T1 D.4
N11 M98 P1
N12 T1 D.2
N13 M98 P1
N14 T0
N15 G0 Z0
N16 M2
N17
N18 O1 * SUBPGM-1
N19 G1 Z-.25 F10
N20 G41 Y1
N21 X-1
N22 Y-1
N23 X1
N24 Y1
N25 X0
N26 G40 Y0
N27 M99
The main program calls the subprogram that contains the compensation
on/off commands between each tool modification.

NOTE: When tool modifiers are activated, the CNC still applies any
wear offset entered in the Tool Page.

17-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Expressions and Functions

You can program some values as expressions. Parentheses enclose
expressions. The CNC displays an error message if the expression is
incorrectly entered. Expressions follow the standard mathematics order
of operations (multiplication, division, addition and subtraction).
An expression must contain an operator or use a function. Refer to
Table 17-2.

Table 17-2, Operators and Functions

Ref. Expression Function
a) () Expression function (parenthesis)
b) */& Multiplication, division, modification
c) +- Addition, subtraction
d) >< Relation greater than, less than
e) = != Relation equal, not equal
f) tomm Convert to mm
g) toin Convert to inch
h) tode Convert to inch if inch, mm if mm
i) tonu Force to current modal
j) round Round up or down, automatically
k) fix Discard fraction less than 1
l) fup Raise fraction 1
m) var True if defined, false otherwise
n) sin Sine
o) cos Cosine
p) tan Tangent
q) asin Arcsine
r) acos Arcosine
s) atan Arctangent
t) abs Absolute value
u) sqrt Square root
v) ln Natural logarithm
w) log Logarithm
x) exp Exponential
y) trun Truncate
z) !+-# Unary logical not, positive, negative,
indirection

The following topic is described:

‰ Examples

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-5

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Examples
Ref. from
Previous
Table Example
a) G01 X(#100 + #101). All calculations must be enclosed in
parentheses. This defines an expression.
b) G00 Y&A(#102 * #103)
LOOP (5 / 2 / .01)
Example of multiplication, division, and modification.
c) G01 X(3 + 2)
#100 = (#122 - #105).
Addition and Subtraction.
d) IF (#101 > 0) THEN ....
Greater than (>), less than (<).
e) IF (#144 = #143) GOTO .....
Equal to, not equal to (!=).
f) TOMM (n); convert n to mm.
If n's type is inch, TOMM (n) = n * 25.4.
g) TOIN (n); convert n to inch. If n's type is mm, TOIN (n) = n
/ 25.4.
h) TODE (n); convert to current (IN or MM) mode.
i) TONU (n); force the type of (n) to the modal (inch or mm).
j) ROUND (n) rounds the value of (n) up or down, depending
if its fractional part is equal or greater than 0.500000, or
less than 0.500000.
#100 = 1.500 ; G01 X(round(#100)) moves to X2.0000
#101 = 1.499 ; G01 X(round(#101)) moves to X1.0000
k) FIX (n) rounds the value down to the next whole number.
#100 = (5/2) ; G01 X(fix(#100)) moves to X2.0000
l) FUP (n) rounds the value up to the next whole number.
#100 = (5/2) ; G01 X(fup(#100)) moves to X3.0000
m) VAR (n) is used to check if a user variable has been
defined in a program. IF (var(#100)) THEN .... If #100 has
been defined by the user, then true. If not, then false.
n) SIN (n) gives the sine of (n). (n) is assumed to be in
degrees. G01 X(cos(15)) Y(sin(15)) moves along the
hypotenuse of a 15-degree angle with a hypotenuse of 1.
o) COS (n) gives the cosine of (n).
p) TAN (n) gives the tangent of (n).
q) ASIN (n) gives the arcsine of (n).
r) ACOS (n) gives the arccosine of (n).
s) ATAN (n) gives the arctangent of (n).
t) ABS (n) gives the absolute value of (n).
u) SQRT (n) gives the square root of (n).
v) LN (n) is natural logarithm.
w) LOG (n) is logarithm.
x) EXP (n) is exponential function.
y) TRUN (n) truncates the value of (n).

17-6 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Ref. from
Previous
Table Example
z) ! unary logical not, != (not equal to).
Positive, (+(#100)) means positive whatever value is in
#100.
Negative, (-(#100)) means negative whatever is in #100.
Example of indirection:
N30 #200 = 51.456
N40 #201 = 200
N50 G90 G1 X ##201 F200
At Block N40 variable #201 = 200. Only when the second
level of indirection is used at N50 does variable #201
contain the contents of variable #200 causing the X-axis to
move to position 51.456. Up to four levels of indirection
can be used.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-7

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

System Variables
Certain variables are set aside as CNC system variables. Some may be
useful for you to know when programming macros. The system variables
range from #1000 to #1099. Most of these variables are "read only". You
cannot write information to them. There are a few exceptions to this rule.
Refer to Table 17-3 for a list of available system variables.

Table 17-3, System Variables

Variable Description
#1000 Block skip variables (read/write)
#1001 to #1009 Selective block skip
#1010 to #1015 Commanded ABS tool position (x,y,z,u,v,w)
NOTE: These variables are not valid during
compensations such as tool radius, scaling,
mirroring, and rotation, or while in transitional
moves such as corner rounding and chamfering.
#1016 Current G motion mode (0=rapid, 1=feed, 2=cw
arc, 3=ccw arc, 5=ellipse, 6=spiral)
#1017 Current XYZ plane (17=XY, 18=XZ, 19=YZ)
#1020 Current tool diameter
#1021 Current tool length offset
#1022 Current feedrate
#1023 Current rapidrate
#1024 Current RPM
#1030 Stock variable (R/W)
#1031 Acute angle for rounding compensated
intersections (default = 15.0)
#1032 # of look-ahead blocks for cutter comp (R/W)
#1041 Current program tool compensation (40=off,
41=left, 42=right)
#1050 to #1055 Actual absolute position (X,Y,Z,U,V,W)
NOTE: These variables are not valid during
compensations such as tool radius, scaling,
mirroring, and rotation, or while in transitional
moves such as corner rounding and chamfering.
#1070 Current XYZ dimension (70=inch, 71=mm)
#1071 Current UVW dimension (70=inch, 71=mm)
#1090 Current XYZ dimension (90=abs, 91=incr)
#1091 Current UVW dimension (90=abs, 91=incr)

17-8 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

User Variables
Certain variables are set aside for the programmer to use. These may be
useful when programming macros. You can read from or write to these
variables. They are divided into four categories:
• Local variables: #1 to #99
These variable numbers can be used only within the body of a
subprogram (or macro). The CNC generates an error message if you
program these variables in the main program. Values do not hold
from one subprogram to another. In this way, the same variables can
be used in separate subprograms, with different values.
• Common (global) variables: #100 to #219. (Read/Write)
These variables can be used anywhere in the program or subprogram
and their value remains.
• Read only variables: #220 to #249
These variables can only be set in the main program. Once set, the
variables can be used in subprograms or macros as "read only"
variables.
• Static (global) variables: #260 to #279. (Read/Write)
These variables can be used anywhere in the program or subprogram
and their value remains across shutdowns or software resets.

WARNING: OEM and machine tool builders should use

#100–#150 and #260–#269 for any custom macros. End users
should use #151–#220 and #270–#279 for your custom macros.
This avoids conflicting usage of the global variables.

• Block skip variables: #1000 to #1009 (Refer to “Block Skip” and

“Selective Block Skip” in this section.)

The following topic is described:

‰ Variable Programming (Parametric Programming)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-9

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Variable Programming (Parametric Programming)

Variable, or parametric, programming enables you to create macros to
generate geometric shapes that are not already available in a canned
cycle.
Conditional loops, jumps, and GOTO commands can be used to control
program execution.
The following topics are described:
‰ Block Skip
‰ Selective Block Skip
‰ Parameters and Variable Registers
‰ Contents of Variables (PRINT)
‰ Setting and Transferring Variables
‰ Storing Result of Computation
‰ Variable Programming Examples

Block Skip
Any block preceded by a slash (/) code is omitted if the corresponding
block skip ‘switch’ is set “ON” in the program, previous to the (/) code.
The switch is set on by programming variable #1000 to the value of “1”. A
value of “0” sets the switch “OFF”.

Example:
N11 #1000 = 1 *Note: 0=OFF, 1= ON
N12 G81 Z-.5 R.1 F12 P.1
N13 X1 Y1
N14 X2
/N15 X3
N16 X5
N17 G80

In the above example, the hole at N15 is skipped. If N11, read

N11 #1000 = 0
then N15 would be executed.
The (/) slash code can be placed anywhere in the block, provided it does
not exclude code necessary to complete that operation. It is
recommended the (/) code be used as shown above.
#1000 is reserved for block skip use.

17-10 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Selective Block Skip

The 6000i control has nine (9) optional block skip ‘switches’. The (/) code
followed by a number 1 through 9 activates the corresponding switch.

Example:
N11 #1002 = 1 *Note: 0=OFF, 1= ON
N12 G81 Z-.5 R.1 F12 P.1
N13 X1 Y1
N14 X2
/2 N15 X3
N16 X5
N17 G80

In the above example, the hole at N15 is skipped. If N11, read

N11 #1002 = 0
then N15 would be executed.
#1001 through #1009 are reserved for optional block skip use.
Parameters and Variable Registers
A macro is a series of instructions designed to achieve a specific result
for a given set of constraints. For example, a rectangular pocket of any
size always has four sides, four corner radii and a depth. Therefore, you
can cut many pockets of different sizes using a similar tool path with
longer or shorter moves for the tool path. If a suitable program processes
the constraints of the pocket, the CNC calculates a tool path to cut a
particular pocket. Such a program is called a macro. The G78
rectangular pocket cycle is an example of a macro that cannot be edited.
The constraints of the pocket, or the feature required, are its parameters.
Parameters for any feature vary as dimensions change; therefore, the
parameters are often called variables. The data for each parameter must
be stored as an entity, known as a variable register, also called variables.
Parameters passed to a macro are called parameters in this manual.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-11

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Contents of Variables (PRINT)

Format:
PRINT xxx(variable)
Format:
N(Block number) PRINT xxx(variable)
You can verify the contents of a variable. This is useful when you are
debugging a program. Use the PRINT command to display the contents
of a variable on the screen in Manual, Single-Step and Auto Modes.
Example 1:
PRINT 200
Displays the contents of the variable (#200).
Example 2:
N180 PRINT 110
To display variable contents during program execution, use the PRINT
command as part of the program. Example 2 prints the contents of
variables #110 to the screen.
If commas separate the numbers, several variables can be printed
simultaneously.
In Manual Mode, type PRINT 110 then press START to display the
contents on the screen.
The PRINT variable can be abbreviated, as follows: ]P
See “Short Form Addressing,” Table 17-6, Abbreviations, for a list of
abbreviations to activate the corresponding command.

17-12 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Setting and Transferring Variables

When using parametric programming with axis addresses and
expressions (including unary minus), the complete expression needs to
be in parenthesis. For example, X(-#151) is correct. X-#151 or X-(#151)
are not correct.
Setting and Direct Transfer:
Variables are loaded or set when they display on the left side of an
equation. (That is, the left side of the equal sign.)
Example 1:
N200 #100 = 5.56
Variable #100 contains number 5.560000 until changed.
Example 2:
N200 #100 = 25.4m
Variable #100 sets variable 100 to 25.4mm. Similarly, #100 = 5i sets
variable 100 to 5 inches. If neither “i” nor “m” are used when assigning a
variable, then the value of the variable is modal. For example, #100 = 8
sets variable #100 to 8 (no unit).
Example 3:
N200 #100 = #20
Variable #100 contains the number held by #20 until changed. Equating
one variable with another is called a direct transfer.

NOTE: When a direct transfer is requested, the variable on the right

side of the equation must contain a value. Otherwise, the CNC
displays an error message(#nn not defined).

Indirect Transfer:
You can indirectly transfer variables to a depth of four levels by
introducing extra hatch marks (#) before the variable number. In an
indirect transfer, a value is transferred to one variable via another.

Example 1:
N201 G90 G17 G71 G0
N202 #101 = 51.456
N203 #102 = 101
N204 X##102
At Block N204, the X-axis moves to 51.456. Example 1 shows single
indirection. The contents of variable #101 are used by variable #102.
The actual content of variable #102 is constant 101. The indirection is
activated at Block N204 by the addition of the (#) symbol to variable #102.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-13

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Example 2:
N210 G90 G17 G71 G0
N211 #101 = 1
N212 #102 = 2
N213 #103 = 3
N214 #104 = 4
N215 #119 = 100
N216 LOOP 4
N217 #119 = #119 + 1
N218 #120 = 119
N219 X###120
N220 END
N221 M2
Example 2 contains two levels of indirection (N219) and shows how the
contents from multiple variables can be assigned to a command or
expression.
At Block N215, variable #119 is set to constant 100.
At Block N217 one is added to the contents of variable #119.
At Block N218 variable #120 is set to constant 119.
Block N219 moves the X-axis to the position contained in variable #120
via two levels of indirection. The first level is the content of variable #119.
The second level is the content of variable #101, which is incremented in
the loop at Block N217 to introduce the contents of variables #102, #103
and #104.
The X-axis moves to X1; X2; X3; and X4.
Storing Result of Computation
When a mathematical expression is programmed, variables on the left
side of an equation store the computed result.
N250 #110 = #20 + #35
N260 #120 = #18 / 2
At N250, #110 contains the sum of the contents of #20 and #35. At
N260, #120 contains the result of the contents of #18 divided by 2.
Parentheses establish an order of operations or denote special functions.

NOTE: Multiplication operations MUST be in parentheses or the CNC

treats the multiply command (*) as a comment sign and
disregards the rest of the line following the sign (*).

N300 #140 = (#11 * #115) / 2

N310 #141 = sin (45)
N320 #142 = (#141 * #140) ; * #142 is shortest side

17-14 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Variable Programming Examples

Example 1
This program uses common variables in the range of #50 to #149. The
program mills a pocket with a three-degree draft angle on the sidewalls.
The dimensions at the bottom of the pocket are:
15.5730 (X axis) x 13.8850 (Y axis). The pocket is 1.0000 in. deep.
The tool begins at the upper-left corner of the pocket and at full depth.
Part Zero is set in the center of the pocket.
O 28 * 3-DEG. DRFT PKT
G90 G70 G0 G17
T0
Z0
X0 Y0
T1
X-7.7865 Y6.9425 * MOVE TO UP-LEFT CORNER
Z.5
G1 Z-1 F10 * FEED TO DEPTH
F40
#101 = 15.5730 * LENGTH (X) OF POCKET
#102 = 13.8850 * WIDTH OF POCKET
#103 = .0200 * DESIRED "STEP-UP" IN Z AXIS
#104 = (#103*TAN(3)) * CALCULATE "STEP-OVER" IN X-Y AXES
M98 P100 * CALL SUBPROGRAM 100
T0
G90 G0 Z0
X0 Y0
M2

O100
LOOP((1/#103)+1); * SET LOOP NUMBER (1 IN. DP / .02 STEP) + 1
G91 * SET INCREMENTAL MODAL
G1 Y(-#102); * MILL L.H. SIDE
X#101; * MILL BOTTOM SIDE
Y#102; * MILL R.H. SIDE
X(-#101); * MILL TOP SIDE, BACK TO START POS'N
X(-#104) Y#104 Z#103; * STEP UP/OVER IN X-Y AND Z
#101 = #101 + (#104*2); * ADD STEPOVER TIMES 2 TO LONG SIDES
#102 = #102 + (#104*2); * ADD STEPOVER TIMES 2 TO SHORT SIDES
END * END LOOP
M99

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-15

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

The pocket is milled with a side draft angle of three degrees. Z is set to a
step-up increment of .02 in. #152 can be set to a desired value, perhaps
to determine the finish on the sidewalls of the pocket. In this example,
the pocket always has a depth of 1 in., and a draft angle of 3 degrees.
The side lengths and Z step may be changed.
To make this program totally independent, the Z depth and draft angle
can be set to variables, and the additional calculations must then be
made.
Example 2
This program requires the length and width of a rectangle, the cut per
side on the rectangle, and the number of passes around the rectangle.
Variables #150 to #199 are read only. They can be set only in the main
program.
N10 O 1000
N20 G0 G17 G70 G90 F80
N30 T0
N40 Z0
N50 X0 Y0 ;* START POSITION OF RECTANGLE
N60 #151 = 3 ;* SET READ ONLY VARIABLE, X LENGTH OF SIDE
N70 #152 = 3;* SET READ ONLY VARIABLE, Y LENGTH OF SIDE
N80 #153 = .25 ;* SET READ ONLY VARIABLE, CUT PER SIDE
N90 #154 = 5 ;* SET READ ONLY VARIABLE, NUMBER OF PASSES
N100 M98 P1 ;* CALL SUBPROGRAM BODY
N110 T0
N120 Z0
N130 X0 Y0
N140 M2

N160 O1
N170 G91 G1 X#151 ;* MOVE X AXIS LENGTH OF SIDE
N180 Y#152 ;* MOVE Y AXIS LENGTH OF SIDE
N190 X(-#151) ;* MOVE X NEGATIVE
N200 Y(-#152) ;* MOVE Y NEGATIVE
N210 #111 = 0 ;* SET SIDE CUT INCREMENT TO 0
N220 LOOP #154 ;* LOOP #154 NUMBER OF TIMES
N230 X#153 Y#153 ;* SET SIDE CUT
N240 #111 = #111 - #153 ;* DECREMENT SIDE CUT EACH LOOP
N250 #101 = #151 + (#111 * 2 ) ;* CALCULATE NEW X LENGTH
N260 #102 = #152 + (#111 * 2 ) ;* CALCULATE NEW Y LENGTH
N270 X#101 ;* MOVE AROUND SQUARE USING NEW SIDE * LENGTHS
N280 Y#102
N290 X(-#101)
N300 Y(-#102)
N310 END
N320 M99
The read only variables are set in Blocks N60 to N90. Then, the
subprogram is called. At Block N170, the first move is made along the X-
axis, followed by a move along the Y-axis. At Blocks N190 and N200, the

17-16 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

logical negative sign makes the axis move in the opposite direction. The
contents of the variables remain the same.
At Block N220, a loop, which ends at Block N310, is set up. The loop
runs the number of times contained in variable #154. The first move in
the loop is in the X and Y axes to the side of cut value in #153. In Block
N240, #111 decrements at each pass through the loop, by the value of
the side cut. This value, in turn, is used to calculate a new length of cut
for each side.

User Macros (G65, G66, G67)

Use G66 when you want to use a modal macro subprogram. These
groups of instructions can be special canned cycles made up by the user
to simplify the programming of the particular part, or master programs for
similar part families, programmed with variables rather than fixed
dimensions.
Macros can contain automatic measuring sequences for sensors, such as
a probe, for feedback to the CNC. Refer to Table 17-4.

Table 17-4, Macro G-Codes

Format Function
G65 Pn Ln Non-modal macro call. Call macro n. Execute
macro, at the current position, only once. The
subprogram can be looped (L).
G66 Pn Modal macro call. Call macro n. Execute macro
at any X and/or Y location given after the G66
code, until G67 (cancel) is called. G66 stays
active until G67 is called.
G67 Cancel Modal Macro Call (G66).

The following topics are described:

‰ Macro Body Structure
‰ Setting and Passing Parameters

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-17

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Macro Body Structure

The macro body is defined in the same way as a subprogram.
Format: Oxxx
O identifies it as a macro.
xxx is the label number.
Example:
N200 O 201
N210 ------
Terminate the macro with an M99 code.
Use local variables within the body of a macro or subprogram only. You
cannot use them to transfer data to other macros or subprograms. If
further subprogram calls are made from the macro body, you must
transfer data from the local variables to common variables. The common
variables can then be referenced to transport data to the further
subprogram.
N220 #100 = #20
N230 -------
Common variables range from #100 to #220.
The macro must either be part of the program from which it is called or
"included" using the file inclusion code. Refer to “File Inclusion” in this
section.

Setting and Passing Parameters

The following topics are described:
‰ G65 Macro Programming, Main
‰ G65 Macro Programming, Macro (Subprogram)
‰ G66/G67 Macro Programming
‰ SLOTMAC.G Program
‰ Macro Programming (Hole Milling Macro)
You can set parameters for a macro before the subprogram call (M98
Pn). Refer to Example 1. Blocks 10 to 12 define variable values for the
subprogram called in Block 13.
Example 1
N10 #151 = 2
N11 #152 = 3
N12 #153 = 3.4
N13 M98 P1
N14 -------

17-18 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

It may be more convenient to use macro call G65 Pn or G66 Pn to pass

variables to the subprogram by letter address. This is how a canned cycle
operates. Refer to Example 2. Values are passed on for parameters A,
B and C.
Example 2
N20 G65 P1 A2 B3 C3.4
N21 -------
Macro call G65 Pn contains a loop option (Ln). Where, n is the number of
repetitions of the subprogram called.
N20 G65 P1 A2 B3 C3.4 L3
N21 -------
Macro 1 is called three times (Ln equals 3).
When parameters are passed to a macro body by letter address, the
contents of the parameters are stored in local variables. Refer to
Table 17-5.
Table 17-5, Letter Addresses
A = #1 B = #2 C = #3 D = #7 E= #8 F = #9,
H = #11 I = #4 J = #5 K = #6 M = #13 Q = #17,
R = #18 S = #19 T = #20 U = #21 V = #22 W = #23,
X = #24 Y = #25 Z = #26
Letter addresses G, L, N, O, and P cannot be used for parameter
passing.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-19

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

G65 Macro Programming, Main

The following is an example of a simple macro program. In this example,
the macro is a "window milling" cycle designed to mill a square or
rectangular window through a part.
Example:
N1 O99 * WINDOW-MACRO-CALL
N2 G90 G70 G0 G17
N3 T0
N4 Z0
N5 X0 Y0
N6 T1 *** .5000 MILL
N7 G90 G0 X1 Y1
N8 Z.1
N9 F40
N10 G65 P3 X4 Y4 Z-.55
N11 G90 G0 Z.1
N12 T0
N13 Z0
N14 X0 Y0
N15 M30 O99
* parameters passed:
* X (#24) = length of window in X axis
* Y (#25) = width of window in Y axis
* Z (#26) = absolute tool depth
G65 Macro Programming, Macro (Subprogram)
This macro can mill any size window (L x W), at any Z depth. To change
the pocket size, change the parameters on Block 10 (X,Y,Z). The CNC
executes the macro only once, at the current position. (G65 is not modal.)
Example:
N22 O3 * WINDOW-MACRO
N23 G90 G1 Z#26
N24 G91 G41 Y(#25/2)
N25 X(-(#24/2))
N26 Y(-#25)
N27 X#24
N28 Y#25
N29 X(-(#24/2))
N30 G40 Y(-(#25/2))
N31 M99

17-20 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

G66/G67 Macro Programming

This example is a modal macro program to mill slots in a plate at various
locations. In contrast to the G65 (single-call macro) in Example 1, G66
(modal macro call) applies the macro to all subsequent moves, until
canceled by G67. Program G67 after the last slot location.
Example:
N1 O101 * SLOTCALL.G
N2 G90 G70 G0 G17
N3 T0 Z0
N4 X0 Y0
N5 T1 D.25 L-1 F30
N6 G66 P1255 X5 Y1 Z-.1 A5 B12 C5
N7 X1 Y2
N8 X2 Y4
N9 G67
N10 G90 G0 T0 Z0
N11 X0 Y0
N12 M2
N13
N14 ["SLOTMAC.G

This program calls SLOTMAC.G, a program in another file. The "file

inclusion" block (N14) calls the program from another file in the Program
Manager.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-21

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

SLOTMAC.G Program
In the following Blocks 1260 through 1400 are comment blocks that
regard the macro's structure and concept.
Example:
N1255 O1255 * SLOTMAC.G
N1260
N1270 * EXAMPLE: G65 P1255 X-3 Y1 Z-.125 A5 B12 C10
N1280 * P = SUB #
N1290 * X = X DIM OF SLOT #24
N1300 * Y = Y DIM OF SLOT #25
N1310 * Z = ABS DEPTH OF SLOT #26
N1320 * A = Z FEEDRATE #1
N1330 * B = XY FEEDRATE #2
N1340 * C = ANGLE FROM 3 o’clock #3
N1350
N1360 * NOTES:
N1370 * 1. SLOT WILL HAVE FULL RAD.
N1380 * 2. MUST POS'N XY OVER CENTER OF L.LEFT RAD.
N1390 * 3. PROGRAM SLOT LENGTHWISE IN X, ANGLE C WILL ROTATE
N1400
N1410 G90 G0 Z.1
N1420 G61 Z#26 F#1
N1430 G68 C#3
N1440 G91 G41 G64 X.1 Y(#25/2) F#2
N1450 X-.1
N1460 G3 X0 Y(-(#25)) I0 J(-(#25/2))
N1470 G1 X(ABS((ABS(#24))-(ABS(#25))))
N1480 G3 X0 Y#25 I0 J(#25/2)
N1490 G1 X(-(ABS((ABS(#24))-(ABS(#25)))))
N1500 G1 G40 Y(-(#25/2))
N1510 G68
N1520 G90 G0 Z.1
N1530 M99

17-22 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Macro Programming (Hole Milling Macro)

Example 3 machines a CW or CCW hole. A move is made to the hole
center and to the required Z depth before calling the macro. After the
macro is completed, the Z-axis moves to the clearance plane. The macro
contains tangential entry to and exit from the hole surface. It uses error
checking and messages. When the macro is finished, machine
parameters return to the their previous status.
String variables (Examples: EPSI, SAVEFRT) can be set and used in
place of regular variables.
Symbol or Name Variables
Symbol or name variables can be used to make a macro program easier
to understand. They can represent a value or a variable. They can be
used only in subprograms.
Symbol or name variables must be defined before use, in the following
format:
[ TEXT value or variable

Examples:
[ PI 3.141592654 *PI is read as the value given
[ TFLAG #1041 *TFLAG represents system variable #1040
(current tool comp)

NOTE: Open bracket must start line. Do not use equal signs (=) in
string variables.
You can use a variable to print values.
#35= PI ;print 35 *3.141592654 is printed
There must be at least one space preceding and following the string
variable in a program. In the following examples, PI is the variable.
#35/PI+#23 Produces error.
#35/ PI +#23 Correct format.
Once set, string variables can be used in any macro within the same
program.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-23

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Example:
G90 G70 G0 G17
T0 Z0
X0 Y0
T1 F30
X1.5 Y0 * MOVE TO HOLE CENTER
Z.1
G1 Z-.5 * MOVE Z TO DEPTH
G65 P76 D2.0 S.010 J35 K20
G0 Z.1 * RAISE Z TO CLEARANCE PLANE
TO Z0
X0 Y0
M2

O76 ** HOLE MILLING MACRO.

*
* D#7 = HOLE DIAMETER (+=CCW,-=CW), J#5 = ROUGH FEEDRATE,
* S#19 = FINISH STOCK AMOUNT, K#6 = FINISH FEEDRATE.
* #1020 = TOOL DIAMETER.
*
[SAVEG90 #99 * SET STRING SAVEG90 TO VAR 99
[SAVEG00 #98 * SET STRING SAVEG00 TO VAR 98
[SAVEFRT #97 * SET STRING SAVEFRT TO VAR 97
[TDIA #96 * SET STRING TDIA TO VAR 96
[EPSI .00001 * SET STRING EPSI TO .00001

SAVEG90 = #1090 * SAVE CURRENT DIM MODE (ABS=90,INCR=91)

SAVEG00 = #1016 * SAVE CURRENT MOVE MODE (RAPID=0,FEED=1)
SAVEFRT = #1022 * SAVE CURRENT FEEDRATE
TDIA = ABS(#1020) * SAVE CURRENT ABSOLUTE TOOL DIA
IF(!VAR(7)) THEN
PRINT (ERROR! HOLE DIA. NOT GIVEN)
M30
ENDIF
IF(!VAR(5)) THEN; #5=#1022; ENDIF * DEFAULT ROUGH FEEDRATE.
IF(!VAR(6)) THEN; #6=#5; ENDIF * DEFAULT FINISH FEEDRATE.
IF(!VAR(19)) THEN; #19=0.; ENDIF * DEFAULT NO FINISH STOCK.
IF(ABS(#7/2)<ABS(#19)) THEN
PRINT (ERROR! TOOL DIA. TOO BIG)
M30
ENDIF
#33 = (ABS(#7)/2-ABS(#19)- TDIA /2); * ROUGHING PASS RADIUS.
IF(#33<0|#33=0) THEN
PRINT (ERROR! ROUGH AMOUNT TOO BIG)
M30
ENDIF
IF( #1041 > 40+ EPSI ) THEN * CHECK IF TOOL COMP IS ON
PRINT (ERROR! TOOL COMP NOT ALLOWED)
M30
ENDIF
IF( TDIA < EPSI ) THEN

17-24 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

PRINT (WARNING: TOOL DIA.= 0)

M00 * DWELL UNTIL START KEY.
ENDIF
#34 = (#33/2); * INTERMEDIATE RADIUS.
#35 = (ABS(#7)/2- TDIA /2); * FINISH PASS RADIUS.
#36 = (#35/2); * INTERMEDIATE RADIUS.
G64; * CONTOURING MODE.
IF(#7>0) THEN * COUNTER-CLOCKWISE.
G91 F#5
G01 X#34 Y#34
G03 X(-#34) Y#34 I(-#34) J0
G03 X0 Y0 I0 J(-#33)
G03 X(-#34) Y(-#34) I0 J(-#34)
G01 X#34 Y(-#34)
IF((#19> EPSI ) & (#6> EPSI )) THEN * IF FINISH PASS.
G91 F#6
G01 X#36 Y#36
G03 X(-#36) Y#36 I(-#36) J0
G03 X0 Y0 I0 J(-#35)
G03 X(-#36) Y(-#36) I0 J(-#36)
G01 X#36 Y(-#36)
ENDIF
ELSE * CLOCKWISE.
G91 F#5
G01 X(-#34) Y#34
G02 X#34 Y#34 I#34 J0
G02 X0 Y0 I0 J(-#33)
G02 X#34 Y(-#34) I0 J(-#34)
G01 X(-#34) Y(-#34)
IF((#19> EPSI ) & (#6> EPSI )) THEN * IF FINISH PASS.
G91 F#6
G01 X(-#36) Y#36
G02 X#36 Y#36 I#36 J0
G02 X0 Y0 I0 J(-#35)
G02 X#36 Y(-#36) I0 J(-#36)
G01 X(-#36) Y(-#36)
ENDIF * FINISH PASS.
ENDIF * CLOCKWISE

IF( SAVEFRT > EPSI ) THEN; F( SAVEFRT ); ENDIF * RESTORE FEEDRATE.

G SAVEG90 ; * RESTORE G90/91.
G SAVEG00 ; * RESTORE G00/01.
M99

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-25

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Probe Move (G31)

G31 is to be issued with an associated axis move (i.e. G31 X10). When
the G31 is executed, it moves at current feedrate selected for G1 until the
touch probe selected is deflected. At this point, the move is stopped, and
the position where the probe touched the part is read and passed to
system variables (#1060 to #1063 for X to U).
G31 is aborted if any of the following events occur:
• The primitive is issued while the probe is still deflected (touching the
part).
• The ready signal is not present.
• Hardware malfunction: Trigger signal engaged, but no position is
latched.
• Start pulse is issued, but probe is not ready after 2 seconds. (Only
cordless probes).
• Cordless probe still in “sleeping mode.”
• Low battery signal becomes active (Only cordless probes).
M-Code M9387 is provided to select the probe G31 uses and probe
activation:

M9387X0 Selects the Tool touch probe (X13)

M9387X1 Selects the 3-D touch probe (X12) (default)
M9387Y0 Copies Tool touch probe state (deflected or not) into a
system variable (#1066)
M9387Y1 Copies 3-D touch probe state (deflected or not) into a
system variable (#1066)
M9387Z0 Turns off cordless probe
M9387Z1 Turns on cordless probe
Canned cycles are available for the most common probe functions. Refer
to “Section 5, Probing Cycles” for details. Using the G31 primitive,
parametric programming, and the M-Code described above, it is possible
to write additional cycles to perform custom probing functions.

17-26 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Conditional Statements
This subsection discusses the conditional statements IF, THEN, ELSE,
GOTO and WHILE.
IF - THEN - ENDIF
N300 IF (expression) THEN
N310 -------------------
::
::
N360 ENDIF
N370 ---------
If the expression in N300 is true, the program continues at N310. If the
expression is false, the program continues at N370.
In place of an expression, you can use a variable that while not zero is
treated as a true expression. (Zero equals false. Any other value equals
true.)
IF - THEN - ELSE - ENDIF
N400 IF (expression) THEN
N410 -------------------
::
::
N440 ELSE
N450 -------------------
::
::
N470 ENDIF
N480 ---------
If the expression is true, the program continues at N410, then to N440,
where a jump is made to N480.
If the expression is false, the CNC skips Blocks N410 to N440 and
executes Blocks N450 to N470. In place of an expression, you can use a
variable that while not zero is treated as a true expression. (Zero equals
false. Any other value equals true.)
IF - GOTO
N500 IF (expression) GOTO nnnn
N510 ---------
NOTE: When you program IF-GOTO statements do not precede the
block number with the character "N".
For example, IF-GOTO 487 skips to block number N487.
If the expression is true, the program jumps to the block number specified
(nnn). If the expression is false, the program continues at Block N510. In
place of an expression a variable can be used which while not zero is
treated as a true expression. (Zero equals false. Any other value equals
true.)

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-27

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

WHILE - DO - END
N550 WHILE (expression) DO nnnn
N560 ------------------------
::
::
N590 END nnnn
N600 ---------
If the expression is true, the program repeats between N550 and N590
until the expression becomes false. Similarly, if the expression is false
when Block N550 is executed, the CNC jumps to Block N600. The
number after DO is a label (identifier only) and the same number must be
used to identify the END of the loop.
In place of an expression, you can use a variable that while not zero is
treated as a true expression. (Zero equals false. Any other value equals
true.)
DO - END
N620 DO nnnn
N630 ---------
::
::
N650 IF ( expression ) GOTO 1111
N660 -------------------
N670 END nnnn
DO - END sets the program into an infinite loop that can only be ended by
programming a GOTO (1111) command to another block. DO and END
must be paired with labels (nnnn). When executed the program repeats
Blocks N630 to N660 until the expression at N650 becomes true and
program execution continues at block (1111).

17-28 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Unconditional LOOP Repeat

Conditional statements require that a test be strictly true or false in order
for a particular course of action to be taken. Unconditional statements
are acted on without a logical precondition.
LOOP - END
N680 LOOP nnnn
N685 ---------
::
::
N695 END
LOOP instructs the control to execute the following blocks (N685) until it
reaches an END command. The sequence is repeated nnnn times. The
number of loops can be a variable assignment ( LOOP #121 ).
GOTO
\N698 GOTO nnnn
N699 ----------
GOTO is an instruction to continue program execution at the block
specified (nnnn). You should not require this instruction in a user macro.
It is intended for use in conjunction with the block skip symbol (\), as
shown in the example. When block skip is ON, Block N698 is not
executed. When block skip is OFF, Block N698 is executed and program
execution jumps to the block specified.

NOTE: When you program GOTO statements do not precede the block
number with the character "N".
For example, GOTO 610 skips to block number N610.

Short Form Addressing

The appropriate abbreviation instructs the CNC to activate the
corresponding command. Refer to Table 17-6.

Table 17-6, Abbreviations

Command Abbreviation
DO ]D
END ]E
GOTO ]G
IF ]I
LOOP ]L
PRINT ]P
THEN ]T
WHILE ]W

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-29

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Logical and Comparative Terms

The following topics are described:
‰ Logical Terms
‰ Comparative Terms
Logical Terms
All logical operations can be carried out using the following command
characters or combinations of characters. Refer to Table 17-7.

Table 17-7, Logical Symbols

Statement Symbol True/False Table
OR 0-0 = False
0-1 = True
1-0 = True
1-1 = True
EXCLUSIVE ^ 0-0= False
OR 0-1= True
1-0= True
1-1 = False
AND & 0-0= False
0-1= False
1-0= False
True

Comparative Terms
You can compare variables with variables and variables with constants
using equality and inequality operators.

The following topics are described:

‰ Equality Operators
‰ Inequality Operators
Equality Operators
N700 IF (#120 = #125) THEN (or GOTO)
N710 --------------------
::
::
N740 IF (#130 = 360) THEN (or GOTO)
N750 --------------------
Block N700 compares the contents of variable #120 with the contents of
variable #125. If the contents are equal, then the expression is true and
THEN or GOTO directs the program. Otherwise, the expression is false.
At Block N740, the contents of variable #130 are compared with the
constant 360. The result of the comparison is identical to the first case.

17-30 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Inequality Operators
NOT
N760 WHILE (#135 != #137) DO 10
N770 ------------------------
::
N790 END 10
The exclamation mark (!) symbolizes NOT. Therefore, Block N760
instructs the CNC to continue the loop to N790 while the contents of
variables #135 and #137 are not equal (condition true). When the
contents of the variables become equal the expression is false and the
loop terminates.
GREATER THAN
N800 IF (#122 > #134) GOTO 830
N810 --------------------
The symbol (>) symbolizes GREATER THAN. Therefore, Block N800
instructs the control to go to (GOTO) or jump to Block N830 if the
contents of variable #122 are greater than the contents of variable #134
(condition true). If the expression is false, execution continues to Block
N810.
LESS THAN
N840 IF (#123 < #135) GOTO 880
N850 --------------------
The symbol (<) symbolizes LESS THAN. The function is the opposite of
GREATER THAN and the expression is true when the contents of
variable #123 are less than the contents of variable #135.
NOTE: Greater than (>) and less than (<) expressions become false if
the contents of the compared variables are equal.

File Inclusion
Example 1: ["FILENAME.G
File inclusion is a function that allows a subprogram that is not actually
part of the file to be called from the main program, or from another
subprogram in the file.
In this way, a tool change subprogram or a macro can be stored in the .G
directory, and called from any other program that has the proper "file
inclusion" code, which allows the execution of the external subprogram.
Example 1 shows the syntax necessary to "include" a file into another file.
Format: open left bracket ([), then double quote character ("), then the
filename and its extension. This line must display somewhere in the
program that is to call the "included" program.

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. 17-31

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Advanced Programming Features

Example 2:
N1 O23 * TEST.G
N2 M98 P9
N3 T1 * 1.0000 MILL
N4 G0 X-.6 Y.6
N5 Z.1
N6 .
N7 .
.
.
.
N33 M98 P9
N34 T2
N35 * .368 DRILL
N36
.
.
.
N50 M98 P9
N51 M30 O23
N52 ["TOOLCHNG.G

In Example 2, a program named TOOLCHNG.G can be called from the

main program (or from an existing subprogram). It is made possible by
line N52. The file inclusion function is programmed on N52.
In this way, the same subprogram can be used in many programs, but
you do not need to type it into each program. Each program must,
contain the proper "file inclusion" block.
The program to be included must be in the form of a subprogram,
beginning with Onnn, and ending with the M99 code.
The format for file inclusion is: ["FILENAME.G
It is especially useful for including tool change subprograms, zero-setting
subprograms and macros.

17-32 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

#1000, block skip, description, 17-10 .fxd extension, created, using DXF converter,
#1001–#1009, selective block skip, 16-8
description, 17-11 .G extension
#1030, stock-variable, 9-23 created, using DXF converter, 16-1, 16-8
% Feed, machine status display, 3-10 program names, 10-7
% RPM, machine status display, 3-10 .M extension, created, using DXF converter,
(ALT + H) Hold, hold the program, 14-1 16-1, 16-8
(ALT + S) Start, start up screen, 14-1 .sel extension, created, using DXF converter,
(SHIFT + F1) Msgs 16-8
auto mode screen, 11-3 2-D Line Draw (F4), View Type (F5) screen,
description, 3-14 8-5
single-step screen, 11-3 3-D Line Draw (F5), View Type (F5) screen,
(SHIFT + F10) Quit, cancel unsaved edits, 6-7 8-5
(SHIFT + F10) Shut Down 3-D Perspective View (F2), View Type (F5)
description, 3-13 screen, 8-5
manual mode, 3-5 3-D Shaded (F6), View Type (F5) screen,
shut down screen, 14-1 8-5
(SHIFT + F10) Up Dir, screen illustration, 10-6 4-axis
(SHIFT + F2) Clear MDI, clear MDI history programming conventions, 15-2
page, 3-19 programming, description, 15-1
(SHIFT + F2) Create Dir, description, 10-12 6000i CNC Technical Manual, P/N 627787-
(SHIFT + F3) BG Prog 21, referenced, 3-13, 3-14, 5-62, 5-78,
auto mode screen, 11-3 9-10, 11-3
single-step screen, 11-3 6000i-3X, icon, defined, 1-1
(SHIFT + F3) Undo 6000i-4X, description, 15-1
cancel edits, 6-9 6000i-4X, icon, defined, 1-1
restore, deleted blocks, 6-9
(SHIFT + F4) Log to, program screen, 10-4 A
(SHIFT + F4) Parts Counter abbreviations, command, listed, 17-29
auto mode screen, 11-3 absolute mode
single-step screen, 11-3 center-angle arc, illustration, 7-7
(SHIFT + F4) Redo, restore, canceled edits, change to, (G90), 4-33
6-9 description, 1-6, 3-16
(SHIFT + F5) PLC, referenced, 3-13, 9-10 absolute zero
(SHIFT + F7) OSC defined, 3-16
auto mode screen, 11-3 point, to set, (G92), 4-33
referenced, 3-13 reference point, 1-6, 3-16
single-step screen, 11-3 absolute, (G90), edit help, 7-5
(SHIFT + F7) Show Details, screen accumulated run-time timer, description,
illustration, 10-6 11-10
(SHIFT + F8) Find in Table, description, 9-10 activate
(SHIFT + F8) OLM manual mode, feed, 3-15
auto mode screen, 11-3 manual mode, rapid, 3-15
referenced, 3-13, 9-10 servos, 3-5
single-step screen, 11-3 active soft key, manual screen area, 3-10
(SHIFT + F9) Change Layout, screen address words, typing in, 7-19
illustration, 10-5 Adjust Blk Form (F1)
(SHIFT + F9) SIK, referenced, 3-13 changes the Draw image display to
.DXF extension, 16-1 simulate cut away feature, 8-11

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice Index-1

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

screen, illustration, 8-11 hold, 11-7

Adjust View (F6) to run, 11-6
change Draw image display, 8-7 screen, illustration, 11-7
screen, illustration, 8-7 screen, soft keys, secondary, listed, 11-3
adjusting secondary, soft keys, listed, 11-3
feedrate, 3-15 soft keys, listed, 11-3
rapid move speed, 3-15 starting block, select, using arrow keys,
advance block 11-8
beginning, 6-10 switch from, single-step mode, 11-6
end of, 6-10 automatic
end of program, 6-10 mode, defined, 11-1
first of program, 6-10 tool changer, 5-8, 9-11
advanced programming features auxiliary, keyboard, single value, to clear,
block, separators, 17-2 9-5
conditional statements, 17-27 axis
expressions, functions, 17-5 address, unary minus, example, 17-13
logical and comparative terms, 17-30 approach, 5-32
modifiers, description, 17-1 descriptions, 1-3
modifiers, listed, 17-1 four-axis, types
probe move (G31), 17-26 linear, description, 15-1
system variables, 17-8 rotary, description, 15-1
tool offset, modification, 17-3 of motion, illustration, 1-4
user macros (G65, G66, G67), 17-17 rotation, (G68)
user variables, 17-9 canceled by G92, 4-33
alphanumeric keys description, 4-28
description, 2-3 examples, 4-29
illustration, 2-2 scaling, (G72), 4-32
listed, 2-3 scaling, (G72), canceled by G92, 4-33
angle select key, illustration, 3-7
measurement, 1-7 selecting, 3-17
references, 1-8
angular motion programming, example, 4-6 B
arc back up on, USB memory stick, 1-2
CCW, (G3) background programming, soft key,
description, 7-8 description, 11-3
edit help, 7-6 ball end mill
CW, (G2) length offsets, using, 9-21
description, 7-8 setting TLO, illustration, 9-22
edit help, 7-6 tool diameter compensation, using, 9-21
direction, illustration, 1-9, 4-13 basic drill cycle, (G81)
partial, example, 4-8 description, 5-3
programming, description, 7-6 edit help, 7-9
arcs, description, 7-6 screen illustration, 7-23
area clearance, irregular pocket, (G169), basic M-functions, description, 7-12
5-24 basic modal functions, listed, 7-5
ARROW keys, illustration, 2-7 BG Prog (SHIFT + F3)
ATC. See automatic tool changer auto mode screen, 11-3
auto mode single-step screen, 11-3
default operation mode, 8-3 Bin (F4), description, 9-8
program blank line, to insert, 6-14
cancel, 11-7

Index-2 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

block defined, 4-1

end of program, feature, 6-10 edit help, 7-5
end of, feature, 6-10 listing, table, 7-14
goto, feature, 6-13 unsaved, edits, 6-7
insert, feature, 6-8 Cancel (F2), shut down screen, 3-5, 14-1
number, 3-10 canned cycles
program area label, 3-10 defined, 5-1
selective skip, description, 17-11 description, 5-1
separators, description, 17-2 drilling tapping, boring, (G81–G89), 5-2
skip variables, description, 17-9 probe cycles, description, 5-61
skip, description, 17-10 spindle probe, description, 5-78
start of program, feature, 6-10 tapping, G84, 5-5
start of, feature, 6-10 CD-ROM drive, USB, 13-2
Block search chamfering, (G59, G60), 4-21
(F3), use to select a starting block, 11-5 Change Layout (SHIFT + F9), screen
Find (F8), soft keys, listed, 11-6 illustration, 10-5
soft keys, listed, 11-5 Change Window (F5), Msgs screen, 3-14
using to select, starting block, 11-5 changing, jog mode, 3-17
BlockForm (G120) character, to delete, 6-7
description, 4-35 chip break cycle, (G87)
edit help, 7-11 description, 5-7
program requirement for Draw, 8-2 edit help, 7-9
boring. See also, drilling circular interpolation
bidirectional cycle, (G85), 5-6 absolute mode, 4-8
bidirectional cycle, (G85), edit help, 7-9 CCW, (G3), description, 4-7
canned cycles, (G81–G89), 5-2 circle, example, 4-10
counter drill cycle, (G82), 5-3 CW, (G2), description, 4-7
example, 5-8 incremental mode, 4-8
flat bottom cycle (G89), 5-8 parameters, 4-7
unidirectional cycle, (G86), 5-6 partial arc, example, 4-8, 4-9
unidirectional cycle, (G86), edit help, 7-9 circular move, plane you select, 1-8
circular pocket cycle, (G77)
C description, 5-20
calibAndToolMeasurementRPM, description, edit help, 7-10
5-67 circular profile cycle, (G171)
call subprogram, (M98) description, 5-34
basic M-functions, 7-12 edit help, 7-9
control M-Codes, 12-3 screen illustration, 7-20
edit help, 7-18 circular slot cycle, (G211)
cancel description, 5-48
a single step run, 11-4 edit help, 7-10
auto mode program, 11-7 screen illustration, 7-26
drill, tap, bore cycle, (G80), 5-3 CLEAR key
G81–G89, drilling off, (G80), listing, table, illustration, 2-7
7-15 single value, to clear, 9-5
In-Position Mode, modal, exact stop, Clear Line (F7), tool page, row to clear, 9-5
(G64), 4-12 Clear MDI (SHIFT + F2), clear MDI history
macro modal macro, (G66), edit help, page, 3-19
7-11 clearing
modal macro, (G67), listing, table, 7-14 a halted program, 11-8
modal radius or chamfer, (G60) entries, 2-9

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice Index-3

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

CNC On
DXF converter (M08), See M8, 7-18
description, 16-4 (M8)
file creation, 16-1 control M-Codes, 12-2
files created, 16-8 cooling, cleaning, & lubrication, 7-12
parts counter, description, 11-10 edit help, 7-18
timer, description, 11-10 ready, LED, 3-8
codes, order of execution, 12-4 cooling, cleaning, and lubrication M-function,
command line, manual screen area, 3-9 description, 7-12
command, abbreviations, listed, 17-29 copy
comments, include in program listing, 6-16 program blocks, 6-15
common (global) variables, description, 17-9 program, other directories, 10-10
comparative terms, description, 17-30 corner rounding/chamfering, (G59, G60),
compensated move, ramping, 9-19 4-21
compensation CounterBore drill cycle, (G82)
LEFT, (G41), edit help, 7-5 description, 5-3
left-hand, 9-16 edit help, 7-9
OFF, (G40), edit help, 7-5 screen illustration, 7-24
RIGHT, (G42), edit help, 7-5 create
right-hand, 9-16 new programs, 10-7
computation, storing result, 17-14 subdirectory, description, 10-12
conditional statements, description, 17-27 Create (F2), new program, 10-7
consecutive compensated moves, Create Dir (SHIFT + F2), description, 10-12
illustration, 9-18 cursor, tool page, description, 2-9
console, illustration, 2-1 cutting direction, 5-32
continuous cutting mode. See also, contouring mode
jog, 3-11
jog, Feed mode, 3-17 D
jog, Rapid mode, 3-17 dashboard
move, execute, 3-18 description, 8-3
continuous path mode. See also, contouring Draw screen, illustration, 8-4
mode illustration, 8-4
contouring mode, (G64) decimal points, 7-3
description, 4-24 defining, positions, 1-5
edit help, 7-11 delete
control M-Codes a character, 6-7
description, 12-3 a program, 10-8
listed, table, 12-3 groups of programs, 10-12
conventional program block, 6-8
jog, 3-11 text, 2-9
jog mode, 3-17 Delete
conversion formula (F2), delete a character, 6-7
minutes to decimal, 15-1 (F3), delete, a program, 10-8
seconds to degrees, 15-1 (F7), to delete, text, 2-9
coolant Block (F4), deleting program block, 6-8
Off groups of programs, 10-12
(M09), See M9, 7-18 DELETE key, single value, to clear, 9-5
(M9) desktop icon, off-line software, 14-2
control M-Codes, 12-2 diameter
cooling, cleaning, & lubrication, 7-12 machine status display, 3-10
edit help, 7-18 offset, tool page, 9-15

Index-4 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

diameterOfToolProbeGauge, description, pattern cycle (G179)

5-64 description, 5-11
direct transfer, variables, 17-13 edit help, 7-9
disclaimer, iii screen illustration, 7-24
disengage, servos, 3-5 drilling. See also, boring
display cycles, description, 7-9
DXF off, (G80), 5-3
double window size, 16-6 off, (G80), edit help, 7-9
fit window, 16-6 soft keys, listed, 5-3
half window size, 16-6 tapping, boring canned cycles, (G81–
window zoom, 16-6 G89), 5-2
window, zoom in, 16-6 dry run
gauge all axes, (M105)
description, 3-4 basic M-functions, 7-12
screen, from SHIFT Manual, illustration, control M-Codes, 12-3
3-3 edit help, 7-18
screen, soft keys, listed, 3-4 No Z-axis, (M106)
Display Program basic M-functions, 7-12
(F8), display Draw image, program, and control M-Codes, 12-3
dashboard, 8-4 edit help, 7-18
(F8), screen, illustration, 8-4 Off-cancel M105 and M106 (M107)
distance to go basic M-functions, 7-12
display mode, description, 11-6 control M-Codes, 12-3
manual screen area, 3-9 edit help, 7-18
DO-END, conditional statement, 17-28 dwell
double, window size, display, DXF, 16-6 (G04), See G4, 7-11
dpm, degrees per minute, defined, 15-1 (G4), description, 4-11
draft angle pocket cycle, (G73) (G4), edit help, 7-11
description, 5-14 machine status display, 3-10
edit help, 7-10 tapping canned cycle, 5-5
Draw DXF, 16-6
(F7), viewing program, 8-1 defined, 1-1
CNC code, view tool paths, 16-4 description, 16-1
F10, exit, 8-16 display
program, requirements, 8-2 double. window size, 16-6
real-time mode, description, 8-1 fit window, 16-6
screen, illustration, 8-2 window, zoom, 16-6
simulation mode extension, 16-1
description, 8-1 screen, illustration, 16-2
operation mode, 8-3 DXF converter
screen, description, 8-3 CNC code, description, 16-4
to activate, 8-2 contours and drill holes, 16-1
starting, 8-2 contours, description, 16-3
using while running programs, 11-8 create, conversational file, 16-1
viewing, programs, 8-1 create, G-Code file, 16-1
Drawing Exchange Format, See DXF, 1-1 drilling, description, 16-3
drill edited
4-axis, programming examples, 15-3 conversational program, listing, 16-13
bolt hole cycle, (G79) G-Code program, listing, 16-16
description, 5-10 entities
edit help, 7-9 not supported, 16-7

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice Index-5

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

supported, table, 16-7 Replace with, feature, 6-13

examples, 16-8 unmark, program blocks, 6-7
feature, description, 16-1 Edit Help G-Code Menu, table, 7-13
files, created, 16-8 effectivity notation, 1-1
mouse operations, table, 16-4 ELSE, conditional statement, 17-27
requirements emergency stop, reset, 3-5
machine software, 16-1 end of
off-line software, 16-1 program (M2), basic M-functions, 7-12
shapes program, feature, 6-10
creating, 16-3 subprogram (M99), description, 5-57
types, listed, 16-3 End of Block, Move (F7), feature, 6-10
soft keys, descriptions, 16-5 End of Prog, Move (F7), feature, 6-10
to open, 16-2 end of subprogram (M99)
unedited basic M-functions, 7-12
conversational program, listing, 16-10 control M-Codes, 12-3
G-Code program, listing, 16-11 edit help, 7-18
program run in Draw, illustration, 16-12 macro terminated, 4-26
end user, common (global) variables, macro
E numbers, 17-9
edge finding, G141, 5-82 ENDIF, conditional statement, 17-27
edit EndMill cycle, (G176)
canceling, unsaved, 6-7 description, 5-39
help edit help, 7-9
description, 7-1 screen illustration, 7-22
M-Code listing, 7-18 engrave cycle, (G190)
screens, examples, illustrations, 7-20 description, 5-50
soft keys, listed, 7-2 listed, 7-9
keys, illustration, 2-2 sample program, 5-51
keys, table, 2-7 screen illustration, 7-23
saving, 6-7 ENTER key, illustration, 2-7
screen, description, 6-2 entries, clearing, 2-9
soft keys, description, 6-3 entry field types, listed, 7-3
Edit (F2), Draw screen, 6-2 equality operators, description, 17-30
Edit (F3), manual screen, 6-2 E-STOP
Edit (F8) emergency stop, 3-5
program editor, 1-2 key, illustration, 3-8
program screen, 6-2 no keyboard equivalent, 13-1
program screen, access DXF converter, to reset, 3-5
16-2 exact stop
Edit Funct (F8) (G09), See G9, 7-11
copy, blocks, description, 6-15 (G9), edit help, 7-11
cut, blocks, description, 6-15 check
deleting, a program block, 6-8 G61, In-Position Mode, modal, 4-23
edit screen, description, 6-6 G64, cancel (G61), 4-23
find/replace screen, description, 6-12, G9, In-Position Mode, non-modal, 4-23
6-13 G-Code, formats, 4-12
find/replace, description, 6-11 mode, (G61), edit help, 7-11
marking blocks, 6-7 non-modal, (G9), 4-12
paste, blocks, 6-15 examples, jog/return, 11-13
pop-up menu, description, 6-6 exit
pop-up menu, illustration, 6-6 F10, Draw program, 8-16

Index-6 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

shut down, 3-5 F3 (Edit), manual screen, 6-2

Exit (F10) F3 (Insert)
Draw, to exit, 8-16 inserting, a program block, 6-8
edits, saving, 6-7 text, no overwrite, 6-9
shut down screen, 3-14 text, with overwrite, 6-10
expressions F3 (Log Files), referenced, 3-14
description, 17-5 F3 (Offset)
examples, 17-6 description, 9-9
listed, operators, 17-5 fixture offset table, to activate, 4-19
unary minus, example, 17-13 F3 (Projection View), View Type (F5) screen,
Extra (F2), tool information, 9-8 8-5
F3 (Rotate), rotate Draw image, 8-13
F F4 (2-D Line Draw), View Type (F5) screen,
F1 (Adjust Blk Form), changes the Draw 8-5
image display to simulate cut away F4 (Bin), description, 9-8
feature, 8-11 F4 (Delete Block), deleting program block,
F1 (Find previous) 6-8
Replace with, feature, 6-13 F4 (Goto), use to select a starting block,
search, specific text, 6-11 11-5
F1 (Plane View), View Type (F5) screen, 8-5 F4 (Home)
F1 (Restart Pos), jog/return screen, power on CNC, 3-2
description, 11-12 start up screen, 14-1
F1 (Run) F4 (Match Case)
run Draw program, 8-2 find/replace screen, 6-11
run program without pause, 8-3 Replace with, feature, 6-13
F1 (Shape), DXF converter, 16-3 F4 (More Funcs), Msgs screen, 3-14
F1 (Shut Down), shut down screen, 3-5, F4 (Pan), pan the Draw image, 8-14
3-14, 14-1 F4 (Single Step), run program one block at a
F10 (Exit) time, 8-3
Draw, to exit, 8-16 F5 (3-D Line Draw), View Type (F5) screen,
edits, saving, 6-7 8-5
shut down screen, 3-14 F5 (Change Window), Msgs screen, 3-14
F10 (Return) F5 (Move Cursor), move cursor in the Draw
exit, Find/Replace screen, 6-11 image, 8-15
jog/return screen, description, 11-12 F5 (Page Up), paging, through program,
F2 (3-D Perspective View), View Type (F5) 6-14
screen, 8-5 F5 (View Type), display Draw view types, 8-5
F2 (Cancel), shut down screen, 3-5, 14-1 F6 (3-D Shaded), View Type (F5) screen,
F2 (Create), new program, 10-7 8-5
F2 (Delete), delete a character, 6-7 F6 (Adjust View), change Draw image
F2 (Edit), Draw screen, 6-2 display, 8-7
F2 (Extra), tool information, 9-8 F6 (Page Down), paging, through program,
F2 (Find next) 6-14
Replace with, feature, 6-13 F6 (Replace), Replace with, feature, 6-13
search, specific text, 6-11 F7 (Clear Line), tool page, row to clear, 9-5
F2 (Jog), initiate jog/return, 11-11 F7 (Delete), to delete, text, 2-9
F2 (Program), from Manual screen, 1-2 F7 (Draw), viewing program, 8-1
F2 (Zoom), zoom display Draw image, 8-12 F7 (Move)
F3 (Block search), use to select a starting edit screen, description, 6-5
block, 11-5 End of Block, feature, 6-10
F3 (Delete), delete, a program, 10-8 End of Prog, feature, 6-10

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice Index-7

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

goto block, illustration, 6-13 FEED

pop-up menu, illustration, 6-5 feedrate
Start of Block, feature, 6-10 defined, 4-2
Start of Prog, feature, 6-10 description, 4-37
F7 (Tool), jog/return screen, description, edit help, 7-5
11-12 listing, table, 7-17
F8 (Display Program), display Draw image, inch programming, example, 4-37
program, and dashboard, 8-4 MM programming, example, 4-37
F8 (Edit Funct) feed block, description, 4-37
copy, blocks, description, 6-15 feed move – end-point, (G1)
cut, blocks, description, 6-15 linear interpolation, illustration, 4-5
deleting, a program block, 6-8 feed move – end-point, (G1)
find/replace screen, description, 6-11, description, 4-5
6-12, 6-13 feed move (G1)
marking blocks, 6-7 edit help, 7-5
paste, blocks, 6-15 programming example, 4-5
Replace with, feature, 6-13 feed, machine status display, 3-10
F8 (Edit) Feed, move, 3-17
program editor, 1-2 feedrate
program screen, 6-2 (FEED), description, 4-37
program screen, access DXF converter, (FEED), edit help, 7-5
16-2 adjustment, 3-15
F8 (Find) FEEDRATE OVERRIDE
description, 9-4 adjusting, 3-15
tool number, description, 9-9 setting, 3-10
F8 (Handwheel), jog/return screen, switch, adjusting, 3-15
description, 11-12 switch, illustration, 3-7
F8 (Insert Off (overwrite)), typing over text, file inclusion, description, 17-31
2-9 Find (F8)
F8 (Insert On), inserting text, 2-9 description, 9-4
F8 (Line Number) tool number, description, 9-9
adds line numbers on the Draw image, Find in Table (SHIFT + F8), description, 9-10
8-9 Find next (F2)
View Type (F5) screen, 8-6 Replace with, feature, 6-13
F9 (Opts), display Draw options screen, 8-8 search, specific text, 6-11
F9 (Prog Contr.) Find previous (F1)
adds program contour line on the Draw Replace with, feature, 6-13
image, 8-10 search, specific text, 6-11
View Type (F5) screen, 8-6 Find what, find/replace screen, 6-11
F9 (Teach) find, specific text, 6-11
offsets in tool page, enter, 9-13 Find/Replace
tool length offsets, setting, 9-14 (F8), screen, illustration, 6-11
tool probe calibration cycle, 5-64 Find what, feature, 6-11
F9 (Utils), pop-up Replace with, feature, 6-13
menu, illustration, 10-8 soft keys, description, 6-12
face mill cycle first block, 1-2
(G170), 5-32 fit, window, display, DXF, 16-6
(G170), edit help, 7-9 fixture offset table
(G170), screen illustration, 7-20 description, 4-18
tool approach, illustration, 5-32 illustration, 4-19
to activate, 4-19

Index-8 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

to adjust, 4-19 G120

to change, 4-19 BlockForm
fixture offsets (G53) defined, 4-2
description, 4-18 description, 4-35
edit help, 7-11 edit help, 7-11
examples, 4-20 listing, table, 7-16
flat bottom boring cycle (G89) program requirement for Draw, 8-2
description, 5-8 G140
edit help, 7-9 spindle probe calibration cycle
floppy disk, USB, 13-2 defined, 4-1, 5-77
four-axis programming, description, 15-1 description, 5-80
frame pocket cycle, (G75) G141
description, 5-16 single surface measure/edge find
edit help, 7-10 defined, 4-1, 5-78
functions description, 5-82
description, 17-5 G142
listed, operators, 17-5 outside part corner find
defined, 4-1, 5-78
G description, 5-83
G extension, created, using DXF converter, G143
16-1, 16-8 inside part corner find
G0, rapid move defined, 4-1, 5-78
defined, 4-1 description, 5-85
description, 4-4 G144
edit help, 7-5 inside or outside hole or boss center find
listing, table, 7-13 defined, 4-1, 5-78
modal, listing, table, 7-13 description, 5-87
G04, See G4, 7-11 G145
G09, See G9, 7-11 inside or outside web or slot center find
G1 defined, 4-1, 5-78
feed move description, 5-89
defined, 4-1 G146
description, 4-5 protected positioning move
edit help, 7-5 defined, 4-1, 5-78
listing, table, 7-13 description, 5-91
modal, listing, table, 7-13 G147
programming example, 4-5 skew error or angle find
G100 defined, 4-1, 5-78
mirroring description, 5-92
canceled by G53, 4-18 G150
canceled by G92, 4-33 tool probe calibration cycle
defined, 4-2 defined, 4-1, 5-62
description, 4-34 description, 5-64
edit help, 7-10 G151
listing, table, 7-16 tool length and diameter offset preset
G1000 defined, 4-1, 5-62
programmable temporary path tolerance description, 5-66
defined, 4-2 G152
description, 4-36 manual tool-length offset preset
defined, 4-1, 5-63
for special tools, description, 5-71

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice Index-9

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

G153 G172
manual tool diameter preset rectangular profile cycle
defined, 4-2, 5-63 defined, 4-2
description, 5-73 description, 5-36
tool breakage, length and diameter wear edit help, 7-9
protection listing, table, 7-16
defined, 4-2 screen illustration, 7-21
G154 G175
tool breakage, length and diameter wear mill cycle
detection defined, 4-2
defined, 5-63 description, 5-38
description, 5-75 edit help, 7-9
G162 listing, table, 7-16
islands screen illustration, 7-21
defined, 4-2 G176
description, 5-26 EndMill cycle
edit help, 7-10 defined, 4-2
listing, table, 7-16 description, 5-39
G169 edit help, 7-9
irregular pocket cycle listing, table, 7-16
defined, 4-2 screen illustration, 7-22
description, 5-24 G177
edit help, 7-10 plunge circular pocket cycle
listing, table, 7-16 defined, 4-2
programming example, illustration, 5- description, 5-43
30, 5-31 edit help, 7-10
G17 listing, table, 7-16
XY plane position the start hole, 5-44
default plane, 4-31 screen illustration, 7-25
defined, 4-1 G178
edit help, 7-5 plunge rectangular pocket cycle
helical interpolation, example, 4-10 defined, 4-2
illustration, 4-12 description, 5-13, 5-44
listing, table, 7-13 edit help, 7-10
modal, listing, table, 7-13 listing, table, 7-16
spindle probe cycle, 5-77 screen illustration, 7-25
G17, G18, G19 - plane selection, 4-12 G179
G170 drill pattern cycle
face mill cycle defined, 4-2
defined, 4-2 description, 5-11
description, 5-32 edit help, 7-9
edit help, 7-9 listing, table, 7-16
listing, table, 7-16 programming example, illustration, 5-12
screen illustration, 7-20 screen illustration, 7-24
G171 G18
circular profile cycle XZ plane
defined, 4-2 defined, 4-1
description, 5-34 edit help, 7-5
edit help, 7-9 illustration, 4-12
listing, table, 7-16 listing, table, 7-13
screen illustration, 7-20 modal, listing, table, 7-13

Index-10 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

G181 description, 4-15

thread mill cycle edit help, 7-11
defined, 4-2 listing, table, 7-14
description, 5-40 G29
edit help, 7-9 return from machine home
listing, table, 7-16 description, 4-16
screen illustration, 7-22 return from reference point
G19 defined, 4-1
YZ plane edit help, 7-11
defined, 4-1 listing, table, 7-14
edit help, 7-5 G3
illustration, 4-12 arc CCW
listing, table, 7-14 defined, 4-1
modal, listing, table, 7-13 description, 4-7, 7-8
G190 edit help, 7-6
engrave cycle listing, table, 7-13
description, 5-50 modal, listing, table, 7-13
edit help, 7-9 G30
listing, table, 7-17 move reference from machine home
sample program, 5-51 defined, 4-1
screen illustration, 7-23 description, 4-17
G2 G31
arc CW probe move
defined, 4-1 defined, 4-1
description, 4-7, 7-8 description, 5-61, 17-26
edit help, 7-6 referenced, 4-17
listing, table, 7-13 G4, dwell
modal, listing, table, 7-13 defined, 4-1
G210 description, 4-11
slot cycle edit help, 7-11
defined, 4-2 listing, table, 7-13
description, 5-46 G40
edit help, 7-10 compensation OFF
listing, table, 7-17 defined, 4-1
screen illustration, 7-26 edit help, 7-5
G211 listing, table, 7-14
circular slot cycle tool radius compensation, to cancel
defined, 4-2 cancel compensation, example, 9-22
description, 5-48 G41, 4-20
edit help, 7-10 G42, 4-20
listing, table, 7-17 G41
screen illustration, 7-26 compensation LEFT
G22 canceled by, G40, 4-20
stroke limit defined, 4-1
defined, 4-1 edit help, 7-5
edit help, 7-11 listing, table, 7-14
listing, table, 7-14 not permitted during pocket cycles, 5-13
to set, 4-14 programming example, 9-29
G28 G41, G42, tool path compensation, 9-16
reference point return
defined, 4-1

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice Index-11

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

G42 edit help, 7-11

compensation RIGHT listing, table, 7-14
canceled by, G40, 4-20 macro program, example, 17-20
defined, 4-1 macro subprogram, example, 17-20
edit help, 7-5 non-modal, 4-25
listing, table, 7-14 pass values to variables, 4-26
not permitted during pocket cycles, 5-13 G65, G66, G67, user macros
programming example, 9-30 description, 17-17
G53 referenced, 4-25
fixture offset G66
defined, 4-1 macro call, modal
description, 4-18 defined, 4-1
edit help, 7-11 description, 4-25
examples, 4-20 edit help, 7-11
listing, table, 7-14 listing, table, 7-14
G59 pass values to variables, 4-26
modal radius/chamfer G66/G67 macro program, example, 17-21
defined, 4-1 G67
edit help, 7-5 cancel modal macro
listing, table, 7-14 defined, 4-1
G59, G60, modal corner edit help, 7-11
rounding/chamfering, 4-21 listing, table, 7-14
G60 G68
cancel modal radius or chamfer axis rotation
defined, 4-1 canceled by G53, 4-18
edit help, 7-5 canceled by G92, 4-33
listing, table, 7-14 defined, 4-1
modal corner rounding Off description, 4-28
description, 4-21 edit help, 7-10
G61 examples, 4-29
exact stop mode listing, table, 7-14
defined, 4-1 G70
edit help, 7-11 inch
In-Position Mode, modal, exact stop, defined, 4-1
4-12 edit help, 7-5
In-Position Mode, modal, exact stop listing, table, 7-14
check, 4-23 modal, listing, table, 7-13
listing, table, 7-14 mode format, 4-32
to cancel G64, 4-24 programming, example, 4-37
G64 G71
contouring mode MM
cancel (G61), 4-23 defined, 4-1
cancel, In-Position Mode, modal, exact edit help, 7-5
stop, 4-12 listing, table, 7-15
defined, 4-1 modal, listing, table, 7-13
description, 4-24 mode format, 4-32
edit help, 7-11 G72
listing, table, 7-14 scaling
G65 canceled by G53, 4-18
macro call, single canceled by G92, 4-33
defined, 4-1 defined, 4-1

Index-12 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

description, 4-32 edit help, 7-9

edit help, 7-10 listing, table, 7-15
listing, table, 7-15 G81
G73 basic drill cycle
draft angle pocket cycle defined, 4-1
defined, 4-1 description, 5-3
description, 5-14 edit help, 7-9
edit help, 7-10 listing, table, 7-15
listing, table, 7-15 screen illustration, 7-23
programming example, illustration, 5-15 G81–G89
G75 drilling, tapping, boring canned cycles,
frame pocket cycle 5-2
defined, 4-1 programmed prior to G79, 5-10
description, 5-16 G82
edit help, 7-10 CounterBore drill cycle
listing, table, 7-15 defined, 4-2
programming example, illustration, 5-17 description, 5-3
G76 edit help, 7-9
hole mill cycle listing, table, 7-15
defined, 4-1 screen illustration, 7-24
description, 5-18 G83
edit help, 7-10 peck drill cycle
listing, table, 7-15 defined, 4-2
programming example, illustration, 5-19 description, 5-4
edit help, 7-9
G77 listing, table, 7-15
circular pocket cycle G84
defined, 4-1 tapping cycle
description, 5-20 canned cycle, description, 5-5
edit help, 7-10 defined, 4-2
listing, table, 7-15 edit help, 7-9
programming example, illustration, 5-21 listing, table, 7-15
G78 G85
rectangular pocket cycle boring bidirectional cycle
defined, 4-1 defined, 4-2
description, 5-13, 5-22 description, 5-6
edit help, 7-10 edit help, 7-9
listing, table, 7-15 listing, table, 7-15
mill out pocket prior to G73, 5-14 G86
programming example, illustration, 5-23 boring unidirectional cycle
G79 defined, 4-2
drill bolt hole cycle description, 5-6
defined, 4-1 edit help, 7-9
description, 5-10 listing, table, 7-15
edit help, 7-9 G87
listing, table, 7-15 chip break cycle
G80 defined, 4-2
drilling off description, 5-7
cancel drill, tap, bore cycle, 5-3 edit help, 7-9
defined, 4-1 listing, table, 7-15
description, 5-3

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice Index-13

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

G89 machine status display, 3-10

flat bottom boring cycle macros, description, 4-25
defined, 4-2 modal
description, 5-8 listing, table, 7-13
edit help, 7-9 spindle probe cycles, listed, 5-77
listing, table, 7-15 tool probe cycles, listed, 5-62
G9 user macros, listed, 17-17
exact stop getting started, 1-2
defined, 4-1 G-functions
edit help, 7-11 arcs, listed, 7-6
In-Position Mode, non-modal, exact basic modal functions, listed, 7-5
stop, 4-12 drilling cycles, listed, 7-9
In-Position Mode, non-modal, exact groups, listed, 7-4
stop check, 4-23 milling and profiles, listed, 7-9
listing, table, 7-13 other G-function, listed, 7-11
non-modal, 4-12 pocket cycles, listed, 7-10
G90 rotation, scaling, and mirroring, listed,
absolute 7-10
defined, 4-2 tool radius compensation, listed, 7-5
edit help, 7-5 Goto (F4), use to select a starting block,
listing, table, 7-15 11-5
modal, listing, table, 7-13 goto block
mode, change to, 4-33 feature, 6-13
illustration, 6-13
G91 GOTO, conditional statement, 17-27, 17-29
incremental GREATER THAN operator, description,
defined, 4-2 17-31
edit help, 7-5 green icon, program running, program area
listing, table, 7-15 label, 3-10
modal, listing, table, 7-13
mode, change to, 4-33 H
programming, description, 4-31 half, window size, display, DXF, 16-6
G92 halted program, clearing, 11-8
zero set handwheel
absolute zero point, to set, 4-33 jog mode setting, table, 3-21
defined, 4-2 key, illustration, 3-7
edit help, 7-11 to operate, 3-21
listing, table, 7-16 to select, 3-21
to cancel Handwheel (F8), jog/return screen,
G100, mirroring, 4-33 description, 11-12
G68, axis rotation, 4-33 helical interpolation
G72, axis scaling, 4-33 description, 4-10
G-Code example, 4-10
defined, 4-1 program, example, 4-10
entering, example, 7-19 Help
entry fields, 7-17 graphic screen, use to enter program
exact stop, formats, 4-12 blocks, 7-3
groups, listed, 7-4 to access, 7-1
in-position mode, formats, 4-23 highlight bar, 2-8
listed, table, 4-1 hold
listing, table, 7-13 a single step run, 11-4

Index-14 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

auto mode program, 11-7 inside or outside hole or boss center find,
the execution, 11-4 G144
Hold (ALT + S), hold the program, 14-1 defined, 5-78
HOLD key, illustration, 3-8 description, 5-87
hole mill cycle, (G76) inside or outside web or slot center find,
description, 5-18 G145
edit help, 7-10 defined, 5-78
Home (F4) description, 5-89
power on CNC, 3-2 inside part corner find, G143
start up screen, 14-1 defined, 5-78
description, 5-85
I inside profile
icon ramp moves, illustration, 5-36
green, program running, program area ramp position, illustration, 5-34
label, 3-10 inside/outside boss/hole finding, G144, 5-87
red, program hold, program area, 3-10 inside/outside web finding, G145, 5-89
IF - GOTO, conditional statement, 17-27 inspecting, programmed moves, 8-1
IF, conditional statement, 17-27 install, keyboard, 13-1
IN POSN, program area label, 3-10 introduction, 1-1
inch mode format, (G70), 4-32 IPM, defined, 4-37
inch, (G70), edit help, 7-5 irregular pocket cycle, (G169)
incremental description, 5-24
(G90), edit help, 7-5 edit help, 7-10
jog mode, 3-17 islands, (G162)
mode description, 5-26
center-angle arc, illustration, 7-7 edit help, 7-10
change to, (G91), 4-33
J
move, execute, 3-18
positioning, 1-7 jog
inequality operators, description, 17-31 :1, mode, 3-17
In-Position Mode :10, mode, 3-17
G64, cancel (G61), 4-23 :100, mode, 3-17
modal, exact stop check, (G61), 4-23 continuous, 3-11
modal, exact stop, (G61), 4-12 continuous move, execute, 3-18
non-modal, exact stop check, (G9), 4-23 conventional, 3-11
non-modal, exact stop, (G9), 4-12 incremental move, execute, 3-18
insert mode
block, feature, 6-8 changing, 3-17
line, feature, 6-14 handwheel, to select, 3-21
text mode, 2-9 modes, listed, table, 3-17
text, no overwrite, 6-9 moves, description, 3-17
text, with overwrite, 6-10 JOG – key, illustration, 3-8
Insert Jog (F2), initiate jog/return, 11-11
(F3), inserting, a program block, 6-8 JOG + key, illustration, 3-8
(F3), text, no overwrite, 6-9 jog and return. See jog/return
(F3), text, with overwrite, 6-10 JOG key, illustration, 3-7
Block, inserting, a program block, 6-8 jog/return
Off (overwrite) (F8), typing over text, 2-9 description, 11-11
On (F8), inserting text, 2-9 examples, 11-13
inside corner finding, G143, 5-85 soft keys, listed, 11-12

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice Index-15

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

jump to new program (M30) control M-Codes, 12-3

basic M-functions, 7-12 edit help, 7-18
control M-Codes, 12-3 M00, See M0, 7-18
edit help, 7-18 M01, See M1, 7-18
M02, See M2, 7-18
K M03, See M3, 7-18
keyboard M04, See M4, 7-18
description, 2-7 M05, See M5, 7-18
equivalent keypad keys, table, 13-1 M06, See M6, 7-18
external, 2-7 M08, See M8, 7-18
to install, 13-1 M09, See M9, 7-18
keypad M1
equivalent keyboard keys, table, 13-1 optional program stop
illustration, 2-2 basic M-functions, 7-12
control M-Codes, 12-3
L edit help, 7-18
LCD, defined, 2-1 M105
LED, coolant ready, 3-8 dry run, all axes
LEDs, manual panel, listed, 3-8 basic M-functions, 7-12
left hand tool compensation, illustration, 9-16 control M-Codes, 12-3
length offsets edit help, 7-18
ball end mill, using, 9-21 M106
to measure, 9-13 dry run, No Z-axis
length, machine status display, 3-10 basic M-functions, 7-12
LESS THAN operator, description, 17-31 control M-Codes, 12-3
limit switch, 3-5 edit help, 7-18
Line Number (F8) M107
adds line numbers on the Draw image, dry run, Off-cancel M105 and M106
8-9 basic M-functions, 7-12
screen, illustration, 8-9 control M-Codes, 12-3
View Type (F5) screen, 8-6 edit help, 7-18
liquid crystal display. See LCD M19
loaded program, name, 3-10 spindle orientation
local variables, description, 17-9 control M-Codes, 12-3
Log Files (F3), referenced, 3-14 edit help, 7-18
Log to (SHIFT + F4), program screen, 10-4 spindle functions, 7-12
logical symbols, listed, 17-30 to use G86, boring unidirectional cycle,
logical terms, description, 17-30 5-6
loop M2
counter, 3-10 end of program
function, 5-58 basic M-functions, 7-12
machine status display, 3-10 control M-Codes, 12-3
programming, example, 5-58 edit help, 7-18
LOOP - END, description, 17-29 M3
spindle forward
M control M-Codes, 12-2
M extension, created, using DXF converter, edit help, 7-18
16-1, 16-8 spindle functions, 7-12
M0 to use G86, boring unidirectional cycle,
program stop mode 5-6
basic M-functions, 7-12

Index-16 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

M30 software, DXF converter, 16-1

jump to new program status display area
basic M-functions, 7-12 labels, 3-10
control M-Codes, 12-3 manual screen area, 3-9
edit help, 7-18 macro
M4 body structure, description, 17-18
spindle reverse defined, 17-11
control M-Codes, 12-2 G65 program, example, 17-20
edit help, 7-18 G65 subprogram, example, 17-20
spindle functions, 7-12 G66/G67 program, example, 17-21
to use, G86, boring unidirectional cycle, letter addresses, listed, 17-19
5-6 passing, parameters, 17-18
M5 programming (hole milling macro)
spindle Off example, 17-23
control M-Codes, 12-2 setting, parameters, 17-18
edit help, 7-18 SLOTMAC.G program, example, 17-22
spindle functions, 7-12 symbol or name variables, description,
to use G86, boring unidirectional cycle, 17-23
5-6 macro call
M6 modal, (G66), edit help, 7-11
tool mount single, (G65), edit help, 7-11
control M-Codes, 12-2 manual
edit help, 7-18 mode
tool activation, 9-11 feed, to activate, 3-15
tool change, 7-12 jog, continuous move, 3-18
M8 jog, incremental move, 3-18
coolant On move types, 3-11
control M-Codes, 12-2 rapid, to activate, 3-15
cooling, cleaning, & lubrication, 7-12 screen, illustration, 3-9
edit help, 7-18 settings, 3-11
M9 operation, 3-1
coolant Off panel
control M-Codes, 12-2 illustration, 3-6
cooling, cleaning, & lubrication, 7-12 keys, listed, 3-7
edit help, 7-18 LEDs, 3-8
M9387, M-Code, probe select, 17-26 screen
M98 illustration, 3-2, 3-9
call subprogram soft keys, listed, 3-12
basic M-functions, 7-12 soft keys, secondary, listed, 3-12
control M-Codes, 12-3 Manual Data Input. See MDI
edit help, 7-18 manual tool diameter measure for special
M99 tools, G153, 5-73
end of subprogram manual tool diameter preset, G153
basic M-functions, 7-12 defined, 5-63
control M-Codes, 12-3 description, 5-73
description, 5-57 manual tool-length offset preset, G152
edit help, 7-18 for special tools, description, 5-71
macro terminated, 4-26 manual tool-length offset preset, G152
machine defined, 5-63
home, move reference from, (G30), 4-17 mark
setup, 3-1 all programs, 10-12

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice Index-17

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

program, 10-11 mirroring (G100)

Mark All, marking, all programs, 10-12 canceled by G92, 4-33
Mark Blk OFF, Edit Funct (F8) pop-menu, description, 4-34
unmarking blocks, 6-7 edit help, 7-10
Mark Blk ON, Edit Funct (F8) pop-menu, miscellaneous codes. See M-Codes
marking blocks, 6-7 MM mode format, (G71), 4-32
Mark, program, to mark, 10-11 MM, (G71), edit help, 7-5
marking, program blocks, 6-7 modal corner, rounding/chamfering, (G59,
Match Case (F4) G60), 4-21
find/replace screen, 6-11 modal function, 3-11
Replace with, feature, 6-13 modal G-Codes
matrix pattern, illustration, 5-11 defined, 4-1
M-Code listed, table, 4-1
control codes, description, 12-3 modal radius/chamfer, (G59), edit help, 7-5
control codes, table, 12-3 modifiers
controlled functions, table, 12-2 description, 17-1
function, description, 12-1 listed, 17-1
groups, listed, 7-12 More Funcs (F4), Msgs screen, 3-14
listing, 7-18 mouse, USB, 13-2
M9387, probe select, 17-26 Move (F7)
machine status display, 3-10 edit screen, description, 6-5
type in, manual, 7-19 End of Block, feature, 6-10
M-Codes, listed, 7-18 End of Prog, feature, 6-10
MDI goto block, illustration, 6-13
defined, 3-19, 11-1 pop-up menu, description, 6-5
manual mode, 3-11 pop-up menu, illustration, 6-5
mode, description, 3-19 Start of Block, feature, 6-10
screen, illustration, 3-19 Start of Prog, feature, 6-10
to use, 3-20 Move Cursor (F5)
measure, length offsets, 9-13 move cursor in the Draw image, 8-15
memory sticks, USB, 13-2 screen, illustration, 8-15
menus move, program, other directories, 10-10
Edit Help G-Code, 7-13 Msgs. See also messages
pop-up, 2-8 Msgs (F1)
messages Opts (F9) screen, 8-8
(SHIFT + F1) screen, illustration, 3-14 screen, description, 8-8
(SHIFT + F1), description, 10-4 Msgs (SHIFT + F1)
F1, Opts (F9) screen, description, 8-8 auto mode screen, 11-3
Msgs (SHIFT + F1), description, 3-14 description, 3-14
tool page, 9-7 screen, illustration, 3-14
M-functions, groups, listed, 7-12 single-step screen, 11-3
mill cycle, (G175) soft keys, description, 3-14
description, 5-38
edit help, 7-9 N
screen illustration, 7-21 name variables, description, 17-23
mill, 4-axis, programming example, 15-4, negative radius value, 7-6
15-5 negative signs, 7-3
milling and profiles, description, 7-9 nesting subprograms, 5-54
minus sign, address, example, 17-13 new, program, creating, 10-7
minutes to decimal, conversion formula, 15-1 non-modal G-Codes
defined, 4-1

Index-18 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

listed, table, 4-1 outside profile

NOT operator, description, 17-31 circular profile cycle, (G171), 5-34
number of parts, counter, 11-10 ramp moves, illustration, 5-36
ramp position, illustration, 5-34
O overwrite, text mode, 2-9
OEM, common (global) variables, macro
P
numbers, 17-9
off-line P/N 627787-21, 6000i CNC Technical
program group, illustration, 14-2 Manual, referenced, 3-13, 3-14, 5-62, 5-
software 78, 9-10, 11-3
desktop icon, 14-2 Page Down (F6), paging, through program,
DXF converter, 16-1 6-14
installation, 14-1 page down, feature, 6-14
shut down, 14-1 Page Up (F5), paging, through program,
starting, 14-1 6-14
offset page up, feature, 6-14
activate, via program, 9-32 Pan (F4)
active tool, machine status display, 3-10 pan the Draw image, 8-14
table, illustration, 4-19 screen, illustration, 8-14
tool page, entering, 9-13 parameter register, description, 17-11
tool page, errors, to correct, 9-13 parameters, description, 17-11
Offset (F3) parametric programming
description, 9-9 description, 17-10
fixture offset table, to activate, 4-19 parenthesis, example, 17-13
OLM (SHIFT + F8) parenthesis, example, 17-13
auto mode screen, 11-3 part home, position display, manual screen
referenced, 3-13, 9-10 area, 3-9
single-step screen, 11-3 part zero
one shot moves, 3-19 location, 1-2
on-line monitor. See OLM location of, 3-11
operator prompts, 2-9 setting, 1-6
operators, listed, functions, 17-5 to set, (G92), 4-33
optional entry fields, description, 7-3 Z-axis, 9-12
optional, program stop partial arc, example, 4-8
(M01), See M1, 12-3 parts counter
(M1), control M-Codes, 12-3 CNC, description, 11-10
Opts (F9) F4, pop-up window, 11-10
display Draw options screen, 8-8 illustration, 11-10
screen, illustration, 8-8 Parts Counter (SHIFT + F4)
order of execution, codes, 12-4 auto mode screen, 11-3
order of operations, 17-14 single-step screen, 11-3
OSC (SHIFT + F7) parts, machine status display, 3-10
auto mode screen, 11-3 passing, macro parameters, 17-18
referenced, 3-13 pattern drill cycles, description, 5-10
single-step screen, 11-3 P-Code, M99, end of subprogram, 5-57
oscilloscope. See OSC peck drill cycle, (G83)
other G-functions, description, 7-11 description, 5-4
outside corner finding, G142, 5-83 edit help, 7-9
outside part corner find, G142 perimeter pattern, illustration, 5-11
defined, 5-78 peripherals, supported, 13-2
description, 5-83

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice Index-19

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

plane selection probe

(G17, G18, G19), 4-12 cycles, description, 5-61
description, 1-8 M9387, M-Code, probe select, 17-26
illustration, 4-13 move, (G31), 5-61, 17-26
XY G17, 5-77 referenced, 4-17
Plane View (F1), View Type (F5) screen, 8-5 spindle
plane, illustration, 1-8 canned cycle, settings, 5-78
PLC (SHIFT + F5), referenced, 3-13, 9-10 positioningFeedrate_Normally,
plunge description, 5-91
circular pocket cycle (G177) spindle cycles
description, 5-43 description, 5-61, 5-77
edit help, 7-10 G-code designations, 5-77
position the start hole, 5-44 listed, 5-79
screen illustration, 7-25 tool
rectangular pocket cycle (G178) calibAndToolMeasurementRPM,
description, 5-44 description, 5-67
edit help, 7-10 diameterOfToolProbeGauge,
screen illustration, 7-25 description, 5-64
pocket orientation, description, 5-65
cycles probeOrientation, description, 5-65
description, 5-13, 7-10 to calibrate, description, 5-64
face mill cycle, description, 5-32 ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast, description,
with islands (G162), subroutines, 5-67
example, 5-27 ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium,
polar coordinates description, 5-67
description, 1-6 ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow, description,
illustration, 5-10 5-67
pop-up ZRapidToStartPositionFromHome,
menus description, 5-68
Create, Program Name, 10-7 ZRetractAmount, description, 5-70
description, 2-8 tool cycles
Edit Funct (F8), edit screen, illustration, description, 5-62, 5-63
6-6 tool probe G-code cycle designations,
Move (F7), edit screen, illustration, 6-5 5-62
Utils (F9), description, 10-9 tool-length offset, description, 5-62
Utils (F9), illustration, 10-8 probeOrientation, description, 5-65
parts counter, F4, 11-10 Prog Contr. (F9)
position adds the program contour line on the
display modes, listed, 11-6 Draw image, 8-10
display, Z-axis, 9-12 screen, illustration, 8-10
locating, illustration, 1-5 View Type (F5) screen, 8-6
positioningFeedrate_Normally, description, program
5-91 accumulated run-time timer, description,
positions, defining, 1-5 11-10
positive radius value, 7-6 area, labels, 3-10
positive value, assumed, 7-3 area, manual screen area, 3-9
powering block separators, description, 17-2
off, 3-5 copy, other directories, 10-10
on, 3-1 create, new program, 10-7
precautions, general, 9-28 definition, 1-3
PRINT variable, description, 17-12 delete, groups, 10-12

Index-20 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

display mode, description, 11-6 to delete, 10-8

editor tool path, general precautions, 9-28
activating, 6-1 unmark, 10-11
activating, from Draw Graphics, 6-2 unmark all, 10-12
activating, from Manual screen, 6-2 using real-time Draw, while running
activating, from Program Manager, 6-2 programs, 11-8
end of viewing with Draw, 8-1
(M02), See M2, 7-18 Program
(M2) (F2), from Manual screen, 1-2
basic M-functions, 7-12 screen
control M-Codes, 12-3 illustration, 10-1
edit help, 7-18 soft keys, listed, 10-3
exit, F10, Draw, 8-16 soft keys, secondary, listed, 10-3, 10-4
getting started, 1-2 to activate, 10-4
group, illustration, 14-1, 14-2 SHIFT keys, to activate, 10-4
halted, clearing, 11-8 Utils (F9), pop-up menu
listing description, 10-9
description, 6-2 illustration, 10-8
include comments, 6-16 program, block
management, description, 10-1 cancel edits, 6-9
mark, 10-11 copying, 6-15
mark all, 10-12 deleting, 6-8
move, other directories, 10-10 mark and copy, 6-15
name, 3-10 mark and cut, 6-15
name, description, 6-2 marking, 6-7
names, choosing, 10-7 paste, within program, 6-15
offsets, activate, 9-32 restore, cancel edits, 6-9
optional stop, (M01), See M1, 7-18 unmarking, 6-7
optional, stop, (M1) use, to enter, 7-3
basic M-functions, 7-12 program, directory
edit help, 7-18 description, 10-1
parts counter, description, 11-10 display, changing, 10-5
parts counter, illustration, 11-10 programmable logic controller. See PLC
position display, manual screen area, 3-9 programmable temporary path tolerance
program area label, 3-10 (G1000), description, 4-36
rename, 10-11 programming
requirements for Draw, 8-2 angular motion, example, 4-6
running, 11-1 arcs, description, 7-6
running, one step at a time, 11-2 axis rotation, examples, 4-29
run-time timer, description, 11-10 background, soft key, description, 11-3
scroll, feature, 6-14 block separators, description, 17-2
select, for editing, 10-7 block skip, description, 17-10
selecting for running, 10-7 circular profile cycle, 5-34
stop mode (M00), See M0, 7-18 concepts, 1-3
stop mode, (M0) conventions, rotary/U-axis, 15-2
basic M-functions, 7-12 corner rounding/chamfering, example,
control M-Codes, 12-3 4-22
edit help, 7-18 exact stop, non-modal, (G9), 4-12
T-Code, tool page offset, 9-15 examples
timer, description, 11-10 4-axis, description, 15-2
timer, illustration, 11-10 4-axis, drill, 15-3

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice Index-21

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

4-axis, mill, 15-4, 15-5 ramp move, 9-18

expressions ramping into compensated move, illustration,
description, 17-5 9-19
examples, 17-6 rapid move (G0)
listed, 17-5 description, 4-4
face mill cycle, 5-32 edit help, 7-5
functions, description, 17-5 rapid traverse illustration, 4-4
functions, listed, 17-5 rapid traverse, program blocks, 4-4
G41, example, 9-29 rapid move, speed, adjusting, 3-15
G42, example, 9-30 Rapid, mode, 3-17
loop, example, 5-58 read only variables, description, 17-9
modifiers, listed, 17-1 real-time
parametric, description, 17-10 Draw mode, 8-1
part’s edge, 9-16 Draw, using while running programs, 11-8
rectangular profile cycle, 5-36 mode, Draw screen, 11-8
selective block skip, description, 17-11 rectangular
single moves, 3-19 pocket cycle, (G78), 5-22
straight-line, example, 4-5 pocket cycle, (G78), edit help, 7-10
subprogram profile cycle, (G172), 5-36
example, 5-56 profile cycle, (G172), edit help, 7-9
illustration, 5-55 profile cycle, (G172), screen illustration,
multiple parts, 5-57 7-21
system variables, listed, 17-8 red icon, program hold, program area, 3-10
thread mill cycle, 5-40 Redo (SHIFT + F4), restore, canceled edits,
tool offset modification, example, 17-4 6-9
user variables reference point
block skip, description, 17-9 move from machine home, (G30), 4-17
common (global), description, 17-9 return from, (G29), 4-16
description, 17-9 return from, (G29), edit help, 7-11
local, description, 17-9 return, (G28), 4-15
read only, description, 17-9 return, (G28), edit help, 7-11
static (global), description, 17-9 remaining, seconds in a dwell, 3-10
variable, description, 17-10 reminders, tool page, 9-7
Projection View (F3), View Type (F5) screen, rename, program, 10-11
8-5 Replace (F6), Replace with, feature, 6-13
prompts replace, specific text, 6-11
Msgs, 10-4 required entry fields, description, 7-3
operator, 2-9 reset, after stop, 3-5
tool page, 9-7 reset, servo drive, 3-2
protected positioning move, G146 resetting, the servos, 3-5
defined, 5-78 Restart Pos (F1), jog/return screen,
description, 5-91 description, 11-12
protected probe positioning, G146, 5-91 restarting, a program, 11-4
restore
Q block, feature, 6-9
quill position, Z0, 9-12 cancel edits to block, feature, 6-9
Quit (SHIFT + F10), cancel unsaved edits, 6-7 deleted blocks
using Undo (SHIFT + F3), 6-9
R Return (F10)
ramp choices inside a square, illustration, exit, Find/Replace screen, 6-11
9-21 jog/return screen, description, 11-12

Index-22 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

return from reference point, (G29), edit help, DXF, illustration, 16-2
7-11 edit, illustration, 6-2
right hand tool compensation, illustration, EndMill cycle, (G176), screen illustration,
9-17 7-22
rotary axis engrave cycle (G190), screen illustration,
programming conventions, 15-2 7-23
programming, description, 15-1 face mill cycle (G170), illustration, 7-20
programming, in absolute, 15-2 Find (F8), tool page, illustration, 9-9
programming, in incremental, 15-2 Find in Table (F8), tool page, illustration,
Rotate (F3) 9-10
rotate Draw image, 8-13 Find/Replace (F8), illustration, 6-11
screen, illustration, 8-13 Help screen, 7-1
rotation, (G68), edit help, 7-10 Line Number (F8), illustration, 8-9
rotation, scaling, and mirroring, description, manual mode, 3-9
7-10 Manual, illustration, 3-2
RPM, machine status display, 3-10 MDI, illustration, 3-19
Run (F1) mill cycle (G175), screen illustration, 7-21
run Draw program, 8-2 Move Cursor (F5), illustration, 8-15
run program without pause, 8-3 Msgs (F1), Opts (F9) screen, 8-8
running Msgs (SHIFT + F1), 3-14
program, one step at a time, 11-2 Opts (F9), illustration, 8-8
programs, 11-1 Pan (F4), illustration, 8-14
run-time timer, description, 11-10 plunge circular pocket cycle (G177),
screen illustration, 7-25
S plunge rectangular pocket cycle (G178),
saving, edits, 6-7 screen illustration, 7-25
scaling, (G72), edit help, 7-10 Prog Contr.(F9), illustration, 8-10
S-Code Program, illustration, 10-1
description, 12-1 rectangular profile (G172), illustration,
function, description, 12-1 7-21
screens Rotate (F3), illustration, 8-13
Adjust Blk Form (F1), illustration, 8-11 SHIFT Edit, illustration, 6-2
Adjust View (F6), illustration, 8-7 SHIFT Manual, illustration, 3-2, 3-4
Auto, illustration, 11-7 SHIFT Program, illustration, 10-3, 10-4
basic drill cycle (G81), screen illustration, SHIFT Tool page, illustration, 9-2
7-23 Show Details (SHIFT + F7), illustration,
Change Layout (SHIFT + F9), illustration, 10-6
10-5 Single Step, illustration, 11-3
circular profile cycle (G171), illustration, slot cycle (G210), screen illustration, 7-26
7-20 Thread Mill cycle, (G181), screen
circular slot cycle (G211), screen illustration, 7-22
illustration, 7-26 Tool page, illustration, 9-1
CounterBore drill cycle (G82), screen Up Dir (SHIFT + F10), illustration, 10-6
illustration, 7-24 View Type (F5), illustration, 8-5
display gauge from SHIFT Manual, Zoom (F2), illustration, 8-12
illustration, 3-3 scroll, feature, 6-14
Display Program (F8), illustration, 8-4 search, for specific text, 6-11
Draw (real-time mode), 11-8 secondary soft keys
Draw, illustration, 8-2 Auto mode screen, listed, 11-3
drill pattern cycle (G179), screen Manual screen, listed, 3-12
illustration, 7-24 Program screen, listed, 10-3, 10-4

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice Index-23

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

Single Step screen, listed, 11-3 shut down screen, 14-1

Tool page, listed, 9-7 soft keys, description, 3-13
seconds to degrees, conversion formula, shut down, off-line software, 14-1
15-1 shutting down, CNC, 3-5
seconds, remaining in a dwell, 3-10 SIK (SHIFT + F9), referenced, 3-13
select simulation, mode, Draw, 8-1
copy to destination, pull up menu, 10-10 Single Step (F4), run program one block at a
move to destination, pull up menu, 10-10 time, 8-3
selecting single surface measure/edge find, G141
axis, 3-17 defined, 5-78
program for editing, 10-7 description, 5-82
program for running, 10-7 single-step
program for utilities, 10-7 screen, illustration, 11-3
selective block skip, description, 17-11 secondary, soft keys, listed, 11-3
servo drive, to reset, 3-2 soft keys, listed, 11-3
SERVO RESET key, illustration, 3-7 single-step mode
servos auto mode, switch to, 11-6
disengage, 3-5 defined, 11-1
reactivating, 3-5 program, to run, 11-2
reset, 3-5 running, one step at a time, 11-2
to activate, 3-5 starting block, select using arrow keys,
setting 11-4
macro parameters, 17-18 toggle to, 8-3
part zero, 1-6 using, 11-4
stroke limit, (G22), 4-14 skew error find, G147, 5-92
TLO for ball end mill, illustration, 9-22 skew error or angle find, G147
variables, 17-13 defined, 5-78
shape description, 5-92
CAM, extension, 16-8 slash code, block skip, description, 17-10
creating, DXF converter, 16-3 slot cycle, (G210)
to delete, 16-3 description, 5-46
Shape (F1), DXF converter, 16-3 edit help, 7-10
shift edit, screen illustration, 6-2 screen illustration, 7-26
SHIFT key, illustration, 2-7 SLOTMAC.G macro program, example,
SHIFT keys 17-22
program screen, to activate, 10-4 soft key
tool page, description, 9-2 active, 3-10
SHIFT Program, screen, illustration, 10-3 auto mode, listed, 11-3
SHIFT screen basic drill cycle, listed, 5-3
from Manual screen, illustration, 3-2, 3-4 Block search, listed, 11-5
from Program screen, illustration, 10-4 Block search>Find (F8), soft keys, listed,
from Tool screen, illustration, 9-2 11-6
short form addressing, table, 17-29 counterbore drill cycle, listed, 5-3
shortestDistance, parameter, 15-2 display gauge screen, listed, 3-4
Show Details (SHIFT + F7), screen Draw screen, listed, 8-3
illustration, 10-6 DXF converter, descriptions, 16-5
Shut Down (F1) Edit Help, listed, 7-2
shut down screen, 3-5, 3-14, 14-1 editing keys, description, 6-3
Shut Down (SHIFT + F10) Find/Replace, description, 6-12
description, 3-13 jog/return, listed, 11-12
manual mode, 3-5 labels, description, 2-7, 6-2

Index-24 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

Manual screen, listed, 3-12 override, 3-10

Msgs (F1), Opts (F9) screen, 8-8 probe calibration
Msgs (SHIFT + F1), description, 3-14 wired probe, description, 5-81
Program screen, listed, 10-3 wireless probe, description, 5-81
secondary probe calibration cycle, G140
auto mode screen, listed, 11-3 defined, 5-77
Manual screen, listed, 3-12 description, 5-80
Program screen, listed, 10-3, 10-4 probe cycles
single-step screen, listed, 11-3 description, 5-61, 5-77
Tool page, listed, 9-7 G-code, description, 5-77
SHIFT auto mode, listed, 11-3 listed, 5-79
SHIFT single-step, listed, 11-3 probe, canned cycle, settings, 5-78
Shut Down (SHIFT + F10), description, reverse
3-13 (M04), See M4, 7-18, 12-2
single-step, listed, 11-3 (M4)
Tool Page, listed, 9-6 control M-Codes, 12-2
View Type screen, listed, 8-5 edit help, 7-18
software identification key. See SIK to use G86, boring unidirectional
software, basics, 2-8 cycle, 5-6
SPEED (S), defined, 12-1 speed (RPM), 3-10
SPEED, spindle speed speed control, description, 12-1
control M-Codes, 12-3 speed, (SPEED)
edit help, 7-18 control M-Codes, 12-3
spindle functions, 7-12 edit help, 7-18
spindle spindle functions, 7-12
current status, listed, 3-10 sync, tapping canned cycle, 5-5
forward SPINDLE
(M03), See M3, 7-18, 12-2 FORWARD key, illustration, 3-7
(M3) OFF key, illustration, 3-7
control M-Codes, 12-2 OVERRIDE switch, illustration, 3-7
edit help, 7-18 REVERSE key, illustration, 3-7
to use, G86, boring unidirectional Start (ALT + S), start up screen, 14-1
cycle, 5-6 START key, illustration, 3-7
functions M-functions, description, 7-12 Start of Block, Move (F7), feature, 6-10
machine status display, 3-10 Start of Prog, Move (F7), feature, 6-10
Off start of program, feature, 6-10
(M05), See M5, 7-18 start screen, illustration, 3-1
(M5) start up, counter, 14-1
control M-Codes, 12-2 starting block, select
edit help, 7-18 using arrow keys, 11-4, 11-8
spindle functions, 7-12 using Block search, 11-5
to use G86, boring unidirectional starting, Draw, 8-2
cycle, 5-6 static (global) variables, description, 17-9
on FWD, (M3), spindle functions, 7-12 stepover
on REV, (M4), spindle functions, 7-12 approach, 5-32
orientation direction, 5-32
(M19), control M-Codes, 12-3 value, 5-33
(M19), edit help, 7-18 stock-variable, #1030, 9-23
(M19), spindle functions, 7-12 stop, emergency, 3-5
(M19), to use, G86, boring storing, result of computation, 17-14
unidirectional cycle, 5-6 straight-line programming, example, 4-5

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice Index-25

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

stroke limit, (G22), edit help, 7-11 diameter, temporary change, 9-23
subdirectory, creating, description, 10-12 edge, 9-16
subprogram linear-to-circular move, illustration, 9-24
addresses, 5-53 linear-to-linear move, illustration, 9-24
call, (M98) machine status display, 3-10
control M-Codes, 12-3 management, description, 9-1
edit help, 7-18 motion, tool compensation, 9-24
description, 5-52 mount (M06), See mount (M6), 7-18
end of, (M99) mount (M6)
control M-Codes, 12-3 control M-Codes, 12-2
edit help, 7-18 edit help, 7-18
file inclusion, description, 17-31 tool activation, 9-11
loop, repetition, 5-53 tool change, 7-12
nesting, 5-54 mount, TOOL, listed, 7-13
P-Code, M99, end of subprogram, 5-57 number, to find, 9-4
programming offset cancel, illustration, 9-26
example, 5-56 path, compensation, (G41, G42), 9-16
illustration, 5-55 paths during tool compensation,
multiple parts, 5-57 illustration, 9-25
subroutines, pockets with islands, example, radius compensation, description, 7-5
5-27 Tool (F7), jog/return screen, description,
symbol variables, description, 17-23 11-12
system variables, listed, 17-8 tool breakage, length and diameter wear
detection, G154
T defined, 5-63
tapping canned cycle, (G84), 5-5 description, 5-75
tapping cycle, (G84), edit help, 7-9 tool compensation
T-Code, description, 9-11 acute angles, around, 9-27
T-Code, tool page offset, 9-15 acute angles, around, illustration, 9-27
Teach (F9) cancel mode, (G40), 9-22
offsets in tool page, enter, 9-13 tool motion, 9-24
tool length offsets, setting, 9-14 tool diameter
tool probe calibration cycle, 5-64 compensation
teach mode, 3-17 ball end mill, using, 9-21
temporary, change, tool diameter, 9-23 left-hand, (G41), 9-16
text, deleting, 2-9 plane you select, 1-8
THEN, conditional statement, 17-27 right-hand, (G42), 9-17
thread mill cycle, (G181) to measure, 5-74
description, 5-40 tool length and diameter offset preset, G151
edit help, 7-9 defined, 5-62
screen illustration, 7-22 description, 5-66
tool offset, modification
timer permanent, description, 17-2
CNC, description, 11-10 permanent, format, 17-3
machine status display, 3-10 programming, example, 17-4
TLO. See tool-length offset temporary, description, 17-2
TLO, defined, 5-62, 9-12 temporary, format, 17-3
tool tool page
activation, description, 9-11 attributes, listed, 9-4
center, on path, 9-16 Bin (F4) optional attributes, listed, 9-8
definition block, defined, 9-11 cursor, description, 2-9

Index-26 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

definition, 9-1 UnMark, program, to unmark, 10-11

diameter offset, 9-15 unsaved edits, canceling, 6-7
Extra (F2) optional attributes, listed, 9-8 Up Dir (SHIFT + F10), screen illustration, 10-6
labels, description, 9-3 USB
Offset (F3) optional attributes, listed, 9-9 CD-ROM drive, 13-2
offsets, entering, 9-13 defined, 10-10
offsets, errors, to correct, 9-13 floppy disk, 13-2
row, to clear, 9-5 memory stick, back up on, 1-2
Shift keys, description, 9-2 memory sticks, USB, 13-2
single value, to adjust, 9-5 mouse, 13-2
single value, to clear, 9-5 peripherals, supported, 13-2
soft keys, listed, 9-6 USER listing, 10-1
soft keys, secondary, listed, 9-7 user macro G-Codes, listed, 17-17
specific tool number, to find, 9-4 user macros, (G65, G66, G67)
to activate, 9-2 description, 17-17
tool-length offset, 9-12 referenced, 4-25
using, 9-3 user variables
values, changing, 9-5 block skip, description, 17-9
tool probe calibration cycle, G150 common (global), description, 17-9
defined, 5-62 description, 17-9
description, 5-64 local, description, 17-9
tool probe cycles read only, description, 17-9
description, 5-62, 5-63 static (global), description, 17-9
G-code cycle designations, 5-62 USER, user program storage, description,
TOOL, tool mount, tools, 7-13 10-1
tool-length offset using, single-step mode, 11-4
description, 9-12 Utils (F9), pop-up
illustration, 9-12 menu, illustration, 10-8
probe, description, 5-62
setting, 9-14 V
Tools, description, 7-13 variable
TPI/Lead, tapping canned cycle, 5-5 direct transfer, 17-13
transferring, variables, 17-13 indirect transfer, 17-13
truth table, logical symbols, listed, 17-30 programming
typing in, address words, 7-19 description, 17-10
example 1, 17-15
U
example 2, 17-16
U-axis register, description, 17-11
programming, in absolute, 15-2 setting, 17-13
programming, in incremental, 15-2 vectored, feedrate display, 15-2
unary logical not, 17-7 View Type (F5)
unary minus, example, 17-13 display Draw view types, 8-5
unconditional LOOP repeat, description, screen, illustration, 8-5
17-29 view, programs with Draw, 8-1
Undo (SHIFT + F3)
cancel edits, 6-9 W
restore, deleted blocks, 6-9 WHILE, conditional statement, 17-28
universal serial bus. See USB WHILE-DO-END, conditional statement,
unmark 17-28
a program, 10-11 window, zoom, display, DXF, 16-6
all programs, 10-12 wired probe, spindle, description, 5-81

All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice Index-27

November 2009
 CNC User’s Manual
P/N 627 785-22 - Index

wired probe, spindle, description, 5-81 Z work offset update feature, using, 5-95
wireless probe, spindle, description, 5-81 Z0, quill position, 9-12
Z-axis
X description, 1-4
X0, Y0, Z0 Position, 1-5 move startup, 9-22
X-axis, description, 1-4 part zero, 9-12
XY plane (G17), 4-12 position display, 9-12
XY plane (G17), edit help, 7-5 zero degree reference, 1-7
XY plane (G17), spindle probe cycles, 5-77 zero set (G92), edit help, 7-11
XZ plane (G18), 4-12 ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast, description, 5-67
XZ plane (G18), edit help, 7-5 ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium, description,
5-67
Y ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow, description, 5-67
Y-axis, description, 1-4 Zoom (F2), screen, illustration, 8-12
YZ plane (G19), 4-12 Zoom (F2), zoom display Draw image, 8-12
YZ plane (G19), edit help, 7-5 ZRapidToStartPositionFromHome,
description, 5-68
Z ZRetractAmount, description, 5-70
Z position, enter, manually, 9-15

Index-28 All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.

November 2009
627 785-22 · Ver00 · 1 · 11/2009 · Printed in USA